work order no - Green
PROJECT # FTEV 11-1211B
DATE: 19 December 2013
DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR FORCE
SPECIAL OPERATIONS COMMAND
1 SPECIAL OPERATIONS WING
SPECIFICATIONS FOR:
REPAIR 23 STS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
(FTEV 11-1211B)
100% SUBMITTAL
HURLBURT FIELD, FLORIDA
REPAIR 23 STS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
FTEV 11-1211B
INDEX
DIVISION 01
01 00 00
01 09 00
01 10 00
01 33 00
01 41 00
01 56 00
01 58 00
01 60 00
01 65 00
01 70 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Requirements
Reference Standards
Summary of Work
Submittals
Testing Laboratory Services
Environmental Protection
Project Identification Sign
Material and Equipment
Starting of Systems
Contract Closeout
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19
Selective Structure Demolition
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03 30 00
Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04 05 03
Masonry Mortaring and Grouting
04 20 00
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 41 00
Architectural Wood Casework
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 16
Blanket Insulation
07 84 00
Fire Stopping
07 90 00
Joint Protection
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
08 13 14
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
08 14 16
Flush Wood Doors
08 71 00
Door Hardware
DIVISION 09
09 21 16
09 22 16
09 30 00
09 51 13
09 65 00
09 68 00
09 90 00
DIVISION 10
10 14 00
10 21 14
10 28 00
10 44 00
FINISHES
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Non-Structural Metal Framing
Tiling
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Resilient Flooring
Carpeting
Painting and Coating
SPECIALTIES
Signage
Toilet Compartments
Toilet and Bath Accessories
Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 00
Wet- and Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
I-1
REPAIR 23 STS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
FTEV 11-1211B
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 11 19
Plumbing Specialties
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
22 30 00
Plumbing Equipment
22 40 00
Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23
23 05 00
23 05 01
23 05 29
23 05 53
23 05 93
23 07 00
23 08 00
23 09 23
23 31 00
23 33 00
23 34 00
23 37 00
23 81 26
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Common Work Results for HVAC
Mechanical Demolition
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
HVAC Insulation
Commissioning of HVAC
Direct Digital Control System for HVAC
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Air Duct Accessories
HVAC Fans
Air Outlets and Inlets
Split-System Heat Pumps
DIVISION 26
26 05 00
26 05 19
26 05 26
26 05 27
26 05 29
26 05 33
26 05 34
26 05 53
26 24 16
26 27 26
26 28 19
26 35 33
26 51 00
ELECTRICAL
Basic Electrical Requirements
Building Wire and Cable
Grounding and Bonding
Secondary Grounding
Supporting Devices
Conduit
Boxes
Electrical Identification
Panelboards
Wiring Devices
Disconnect Switches
Surge Suppressors
Interior Luminaires
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
27 00 00
Telephone and LAN System
DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
END OF INDEX
I-2
MS0612
SECTION 01 00 00:
PART 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
INTENT:
A. The intent of this project is to provide the Government with a fully complete and useable building
meeting all the requirements for its intended use, constructed to high standards and the requirements
of the Contract Documents. A fully complete and useable building is defined as one that is
constructed to meet the aesthetic, functional and structural properties required by the drawings,
specifications, amendments issued prior to receipt of bids/proposals, and modifications issued after
award of the contract. All work shall be constructed to meet or exceed industry or government
standards, whichever is more stringent. All construction shall be executed in a professional manner
resulting in a finished product of highest quality. All materials, equipment, and other products used in
the construction shall be new or approved recyclable materials from an approved source. All new work
shall be maintained in a clean condition, and shall be installed plumb, square, true to line and grade,
and shall conform to the stated dimensions, notes, schedules, etc. The work shall be properly
secured, consistent in quality, fit and finish, and installation, etc.
1.02
APPLICABILITY:
A. This section of the specification is applicable to all sections that follow.
1.03
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. Prospective bidders desiring further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract
documents shall forward a written request to the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer is the
sole authority for interpretation of intent of work and for approval of quality of materials and
workmanship. Failure to request the above shall not be the basis for a change order. DO NOT
ASSUME THAT YOUR INTERPRETATION IS CORRECT.
1.04
CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR AMBIGUITIES:
A. Prior to submittal of a bid or proposal by the prime/general contractor, it is expected that each
subcontractor, equipment and/or material supplier, and others associated with the project, shall have
carefully examined as necessary, the drawings, specifications, and all addenda issued prior to the
date of submission of the bid or proposal. Any and all conflicts, discrepancies or ambiguous language
reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the above and the project site that will affect the cost,
quality, fit, finish, labor specified or required, equipment and/or materials specified or required, etc.,
necessary to fully complete the project and make it operational for it’s intended use, must
immediately be brought to the attention of the prime/general contractor. The prime/general
contractor must immediately notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to submitting a bid
or proposal and request written clarification of the conflict and/or discrepancy.
B. Conflicts, discrepancies and ambiguous language that are inconsistent with the intent as stated above
include but are not limited to:
1. Ambiguous notes or statements or drawings or details.
2. Conflicting information on the drawings and/or in the specifications.
3. Errors or inconsistencies in schedules.
4. Dimensional errors.
5. Incomplete notes or dimensions or schedules.
6. Extraneous notes, dimensions or schedules that conflict with the drawings or specifications.
C. Conflicts, discrepancies or ambiguities brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer
AFTER award of contract WILL NOT be considered as a basis for a change in the work.
D. The intent of the above paragraphs is to increase the involvement of all persons associated with the
project, particularly during the bid or proposal phase. Increased involvement during this phase will
enhance the accuracy of the bid or proposal and reduce the potential for issuance of change orders during
the construction phase.
1.05
DEFINITIONS:
A. “Contract Documents": Contract Documents consist of the Contract, drawings and specifications, all
addenda issued prior to submission of the bid/proposal and all modifications and/or other directives issued
01 00 00 - 1
MS0612
after the award/execution of the contract. The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide the
Contractor with all items of work necessary for the proper execution and completion of the project. The
items listed are complementary, what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the
event of a conflict between the drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall take precedence
over the drawings, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall perform all work
consistent with and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as necessary to produce the
intended results.
B. “Government”: The government is the United States of America. The government is the owner of the
project.
C. “Prime Contractor”: The Prime/General Contractor is the person or entity who is qualified, bonded and
insured, and who is responsible for preparing the bid/proposal and submitting it to the government. If the
bid/proposal is accepted, the prime contractor will enter into a contract with the government to construct
the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term “contractor” is used throughout the
contract documents, and is synonymous with Prime/General Contractor, and means the contractor or the
contractor’s authorized representative.
D.
“Subcontractor”: A Subcontractor is a person or entity who prepares and submits a bid/proposal for a
portion of the work to the contractor for his use in preparing his bid/proposal. During the construction
phase, the subcontractor has a direct contract with the contractor to perform a portion of the work.
E. “Material/Equipment Suppliers”: Material/equipment suppliers are person(s) or entities who prepare
and submit a bid/proposal to the contractor for his use in preparing his bid/proposal. During the
construction phase, the material equipment supplier has a direct contract with the contractor to provide
certain materials or equipment to be incorporated into the work.
F. “Project”: The project is the total construction of the work to be performed under the contract documents
and may be the whole or part and which may include construction by the government.
G. “Work”: The term work means the providing of construction services required by the contract documents,
and includes all labor, materials, equipment and other incidentals necessary to fulfill the contractor’s
obligations. The work constitutes the whole project.
H. “Changes in the Work”: Changes in the work may be accomplished after award of contract without
invalidating the contract. Changes in the work shall be based upon a mutual agreement between the
contractor and the government. Changes in the work shall be performed under applicable provisions of
the contract documents unless otherwise provided for in the change. The time to complete the additional
work shall also be a part of the agreement.
1.06
COORDINATION:
A. The prime contractor is responsible for the overall coordination of the project during the bid and
or the proposal phase and the construction phase.
1. Coordinate bid and or the proposal phase to assure that all materials, labor, equipment, etc., to be
used in the construction of the project and necessary for the completion of the prime contractor’s
bid/proposal, as defined in 1.01 above, are included in the bids of the respective suppliers and/or
subcontractors work, i.e., civil, architectural, plumbing, HVAC, or electrical.
2. Coordinate construction phase to assure efficient and orderly progression of the work. Coordination
shall include, but is not limited to, periodic meetings between the contractor and subcontractors to
coordinate the work of each trade one with the other, installation of one part of the work that is
dependent on the installation of other components either before or after it's own installation, the
materials and equipment needed to properly complete the work and ordering of those materials and
equipment, preparation of schedules, layouts and phasing of the work as required to meet the
government's stated needs, installation of and removal of temporary facilities, preparation and delivery
of submittals including shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, etc., scheduling of construction
activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results, installation of different components within
the allotted space to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance or repair, periodic
inspections of the work to assure compliance with the Contract Documents, visual inspections of the
work to assure compliance with aesthetic requirements, maintenance and completion of all contract
closeout documents including the coordination of supporting closeout documents by all
subcontractors, maintenance and completion of Construction Data Worksheet, verification of new
utility connections to each item of existing and new equipment, verify measurements of existing and
01 00 00 - 2
MS0612
new work prior to installation of various components, proper storage of materials at the site particularly
items requiring specific environmental conditions, protection of completed new work to minimize
damage by other trades, cleaning, correction of punch list items of work after the final inspection,
correction of warranty items during the warranty period, etc.
3. The prime contractor, each subcontractor, each equipment or material supplier and others who may
be affiliated with the project are individually responsible for field verification of existing and new
conditions that will affect their work, including the work of associated trades. Do not order, fabricate or
install new items without field verification. Any discrepancy between the actual field dimension(s) and
the size shown on the drawings, specifications, shop drawings, manufacturer’s product data, etc. must
immediately be brought to the attention of the prime contractor, project inspector and Contracting
Officer. The prime contractor shall request written direction from the Contracting Officer.
4. Prior to performing any Site work or work below grade, the Contractor must obtain a completed and
signed copy of AF FORM 103, Base Civil Engineering Work Clearance Request.
5. Prior to bringing any lasers on Hurlburt Field, the contractor shall notify the Bio Environmental office
881-1822 and the Safety Office 884-2610.
B. Individual sections of this specification are taken from the Base Master Specification. Therefore, not all
products (materials, equipment, etc.) specified may be required to complete the construction of this
project. In accordance with 1.05 above, the contractor, each subcontractor, equipment and/or material
supplier, and others associated with the project, must carefully examine the drawings to determine which
products are required to fully complete the work. See paragraph 1.04 Discrepancies.
1.07
CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET
A. The contractor must complete the checklist attached at the end of this section.
1. Section 1.a. General Data Required: The government will complete Category Code and Facility
number.
2. Section 1.b. Systems in Building: All.
1.08
METHODS:
A. The site shall be prepared, maintained, and operated by the contractor throughout the Work.
Such preparation, maintenance, and operation include but are not limited to:
1. Preparation: Prevent damage to all existing construction, existing equipment and furnishings, existing
utilities and paved areas, and new items such as recently installed materials and equipment, new
stored materials, trees/shrubs/landscape features identified to remain at the site, and privately owned
vehicles in and around the work site. The contractor responsible for the damage will be held liable for
the repair or replacement of the damaged item as directed by the Contracting Officer.
2. Safety and Security: Occupied and unoccupied facilities must be maintained in a safe manner to
prevent the possibility of injury to the occupants and workmen. Upon completion of the days work, the
contractor is responsible for securing the facility to prevent unlawful entry to the facility. If the interior of
the facility or any equipment or furnishings are damaged due to the contractor's failure to properly
secure the facility, the prime contractor and/or the subcontractor responsible for securing the facility
will be held liable for the repair of the facility and replacement of the damaged equipment or
furnishings as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3. Maintenance: Maintain the site in a neat and orderly manner to include daily trash/debris removal,
stacking of material, control of surface drainage, mowing, and road sweeping.
4. Operation: Follow Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements, US Army Corps of
Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1, base law enforcement and base fire
marshal requirements.
5. Trailers used for storage and/or temporary field offices shall be clean and well maintained and display
only the name of the contractor or subcontractor.
1.09
CONSTRUCTION:
A. All work will be of professional quality. Intent of construction includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Utility connections shall be clean and complete. Contractor must request a utility outage from the
Contracting Officer no less than 3 working days prior to a scheduled outage for a single facility, and 14
days for outages affecting multiple facilities.
2. Backfilling and compaction will be performed so settling shall not occur.
3. All disturbed areas and all new graded areas shall be graded smooth and sodded. Seeding will be
permitted only if indicated on the drawings and/or approved by the Contracting Officer. Also, see
other applicable sections(s) of the specification.
01 00 00 - 3
MS0612
4. Construction shall be built to minimum industry tolerances unless otherwise noted and shall be
square, true to line and grade, plumb and straight. Construct to the dimensions and elevations given
on the drawings.
5. Finishes shall be consistent in color and texture, and shall cover all exposed surfaces, including
obscure surfaces.
6. All work shall be constructed and/or installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions, copies of which must be included with submittal documents.
7. Road/pavement cuts are not permitted unless approved by the Contracting Officer. If approved,
road/pavement cuts must be submitted to the 1Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron,
Programs Flight (1 SOCES/CEP) in writing, two weeks prior to the scheduled road/pavement cut.
8. Under no circumstances will a utility outage or road cut be permitted without the required notification
unless the Base Civil Engineer deems it an emergency.
9. Any contractor that connects to a Hurlburt Field fire hydrant for water usage must use an approved
backflow preventer and provide proof to the 1 SOCES/CEAN (ASSETT Management Flight) through
the Contracting Officer that they are using a certified backflow prevention device. The certificate must
be current to within 12 months of the date of connection and through the duration of water usage.
Certification must be by a Certified Backflow Tester certified by the State.
10. Temporary electric power, natural gas and water used by the contractor during construction shall be
provided by the government at no cost to the contractor. The contractor shall provide temporary
meters for each utility. Each temporary meter shall be read by the contractor monthly on the last
working day of the month and submitted to the Hurlburt Field Energy Manager on that same day. At
the completion of the project and acceptance by the government, the contractor shall remove the
temporary meters and make the final connections to the utility.
1.10
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS:
A. This project shall be constructed to conform to the latest edition of the following standards.
1. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
2. ACI: American Concrete Institute
3. International Code Council
a. International Building Code
b. International Fuel Gas Code
c. International Mechanical Code
d. International Plumbing Code
e. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
f. NEC: National Electric Code
g. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for
Buildings.
h. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.
i. Americans with Disabilities Act
j. ASCE 7-98
k. 1 Special Operations Civil Engineer Squadron Design & Construction Standards. (Copy in 1
SOCES Engineering Flight office)
l. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development.
B. The contractor is required to comply with all aspects of the Federal Aviation Regulation (FAR), Part 77,
Objects Affecting Navigable Airspace, for all work associated with this contract. This includes, but is
not limited to, the use of any and all equipment used to construct the facility and the facility itself. The
contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits including FAA form 7460-1 (latest edition) and
provide all necessary notices associated with this requirement. All work within the following areas must
be coordinated in writing with the Contracting Officer 21 days in advance of commencement of the work:
1. LATERAL CLEARANCE AREA: A line 1000 feet from and parallel to the centerline of the runway.
2. TAXIWAY SETBACK: A line 200 feet from and parallel to the centerline of any taxiway.
3. APRON SETBACK: A line 125 feet from and parallel to the edge of the aircraft-parking apron.
4. CLEAR ZONE: A line 1500 feet from and parallel to the centerline of the runway beginning at the
runway threshold and continuing for a distance of 3000 feet north and south of the ends of the runway.
C. A copy of FAR Part 77, and permit applications may be obtained from:
ARP Division ASO-600
Federal Aviation Administration
P. O. Box 20636
Atlanta, Georgia 30320
Phone 404-3056700
01 00 00 - 4
MS0612
1.11
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Throughout these specifications and/or on the drawings one or more "Trade Names" for a product may
be listed. When this occurs, all parties agree that the phrases: "or equal," "or approved equal," and
"or equal as approved," follow each "Trade Name" listed. The contractor may submit substitute
products, meeting the identified salient characteristics (physical and functional), to the Contracting Officer
for review and approval. The term “Trade Names” includes Acceptable Manufacturers listed under PART
2 PRODUCTS of the specifications.
B. Approval Required:
1. The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents.
2. All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes and performance shall
require approval by the Contracting Officer before being incorporated into the work.
3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been
specifically reviewed and approved for this Contract by the Contracting Officer.
4. Refer to section 01 60 00 for substitution submittal requirements.
C. Do not assume that materials, equipment or methods submitted, as a substitution, will be
approved as equal. The Contracting Officer is the sole interpreter of the Contract Documents.
1.12
ASBESTOS:
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.13
LEAD BASED PAINT
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.14
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. See section 01 56 00, Environmental Protection
1.15
CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
A. Contractor progress reports shall be made in a timely manner and in accordance with the contract
documents.
B. Contractor shall use the Contract Progress Report form at the end of this section. As indicated on the
form, all listed items of work may not be applicable to this project. Contractor shall submit completed form
to include only those items of work applicable to this project.
C. Item 73, “Close-Out Documents” has been assigned a value of 3%. This amount will be withheld from final
payment until such time as all project record documents (including "As-Built" drawings), operation &
maintenance data, spare parts & maintenance products, warranties, maintenance service, etc., have been
turned over to the government. The contractor and subcontractors are advised to prepare these
documents as the work progresses and not wait until the end of the project. These documents must be
turned over to the government prior to the final inspection. The withholding of payment is not a
penalty but is being done to assure compliance with specification Section 01 70 00 CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
1.16
CONTRACT PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. The contractor must provide a copy of the Contract Progress Schedule for review by the Contracting
Officer and the Construction Manager no later than 5 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to
Proceed. If disapproved, the contractor shall resubmit the revised Contract Progress Schedule within 2
days of the date of the disapproval. The Contract Progress Schedule must be approved within 10 days of
the date of the disapproval. No construction work shall start without an approved Contract Progress
Schedule.
B. The Contract Progress Schedule must be based on the data in the Contract Progress Report attached to
the end of the section.
C. In order to satisfy the contract requirements that work commence within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, the
contractor may commence the submittal process in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
01 00 00 - 5
MS0612
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 00 00 - 6
MS0612
CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET
1. GENERAL DATA REQUIRED:
A. PROJECT INFORMATION:
Project No.: Contract No.:
,
Completion Date:
_____
Category Code: ___________, Facility No.: ____________, Total Cost: ___________________
Liquidated Damages______________________________.
Number of Floors: ______________
General Description: ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
B. SYSTEMS IN BUILDING:
Category
Code
Unit of
Nomenclature
Measure
Amount
880-211
Closed Head Auto Sprinkler
HD/SF
____/___
_______
______________________
____/ ___
____/ ___
_______
_______
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
_______
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
____/ ___
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
________
________
_________________________
________
________
________
________
_________________________
_________________________
880-217
880-221
880-232
872-841
811-147
821-115
821-116
890-125
890-121
826-122
826-123
890-126
824-464
844-368
852-261
852-262
132-133
132-134
890-272
812-223
812-224
812-225
812-226
812-926
812-928
831-157
831-169
832-266
832-267
842-245
843-314
843-315
851-143
AFFF PA Sprink Sys
HD/SF
Auto Fire Detection System
SF/EA
(Include Pull Stations)
Foam Fire System
EA
Security Alarm System
EA
Electric Emergency Power
Generator
KW
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
Or Generator Fuel (Type Fuel)
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
Heating Plt 750/3500 MB
MB
Heating Plt over 3500 MB
MB
Storage Tank for Heating
GA
A/C Plt less 5 TN
TN
A/C Plt 5 to 25 TN
TN
A/C Plt 25 to 100 TN
TN
A/C Plt Over 100 TN
TN
A/C Window Units
SF/TN
Gas Mains
LF
Water Supply, Non-Potable
KG
Veh. Parking (Ops)
SY
Veh. Parking (Non-Org)
SY
Pad, Equip
SY
Ant. Spt Stru
EA
EMCS Field Equip
EA
Prim Dist Line OH
LF
Transformers
KV
Sec Dist Line OH
LF
Prim Dist Line UG
LF
Sec Dist Line UG
LF
Exterior Lighting
EA
(Street or Parking area Lights)
Traffic Lights
EA
Industrial Waste Fuel
Spill Collection (Oil/Fuel)
KG
Sewage Septic Tank
KG
(Facility # it supports)
Sanitary Sewer Main
LF
Sanitary Sewage Pump Station
SF
Water Dist Mains
LF
Fire Protection Water Main
LF
Fire Hydrants
EA
Curbs & Gutters
SY
(Transition between Road & Parking lot)
________
________
________
________
________
________
01 00 00 - 7
Cost
________
________
________
________
________
________
Description (If Required)
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
MS0612
C. RELATED FACILITIES:
Category
Code
Nomenclature
UM
Amount
851-145
851-147
871-183
872-245
872-247
872-248
852-289
890-269
890-181
890-181
890-158
832-255
Driveway
Road
Storm Drain Disposal
Fence, Boundary
Fence, Security
Fence, Interior
Sidewalk
Cathodic Protection Sys
Utility Line Duct-Elec
Utility Line Duct-Comm
Load and Unload Platform
Industrial Waste Main
SY
SY
LF
LF
LF
LF
SY
EA
LF
LF
EA
LF
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Cost
_
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Description (If Reqd.)
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
_________________
__________________
This checklist includes only the basic general construction category codes. More detailed category code listing information is
available through the Real Property office, 884-6167.
01 00 00 - 8
MS0612
CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS
REPORT PERIOD COVERED
NO.
FROM
PROJECT NO. / TITLE
TO
CONTRACT AMOUNT
CONTRACT NO.
COMPLETION DATE
$
NOTE:
ALL ITEMS LISTED MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETED FORM TO
INCLUDE ONLY THOSE ITEMS THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT.
LINE
NO.
1
% OF TOTAL
JOB
WORK ELEMENTS
MOBILIZATION
2
DEMOLITION - ARCHITECTURAL
3
ASBESTOS / LEAD ABATEMENT
4
SITE PREPARATION
5
SITE UTILITIES
6
SITE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
7
SITE FINISH GRADING
8
SITE LANDSCAPING
9
ASPHALT PAVING / BASE
10
CONCRETE CURB / GUTTER
11
CONCRETE BUILDING SLAB / VAPOR BARRIER
12
CONCRETE WALKS / LANDINGS
13
CONCRETE FOOTINGS
14
CONCRETE BEAMS / COLUMNS
15
MASONRY FOUNDATIONS
16
MASONRY SCREENWALLS
17
MASONRY VENEER
18
STRUCTURAL STEEL
19
MISCELLANEOUS METALS / HANDRAILS / GRATES
20
WOOD AND PLASTICS
21
WALL INSULATION
22
ROOF INSULATION
23
EIFS
24
WINDOWS
25
EXTERIOR DOORS
26
STOREFRONT
27
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
28
INTERIOR DOORS
29
HARDWARE
30
EXTERIOR METAL STUDWALLS / SHEATHING
31
INTERIOR METAL STUDWALLS / SHEATHING
32
PAINTING
33
WALL COVERING
34
TOILET ACCESSORIES
35
TOILET PARTITIONS / URINAL SCREEN
36
SIGNAGE
37
RAISED ACCESS FLOOR
01 00 00 - 9
% COMPLETED
THIS PERIOD
% COMPLETE
CUMULATIVE
MS0612
LINE
NO.
38
WORK ELEMENTS
% OF TOTAL
39
PEMB ROOF / FASCIA
41
ELEVATORS / CONVEYING SYSTEMS
42
DEMOLITION - MECHANICAL / PLUMBING
% THIS PERIOD
% CUMULATIVE
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING (PEMB)
43
NEW WATER / SEWER / NATURAL GAS SERVICE
44
PLUMBING ROUGH-IN UNDER SLAB
45
HVAC ROUGH-IN UNDER SLAB
46
PLUMBING ROUGH-IN ABOVE SLAB
47
PLUMBING FIXTURE / TRIM-OUT
48
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
49
PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION
50
DUCTWORK
51
HYDRONIC PIPING
52
FIRE SUPPRESSION
53
HVAC EQUIPMENT
54
GRILLES / DIFFUSERS/ TRIM-OUT
55
CONTROLS
56
TEST AND BALANCE
57
DEMOLITION - ELECTRICAL
58
ELECTRIC SERVICE TEMPORARY
59
TRANSFORMER
60
PRIMARY OVERHEAD ELECTRIC SERVICE
61
PRIMARY UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
62
SECONDARY OH ELECTRIC SERVICE
63
SECONDARY UG ELECTRIC SERVICE
64
ELECTRIC ROUGH-IN
65
COMM / LAN ROUGH-IN
66
FIRE DETECTION ROUGH-IN
67
FIRE DETECTION EQUIPMENT / TRIM-OUT
68
COMM / LAN TRIM-OUT
69
ELECTRIC FIXTURES / TRIM-OUT
70
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
71
BONDING
72
DEMOBILIZATION
73
CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
3%
TOTAL
SCHEDULED AMOUNT THIS BILLING
TOTAL BID AMOUNT:
SCHEDULED:
INSPECTOR SIGNATURE:
ACTUAL:
CONCUR
NOT CONCUR
(CIRCLE)
PROGRESS OR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS SATISFACTORILY COMPLETED THE INDICATED PERCENTAGE OF THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
SUBMITTED BY OR FOR
CONTRACTOR:
BASE CIVIL ENGINEER:
TYPE OR PRINT NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVIEWED BY OR FOR CONTRACTING OFFICER
TYPE OR PRINT NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
01 00 00 - 10
DATE
MS0612
SECTION 01 09 00
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applicability of Reference Standards.
B. Provision of Reference Standards at site.
C. Source and acronyms used for Reference Standards in Contract Documents.
1.02
APPLICABILITY OF REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
B. The publications listed in the various specification sections form a part of the specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
C. Use the latest standard, except when a specific date is specified.
D. Disregard payment provisions contained in any portion of the referenced specifications and standards.
E. If the specified reference standard(s) conflicts with the Contract Documents, request clarification from the
Contracting Officer before proceeding.
1.03
PROVISION OF REFERENCE STANDARDS AT SITE
A. When required by individual specifications sections, obtain a copy of the standard. Maintain a copy at the
jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work until completion.
1.04
ABBREVIATIONS & NAMES
A. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean
the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, and authority having
jurisdiction or other entity applicable. Refer to “Encyclopedia of Associations” published by Gale Research
Co., available in most libraries.
1.05
SOURCE FOR REFERENCE STANDARDS
AAMA
American Architectural Manufactures Association
1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
444 N. Capital St., NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
ACI
American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 19150
Detroit, MI 48219
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
8300 Boone Blvd., #400
Vienna, VA 22182
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
AF&PA
American Forest and Paper Association
111 Nineteenth Street, NW, Suite 800
Washington, DC 20036
01 09 00 - 1
MS0612
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
25 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Suite 800
Washington, DC 20001
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
7012 S. Revere Parkway Suite 140
Centennial, CO 80112
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd St.
New York, NY 10036
APA/EWA APA – The Engineered Wood Association
Order From:
http://www.apawood.org
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N. E
Atlanta, GA 30329
ASNT
American Society for Non-destructive Testing
4153 Arlingate Plaza
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120
Potomac Falls, VA 20165-5874
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
AWS
American Welding Society
P.O. Box 351040
Miami, FL 33135
AWWA
American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy
Denver, CO 80235
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor
New York, NY 10017
01 09 00 - 2
MS0612
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
CISCA
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association
405 Illinois Avenue, 2B
St. Charles, IL 60174
CRI
The Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 No. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
CS
United States Department of Commerce Standard
Order from:
National Technical Information Service
5285 Port Royal Rd.
Springfield, VA 22161
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
14150 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 20151
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
2600 N.W. Lake Rd.
Camas, WA 98607-8542
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
For documents offered at no cost, order from:
Dept. of Transportation
ATTN: M443.2
400 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
FDOT
Florida Department of Transportation
Order from:
http://www.dot.state.fl.us/mapsandpublications/
FM
FM Global
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919-4923
FS
Federal Specifications
Order from:
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
212 Third Avenue North, Suite 504
01 09 00 - 3
MS0612
Minneapolis, MN 55401
FTM-STD
Federal Test Method Standards
Order from:
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
GA
Gypsum Association
6525 Belcrest Road, Suite 480
Hyattsville, MD 20782
GC
Green Seal
1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Washington, DC 20036-5525
MS
Military Specifications (MILSPEC)
Standardization Documents Order Desk
Bldg 4, Section D
700 Robbins Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
MSS
Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St., NE
Vienna, VA 22180
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
800 Roosevelt Rd, Bldg. C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
NBS
National Bureau of Standards
(U. S. Department of Commerce)
Gaithersburg, MD 20234
NEMA
National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy , MA 02169-7471
NFPA
American Wood Protection Association
P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
NIOSH
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(Centers for Disease Control and Prevention)
Order From:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/203-154/method-cas1.html
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S. Department of Labor)
Order from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
21865 Copley Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
SCS
Scientific Certification Systems
2000 Powell Street, Suite 600
01 09 00 - 4
MS0612
Emeryville, CA 94608
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
234 W. Cheves Street
Florence, SC 29501
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1219
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 10915
Pensacola, FL 32524-0915
SSMA
The Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
35 East Wacker Drive, Suite 850
Chicago, IL 60601-2106
SSPC
The Society for Protective Coatings
th
40 24 Street
th
6 Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
TCNA
Tile Council of North America
100 Clemson Research Blvd.
Anderson, SC 29625
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
2600 N.W. Lake Rd.
Camas, WA 98607-8542
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION: NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
01 09 00 - 5
MS0612
SECTION 01 10 00:
PART 1
SUMMARY OF WORK
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, supervision and equipment and perform all
operations necessary to accomplish all work complete in place, as shown on the drawings, specified
herein, or as needed to construct Repairs to STTS Logistics Building 91033. The work will include
removal of existing stud and cmu wall construction, removal of lay-in acoustical ceilings, removal of
gypsum board ceilings, removal of exterior doors, frames, and windows, removal of wall and floor
finishes, and construction of new stud walls, new exterior masonry wall infill, new doors, frames and
hardware, new floor, wall, and ceiling finishes, providing enlarged Men’s bathroom and shower facility,
vestibule, Maintenance Office, and SIPR vault.
1.02
JOB DESCRIPTION:
A. The work to be performed includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following principal features:
1. Demolition of existing walls, floor slabs, ceilings, doors, windows, and finishes;
2. Construction of new stud walls, new exterior masonry infill to match existing construction;
3. Construction of new Men’s Bathroom and Shower facility;
4. Construction of new lay-in acoustical and gypsum board ceilings;
5. Saw-cutting existing masonry wall construction for new doors;
6. Construction of new plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, electrical, and telecommunications
systems to support the new work.
1.03
CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit use of site to allow Owner visitation and inspection.
B. The contractor and subcontractors are permitted to use existing utilities available at the site. Use is
subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. The 1 Special Operations Civil Engineering Squadron must
approve all connections. Connection to existing water mains must utilize a backflow preventer, certified
within the 12 months prior to use on base.
1.04
DISPOSAL
A. All scrap materials and debris shall be disposed of in an on- site dumpster. When full, it shall be
emptied at a legally approved dumpsite off- base. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to
provide the dumpster and for the selection of the dumpsite. Provide Contracting Officer with name(s)
of waste disposal company and approved dumpsite.
1.05
STORAGE AREA
A. Contractor lay-down/materials storage site shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the
Contracting Officer.
B. A minimum of a 6 foot high temporary visual barrier shall surround the area.
C. The area must be maintained in a reasonably clean manner. All empty boxes, paper and trash must be
deposited in the on-site construction dumpster.
1.06
SAFETY
A. The pertinent sections of the following publications are applicable to all work on this project.
1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: EM 385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual.
2. Air Force Instruction (AFI) 91-202.
3. AFOSH Standard 48.139. See Specification Section 01 00 00 General Requirements paragraph
1.06.A.5.
1.07
HAUL ROUTE AND LITTER
A. The Contractor shall utilize only the designated haul route for the project for access to and from the
site as shown on the Drawings.
1.08
USE OF BARGE AREA
01 10 00 - 1
MS0612
A. Use of the barge off loading area is not allowed except as approved, in writing, by the Contracting
Officer. Contractor must request usage of the barge site, in writing, to the Contracting Officer a
minimum of 30 days prior to expected deliveries. Contractor must also submit a schedule of all
deliveries. Under no circumstances should the contractor assume such requests will be approved.
Contractor should plan to have materials delivered by other means.
B. If usage of the barge site is approved, the contractor must meet the following requirements:
1. Crane boom height cannot exceed eighty (80) feet from mean water elevation.
2. Crane boom must have a red flag and an operational blinking obstruction light.
3. Contractor will be responsible for surrounding water quality per the State of Florida Regulations.
Prior to delivery of any barge/crane or tug, contractor must install full-depth turbidity barriers both
east and west of the site to extend beyond limits of off loading operations.
4. Off loading operations will be during daylight hours only. Operations will not start before 0700
(7:00 AM) and boom must be lowered to deck height by 1700 hours (5:00 PM) each day.
5. Contractor is required to provide the name and number of a responsible party, and contact
information of the tug/crane operator at site to both of the following:
a. The Contracting Officer.
b. Hurlburt Tower: Hurlburt Tower – 884-4795. (If tower cannot be contacted notify the Airfield
Manager – 884-4491.
6. Upon notification of inclement weather, off loading operations must cease and the boom lowered
to deck height. Do not raise boom until cleared by the Hurlburt Tower. All barges and equipment
must be secured. Upon notification of Hurcon conditions, the contractor must remove all barges,
cranes, tugs, and associated equipment from the site. The government will not be responsible for
any delays or costs associated to weather.
7. If notified to do so by the Contracting Officer or Hurlburt Tower, operations must cease and the
boom lowered to deck height. Under no circumstances should the boom be raised until cleared
by the notifying authority. The government will not be responsible for any associated delays or
costs.
C. If these requirements cannot be met, the contractor is prohibited from using the barge site. Failure to
adhere to these requirements during operations will result in immediate revocation of site use at no
expense to the government. Site must be maintained per specifications and contractor will be
responsible for any and all clean-up after operations.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. The contractor shall accomplish work in an orderly progression of steps to satisfy the performance
requirements of this specification.
3.02
HOURS OF WORK
A. The normal hours of a workday shall be between 7:00 A.M. and 4:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, except
holidays and observed holidays. The contractor may elect, at his option, to work hours other than normal
duty hours if approved by the Contracting Officer. All work time, other than normal working days, shall be
requested in writing, 3 days in advance.
3.03
PHOTOGRAPHS
A. The contractor will take before and after photographs of the work. "Before" photos will be submitted before
the start of work. "After" photos will be submitted before the acceptance of the work. A minimum of 24
photos of each will be required. Photos must show exterior and interior areas of the building that are to
receive the new work. The intent is to show the amount of change. Photos may be submitted by the Air
Force for design and construction awards. All photos taken shall be in digital format and submitted on
CD. Submit one copy of before and after photos.
3.04
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The contractor shall establish and maintain quality control to assure compliance with Contract Documents,
and maintain records of his quality control for materials, equipment and construction operations.
3.05
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT & VERIFICATION:
01 10 00 - 2
MS0612
A. The contractor shall employ a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to layout the building and other site
features in accordance with the drawings. Potential problems that will affect the site geometry shall
immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer.
B. Horizontal and Vertical Control shall conform to Hurlburt Field Datum: Horizontal NAD-83; Vertical NAVD88.
C. Upon completion of the project and prior to the submission of the "As-Built" drawings (See Section 01 70
00 Contract Closeout), the contractor shall employ a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to perform the
following Horizontal Control by use of Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) to sub-meter accuracy, and
Vertical Control using the above datum.:
1. Location of building corners.
2. Buried water mains, sanitary and/or storm water sewers including all valves, cleanouts, horizontal
turns, etc.
3. Elevations at top of manhole(s), lift stations, storm water structures or similar above ground
structures.
4. Invert elevations of all manholes and stub-outs intended for future connections to the system.
3.06
WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. A warranty inspection will be held thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the contractor’s one-year
warranty. The inspection will be held at the project site. Those in attendance shall include the contractor,
the Contracting Officer, the project inspector, and the occupant. The purpose of this inspection will be to
identify current or re-occurring problems associated with the project and past warranty calls and corrective
action taken to remedy them. The contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer to determine the date of
the inspection. The Contracting Officer shall contact the appropriate government agencies and confirm the
date the inspection is to take place.
B. A list of problems identified at the inspection will be provided to all those in attendance. All problems must
be corrected to the satisfaction of the government prior to the expiration of the warranty
END OF SECTION
01 10 00 - 3
MS0612
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
4
DATE RECEIVED
4
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
SCHEDULES & PLANS
EXTRA STOCK
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MIX DESIGN
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
SAMPLES
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
PROJECT TITLE
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
REPAIR 23 STTS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
01 10 00 DD Form 1354
01 10 00 Photos
01 56 00 Environment Protection
01 81 13 Green Procurement
02 41 19 Selective Structure Demo
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
04 05 03 Masonry Mortaring & Grouting
06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework
07 21 13 Board Insulation
07 84 00 Firestopping
07 90 00 Joint Protection
08 13 14 Standard Steel Doors & Frames
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors
08 71 00 Door Hardware
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 22 16 Metal Framing
09 30 00 Tiling
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceiling
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring
09 68 00 Carpeting
09 69 00 Access Flooring
09 90 00 Painting and Coating
10 14 00 Signage
10 21 14 Toilet Compartments
10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialities
21 13 00 Wet & Dry Pipe Sprinkler
22 11 19 Plumbing Specialties
22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment
SHOP DRAWINGS
LINE NUMBER
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
PROJECT NO.
FTEV 11-1211B
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
REMARKS
1 digital copy on CD
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
1
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
4
4
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
MS0612
22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
23 05 01 Mech Demo (work plan)
23 05 93 Test Adjusting & Balancing
23 09 23 Direct Digital Systems for HVAC
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
23 37 00 Air Outlets & Inlets
23 81 26 Split System Heat Pump
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 27 Secondary Grounding For Elect
26 24 16 Panel Boards
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 19 Disconnect Switches
26 51 00 Interior Lighting
27 00 00 Telephone and LAN System
28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
DATE RECEIVED
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
SCHEDULES & PLANS
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
PROJECT TITLE
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
REPAIR 23 STTS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
EXTRA STOCK
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MIX DESIGN
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
SAMPLES
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
SHOP DRAWINGS
LINE NUMBER
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
PROJECT NO.
FTEV 11-1211B
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
REMARKS
MS0612
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
4
DATE RECEIVED
4
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
SCHEDULES & PLANS
EXTRA STOCK
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MIX DESIGN
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
SAMPLES
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
PROJECT TITLE
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
REPAIR 23 STTS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
01 10 00 DD Form 1354
01 10 00 Photos
01 56 00 Environment Protection
01 81 13 Green Procurement
02 41 19 Selective Structure Demo
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
04 05 03 Masonry Mortaring & Grouting
06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework
07 21 13 Board Insulation
07 84 00 Firestopping
07 90 00 Joint Protection
08 13 14 Standard Steel Doors & Frames
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors
08 71 00 Door Hardware
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 22 16 Metal Framing
09 30 00 Tiling
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceiling
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring
09 68 00 Carpeting
09 69 00 Access Flooring
09 90 00 Painting and Coating
10 14 00 Signage
10 21 14 Toilet Compartments
10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialities
21 13 00 Wet & Dry Pipe Sprinkler
22 11 19 Plumbing Specialties
22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment
SHOP DRAWINGS
LINE NUMBER
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
PROJECT NO.
FTEV 11-1211B
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
REMARKS
1 digital copy on CD
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
1
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
X
X
4
4
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
MS0612
22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
23 05 01 Mech Demo (work plan)
23 05 93 Test Adjusting & Balancing
23 09 23 Direct Digital Systems for HVAC 4
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
4
23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
4
23 37 00 Air Outlets & Inlets
23 81 26 Split System Heat Pump
4
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 4
26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 27 Secondary Grounding For Elect 4
26 24 16 Panel Boards
4
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 19 Disconnect Switches
4
26 51 00 Interior Lighting
4
27 00 00 Telephone and LAN System
4
28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
X
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
FINAL APPROVAL
CONTRACTOR RESUBMITTAL
DISAPPROVED
APPROVED
SUBMITTAL NUMBER
DATE TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
DATE RECEIVED
MANF. / INSTALLER QUAL.
TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
SCHEDULES & PLANS
O & M MANUAL & LEGAL REQ'S
PROJECT TITLE
SOLICITATION/CONTRACT #
REPAIR 23 STTS LOGISTICS BLDG 91033
EXTRA STOCK
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MIX DESIGN
DELIVERY TICKETS
SAMPLE FOR TESTING
PERF. TEST REPORTS
PRODUCT COST DATA
SUSTAINABLE CERTIFICATES
CERTIFICATE/CERTIFICATION
SAMPLES
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
SHOP DRAWINGS
LINE NUMBER
ITEM OR DESCRIPTION OF ITEM, CONTRACT
REFERENCE, TYPE OF SUBMITTAL
WARRANTY FORM/FORMS
PROJECT NO.
FTEV 11-1211B
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
TO BE COMPLETED BY PROJECT ENGINEER
REMARKS
MS0612
SECTION 01 33 00:
PART l
SUBMITTALS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A. Throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials
has been defined by manufacturer's name and catalog number, reference to recognized industry and
Government standards, or description of required attributes and performance.
B. Make all submittals required by the Contract Documents in a timely manner to allow construction of
the building within the allotted performance time.
1. Long lead items such as pre-engineered metal building systems, electrical and mechanical
systems, special equipment, etc. must be submitted within 15 days of Notice to Proceed.
2. All submittals must be made within 45 days of Notice to Proceed.
3. Late submittals that result in delayed delivery of materials and equipment, which will affect
the completion and acceptance of the building by the government, will not be a
justification for a time extension.
4. Revise, submit and/or resubmit (submittals) as necessary to establish compliance with the
specified requirements.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Coordination of Submittals: Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each
item being submitted and verify that each item and the submittal for it conforms in all respects with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. By affixing his signature to each submittal, the contractor
certifies that this coordination and verification has been performed.
B. Certificates of Compliance:
1. Certify that all materials used in the work comply with all specified provisions thereof. Certification
shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from furnishing satisfactory materials if, after tests
are performed on selected samples' the material is found to not meet specific requirements.
2. Show on each certification the name and location of the work, name and address of contractor,
quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificate applies, and name of the
manufacturing or fabricating company. An officer of the manufacturing or fabrication company shall
sign certificates.
3. In addition to the above information, all laboratory test reports submitted with Certificates of
Compliance shall show the date or dates of testing, the specified requirements for which testing was
performed, and results of the test or tests.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SHOP DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS:
A. Shop Drawings: Make all shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent
aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work.
2.02
MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE:
A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal,
clearly indicate which portion of the contents is being submitted for review.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Consecutively number all submittals.
B.
Internal Identifications: On at least the first page of each copy of each submittal and elsewhere as required
for positive identification, clearly indicate the submittal number in which the item was included.
C. Indicate FTEV Number, Project Title and Contract Number
01 33 00 - 1
MS0612
3.02
COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Prior to submittal for approval, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material including,
but not necessarily limited to:
1. Determine and verify all interface conditions, catalog numbers and similar data.
2. Coordinate with other trades as required.
3. Clearly indicate all deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Grouping of submittals: Unless otherwise specified, make all submittals in groups containing all
associated items to ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. Partial
submittals will be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents and the
contractor shall be strictly liable for all delays so occasioned.
C. Interior Finish Materials/Colors/Samples: All interior finish materials/colors/samples, includIng but not
limited to, flooring, base, paint/stain, wall coverings, acoustic ceiling/suspension system, acoustical
treatment, window treatment, laminated plastic for base/wall cabinets/countertops, interior signage, etc.,
shall be submitted as a group (one submittal) to allow the government to review/approve/disapprove and
select/coordinate the interior finish materials/colors prior to being incorporated into the work. Upon
receipt of the government's approved selections, the contractor shall provide the government with actual
samples of each item for the record, minimum size 4"x4", except laminate plastic chips shall be
manufacturer's standard size.
D. Exterior Finish Materials/Colors/Samples: All exterior finish materials/colors/samples, including but not
limited to, brick, concrete masonry, exterior insulation finish system, stucco, paint/stain, roofing/flashing,
exterior signage, pavers, windows, doors, etc., shall be submitted as a group (one submittal) to allow the
government to review/approve/disapprove and /select/coordinate the exterior finish materials/colors prior
to being incorporated into the work. Upon receipt of the government's approved selections, the contractor
shall provide the government with actual samples of each item for the record, minimum size 4"x4".
3.03
SUBMITTAL APPROVAL:
A. General: Approval by the Contracting Officer shall not be construed as a complete check, but only that
the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review and approval by government
shall not relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors that may exist, or from liability for
failure to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents.
B. Revisions After Approval: When a submittal has been approved, a re-submittal by the contractor for the
purpose of substitution of materials or equipment, will not be considered unless accompanied by an
acceptable explanation as to why the substitution is necessary.
C. Unnecessary Submissions: When the contractor elects to provide the materials, equipment, etc., that
was used as the basis for the design and is the exact: Manufacture's name, catalog number, size, and
finish as shown in the drawings or specified herein, no submittal is required. The contractor however shall
submit a letter to the Contracting Officer stating that he will use the specified product. All field-testing
associated with the material or equipment, etc. must be performed and submitted to the Contracting
Officer for approval.
3.04
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL SUBMITTALS.
A. Assign numbers to these items to be submitted, beginning with the number 1 and continuing through the
last submittal. Items that are disapproved and require resubmittal shall be numbered with the original
submittal number followed by R1 if the first resubmittal of the item, R2 if the second resubmittal, and so
on, until final approval is given.
END OF SECTION
01 33 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 01 41 00:
PART 1
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D3740 – Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as used in Engineering Design and Construction.
B. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Special
Inspection, or Testing Materials Used in Construction.
1.02
SELECTION AND PAYMENT:
A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified
inspection and testing. One laboratory shall perform all tests for project.
B. The Government will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
inspection and testing deemed to be in the best interest of the Government. The contractor will be
responsible for the cost of all inspections, testing and replacement of Work not meeting the Contract
Documents.
C. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740.
B. Laboratory: Licensed and authorized to operate in State of Florida.
C. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants.
D. Certification: Current Certification by Construction Materials Council, Inc.
1.04
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS:
A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address and telephone number, and the name
or names of the Professional Engineer(s), currently registered in the state of Florida, who will be
certifying the reports or tests and a responsible officer of the company
B. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of
remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
1.05
LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Provide qualified personnel at site.
B. Perform specified inspection, sampling, making cylinders, etc., and testing of all products in accordance
with Contract Documents.
C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Provide certified copies of the reports or tests as per 1.06 below. The Professional Engineer shall affix his
name and date to all reports or tests before affixing his impression seal over both.
1.06
LABORATORY REPORTS:
A. After each inspection and test and prior to providing copies to the contractor, the Testing
Laboratory shall promptly forward one (1) copy of each laboratory report directly to the
Contracting Officer for record purposes. Mail to Contracting Officer, 1 SOCONS, 350 Tully St.,
Hurlburt Field, FL 32544.
01 41 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each laboratory report as per Section 01 33 00 to the
Contracting Officer for review and approval.
C. Include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in the project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
8. Date of test.
9. Results of test.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
D. When requested by Contracting Officer, provide interpretation of test results.
1.07
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY:
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of the contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.08
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Notify laboratory of the location of the construction site and samples of materials proposed to be used,
which require testing.
B. Provide laboratory all proposed mix designs.
C. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work, to manufacturer's literature and
other pertinent data.
D. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle
samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage
and curing of test samples.
E. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection,
sampling, and testing services.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 41 00 - 2
MS0713
SECTION 01 56 00
PART 1
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. The environmental protection required for this contract.
1.02. REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard
40 CFR 110, Discharge of Oil
40 CFR 112, Oil Pollution Prevention
40 CFR 122, EPA administered permit programs
40 CFR 125, National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
40 CFR 260-271, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
40 CFR 260-279, Hazardous Waste and Used Oil Management
40 CFR 300, National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 355, Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 403, General Pretreatment Regulations for Existing and New Sources of Pollution
49 CFR 171-172, General Information, Regulations and Definitions, and Hazardous Waste
2. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA PL 96-510, Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation & Liability Act
3. FLORIDA ADMINISTRATION CODE (FAC)
FAC 62-25, Regulation of Stormwater Discharge
FAC 62-150, Hazardous Substance Release Notification
FAC 62-210, Stationary Sources – General Requirements
FAC 62-212, Stationary Sources – Preconstruction Review
FAC 62-346, Environmental Resource Permitting in Northwest Florida
FAC 62-555, Permitting, Construction, Operation, and Maintenance of Public Water Systems
FAC 62-604, Collection Systems and Transmission Facilities
FAC 62-730, Hazardous Waste
FAC 62-762, Aboveground Storage Tank Systems
FAC 62-770, Petroleum Contamination Site Cleanup Criteria
4. HURLBURT FIELD INSTRUCTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
Hurlburt Field Directive for Mercury and Fluorescent Lamps
Hurlburt Field Ozone Depleting Management Plan
Hurlburt Field Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan
Hurlburt Field Installation Restoration Program (IRP) Management Action Plan
Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Management Plan
Hurlburt Field Asbestos Management and Operations Plan
Hurlburt Field Lead Based Paint and Lead Hazard Plan
Hurlburt Field Landscape Development Plan
Hurlburt Field Environmental Policy
5. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTIONS AND DIRECTIVES
AFI 23-204 Organizational Fuel Tanks
AFI 32-7001 Environmental Management
AFI 32-7042 Waste Management
AFI 32-7044 Storage Tank Compliance
AFI 32-7064 Natural Resources
AFI 32-7086 Hazardous Materials Management
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for environmental protection of all items set
forth herein. The Contractor shall record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws,
regulations, permit requirements, ordinances, and corrective action taken. The Contractor shall
immediately inform the Contracting Officer of any environmental problem.
1.04
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE
01 56 00 - 1
MS0713
A. Permits: The contractor shall ensure that all required environmental permits are in their
possession prior to start of construction and/or installing or operating any new or modified
equipment or processes or disturbing or clearing any land area.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for operating within permit limits and abiding by all permit
conditions. 1 SOCES/CEAN shall be notified immediately of any exceedances of permit limits or
violation of permit conditions. The contractor shall immediately notify 1 SOCES/CEAN of any
unforeseen environmental conditions, which may conflict with approved permits. Any
certifications required by permits shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Copies of all
permits and certifications shall be submitted to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN in
electronic format (.dwg, pdf, or .doc).
C. All certifications, notices and documentation required by environmental permits shall be the
responsibility of the contractor, but must be coordinated through the contracting office and 1
SOCES/CEAN prior to submittal to regulatory agencies.
1. Sanitary Sewer Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor
prior to start of construction. After construction, the line will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. All necessary paperwork (Certification of
Completion Form, as-builts, etc.) will be submitted to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
2. Potable Water Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor
prior to start of construction. After construction, the line will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. For phased projects a permit clearance can be
obtained for each phase by submitting a certification of completion package for each phase
as a partial completion on the entire permitted project. All necessary paperwork (Certification
of Completion Form, as-builts, bacteriologicals, pressure test results, etc) will be submitted to
the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review.
Work is not considered complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and
obtained.
3. Irrigation Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit to the contractor prior to
start of construction. After construction, the system will not be put into use until the permit
clearance has been applied for and obtained. All necessary paperwork (Certification of
Completion Form, as-builts, etc) will be submitted to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
4. Wetland Permit: The government will provide a copy of the permit application to the
contractor prior to start of construction. Prior to start of any construction in a wetland, a Joint
Application for Environmental Resource Permit must be completed by the contractor.
Completion of the application package to include site plan, and signed/sealed drawings must
be submitted to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN. The application must note all best
management practices (BMP's) such as silt screens and must show locations.. The
regulatory agency has 30 days to request additional information. All necessary paperwork
(Certification of Completion Form, as-builts, etc) will be submitted to the contracting office for
1 SOCES/CEAN. The regulatory agency has 30 days to review. Work is not considered
complete until the permit clearance has been applied for and obtained.
5. Generic Stormwater Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction
Activities, F.A.C. 62-621; and Environmental Resource Permit F.A.C. 62-346 if applicable :
a. Prior to start of Construction:
1. Prior to start of any site work the contractor shall submit to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN in electronic format; 1 copy of the Notice of Intent (NOI) Form 62621.300(4)(b); proof of fee payment; 1 copy of the signed Stormwater Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and map; 1 copy of the letter from the regulatory agency
issuing the permit for the project;
2. If F.A.C. 62-346 is applicable, in electronic format: 1 copy of application package
signed and sealed with Form 62-346.900(1) or 10-2 General Permit certification
record; ; 1 copy of the drainage delineation, 1 copy of the supporting engineering
calculations, 1 copy of the geotechnical report (where applicable), 1 copy of the
survey (where applicable), 1 copy regulatory agency letter issuing permit number; 1
copy of the proof of submittal to regulatory agency Form 62-346.900(3) of the
Construction Commencement Notice at least 48 hours prior to start of construction.
01 56 00 - 2
MS0713
b. During Construction::
1. The contractor shall provide to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN at the end
of each month, in electronic format, signed weekly and storm event inspection
reports; and the Notice of Termination (NOT) Form 62-621.300(6) within 14 days of
final stabilization of the site. Copies of the reports must also be kept on-site.
2. If F.A.C. 62-346 is applicable: 1 copy of Form 62-346.900(4) As-Built Certification by
the Engineer of record within 30 days after completion of construction; 1 copy Form
62-346.900(6) request for conversion of Stormwater Management Permit
Construction Phase to Operation and maintenance Phase within 30 days after
completion of construction.
6. Copies of all required forms and guidance can be found at http://www.dep.state.fl.us/ .
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit an Environmental Protection Plan within 15 days after receipt of the
notice to proceed. Approval of the Contractor's plan will not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for adequate and continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection
measures. The contractor shall obtain approval by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of
construction, modification, or demolition for all project facilities and/or equipment. The plan shall
include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Legal Requirements: A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits
concerning environmental protection, pollution control and abatement that are applicable to
the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed by those laws,
regulations, and permits. Whenever there is a conflict between Federal, State, or local laws,
regulations, and permit requirements, the more restrictive provisions shall apply.
2. Environmental Protection Procedures: Procedures to be implemented to provide the required
environmental protection, to comply with the applicable laws and regulations, and to correct
pollution due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the procedures of the
environmental protection plan.
3. Drawings: Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or
embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary
facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials shall be included.
4. Solid Waste Management Plan: See paragraph titled Solid Waste.
5. Emergency Response and Spill Prevention Plan: See paragraph titled Emergency Response
and Spill Prevention.
6. Hazard Material List: See paragraph titled Hazardous Materials.
7. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan: See paragraph titled Water Resources.
8. Hazard Waste Management and Disposal Plan: See paragraph titled Hazardous Waste.
9. Summary of Solid Waste Generated: See paragraph titled Solid Waste Implementation.
3.02
NATURAL RESOURCES
A. ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES: The environmental resources within the project boundaries
and those affected outside the limits of permanent work under this contract shall be protected
during the entire period of this contract. The Contractor shall confine activities to areas defined
by the drawings and specifications except where tree replacement is required. Environmental
protections shall be as stated in the following subparagraphs:
1. The contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications.
In areas indicated on the drawing or specified to be cleared, the Contractor shall not remove,
cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil,
and land forms without permission. Trees, shrubs and other vegetation not identified for
removal shall be protected against removal, injury, defacing and scarring-no ropes, cables, or
guys shall be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically
authorized. Where such emergency use is permitted, the Contractor shall provide effective
protection for land and vegetation resources at all times.
2. The Contractor shall not park vehicles or equipment within the drip line of trees. Prior to
trimming or removal of trees, contractor shall coordinate with 1 SOCES/CEAN. All verified
01 56 00 - 3
MS0713
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
merchantable timber that is removed shall be limbed and stacked butt to butt in an out of the
way location. Trees that are damaged or removed shall be replaced according to guidance
found in the Hurlburt Field 2009 Landscape Development Plan
Prior to any construction, the Contractor shall mark the areas not to be disturbed under this
contract. Isolated areas within the general work area, which are to be saved and protected,
shall also be marked or fenced. The Contractor's personnel shall be knowledgeable of the
purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.
All earthwork shall be planned and conducted to minimize the duration of exposure of
unprotected soils. Side and back slopes shall be protected as soon as practicable upon
completion of rough grading. Earthwork brought to final grade shall be finished as indicated.
The Contractor shall construct or install temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation
control features as indicated on the drawings. Erosion control measures on drawings shall be
augmented if necessary to ensure effectiveness. Berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins,
grassing, and mulching shall be maintained until permanent drainage and erosion control
facilities are completed and operative.
The Contractor's field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary buildings shall
be placed in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the Contracting Officer.
Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor facilities shall be made only when
approved. Borrow areas shall be managed to minimize erosion and to prevent sediment from
entering nearby waters. Spoil areas shall be managed and controlled to limit spoil intrusion
into areas designated on the drawings and to prevent erosion of soil or sediment from
entering nearby waters. Spoil areas shall be developed in accordance with the grading plan
indicated on the drawings. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant and/or work
areas shall be controlled to protect adjacent areas from despoilment.
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all construction equipment previously used at other
sites before it is brought into the work areas, ensuring that soil residuals are removed and
that egg deposits from plant pests are not present; the Contractor shall consult with the
USDA jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.
B. Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: All species of wildlife are protected on Hurlburt Field,
Florida. Feeding, possessing, capturing, and attempting to capture, kill or otherwise harass
wildlife is prohibited.
C. Black Bear and American Alligator: Black bear and American alligator sightings are common on
Hurlburt Field. It is against the law to feed, possess, capture or attempt to capture, kill or
otherwise harass these species. Feeding, possession, or harassment of an alligator is a seconddegree misdemeanor. If a bear is sighted or if an alligator is found to be in an enclosed area,
posing immediate threat or is affecting traffic, contact the 1 SOCES/CEAN (884-4651) as soon as
possible. Construction sites must be cleared of any food or drink items at the end of each
workday. Any items that could attract wildlife must be carried off the base or placed in a
dumpster. Ensure all dumpster doors and lids are securely closed at the end of the day to deter
bears or other wildlife from entering and feeding.
3.03
CULTURAL RESOURCES
A. Historical, Archaeological, and Cultural Resources: Existing historical, archaeological, and
cultural resources within the Contractor's work area will be so designated by the Contracting
Officer if any has been identified. The Contractor shall take precautions to preserve all such
resources as they existed at the time they were first pointed out. The Contractor shall provide
and install protection measures for these resources and be responsible for their preservation
during the life of the contract. Protection measures will be provided by 1 SOCES/CEAN after
consultation with the State Historic Preservation Officer on a case-by-case basis.
B. Artifacts Discovered During Construction: If during excavation or other construction activities any
previously unidentified or unanticipated resources are discovered or found, all activities that may
damage or alter such resources shall be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this
paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell,
bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rocks or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed
features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find,
the Contractor shall immediately stop work and notify the Contracting Officer and
1 SOCES/CEAN.
01 56 00 - 4
MS0713
3.04
WATER RESOURCES
A. The Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control
implementing “good house-keeping” practices to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters.
The contractor shall ensure that all employees and subcontractors are aware that dumping of any
substance to ground, storm systems,wetlands or water bodies is prohibited, unless express
written approval is provided from the contracting office and 1 SOCES/CEAN. All spills of
hazardous materials, hazardous waste, petroleum, toxic substances, wastewaters, or materials
that generate an oxygen demand in water bodies must be properly cleaned up immediately. Toxic
or hazardous chemicals shall not be applied to soil or vegetation when such application may
cause contamination. Monitoring of water areas affected by construction shall be the Contractor's
responsibility.
B. Wetlands: Monitoring of wetland and water resources affected by construction activities shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor and performed in accordance with the Clean Water Act and all
Federal and State rules, laws, and standards. During construction, best management practices
(BMP’s) will be required to maintain soil erosion measures and a minimum distance of 15 feet
and average of 25 feet from jurisdictional wetlands and water areas that could be adversely
affected by construction activities. Contractor should plan for all events which will cause extreme
conditions that may result in failure of BMP’s. All fines and penalties assessed for wetlands
violations affected by construction activities shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Stormwater: The contractor shall use proper control and management techniques to ensure
stormwater criteria are met in accordance with Federal, State, and local stormwater regulations.
The contractor must comply with the Hurlburt Field Stormwater Management Plan.
D. Where erodible soils or other erodible materials are present, no matter the total size of the
affected area, erosion control measures must be installed/implemented prior to start of
construction and in accordance with the Floirda Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control
Inspector’s Manual available at www.dep.state.fl.us/. This applies to construction areas, storage
areas, and laydown areas. Erosion control measures must remain in place and be properly
maintained until the site is properly stabilized. .
E. In some cases where severe erosion results in waters becoming turbid despite control measures,
regular turbidity monitoring and documentation shall be necessary. Any such documentation
shall be forwarded to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN review..
F. Stream Crossings shall allow movement of materials or equipment without violating water
pollution control standards of the Federal, State or local government.
G. Landscaping: All new landscaping will be watered in accordance with the current stage of the
Hurlburt Field Water Conservation Policy. All irrigation work will need to be coordinated with 1
SOCES/CEAN & 1SOCES/CEC. The use of potable water for irrigation systems is prohibited.
H. Contractor is not authorized sewage holding tanks on base and must procure a portable toilet
service contract. The contract must include the correct removal of sewage and maintenance of
the portable toilet.
I.
Projects that construct facilities with a footprint greater than 5,000 gross square feet, or expand
the footprint of existing facilities by more than 5,000 gross square feet must maintain or restore to
the maximum extent technically feasible the project predevelopment hydrology per section 438 of
the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA).
J.
Dewatering: The requirements stated in Ch. 62-621.300(2), F.A.C. must be met before the
commencement of any discharge of produced groundwater from a non-contaminated site activity
to surface waters of the state (e.g. wetlands, stormwater systems). Any reportable documents
associated with the compliance of this regulation shall be sent to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN review prior to the submittal to the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection (FDEP). For dewatering operations that discharge to groundwaters of the state, a sitespecific exemption letter must be obtained from the FDEP. In order for the contractor to obtain
this exemption letter, a letter must be submitted stating the scope of the operation, estimated
amount of water to be discharged during the operation, as well as best management practices
that will be used during the dewatering operation to ensure no produced groundwater will be
01 56 00 - 5
MS0713
discharged to surface waters of the state. This letter shall be sent to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN review prior to the submittal to the FDEP.
3.05
AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT
A. Per Executive Order 13101, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires that all
government purchases of designated items shall contain at least the minimal amount of postconsumer and/or total recovered materials. EPA-designated items fall into the following
categories:
• Bio-based Products
• Miscellaneous Products
• Park and Recreation
Products
• Construction Products
• Non-Paper Office Products
• Transportation Products
• Landscape Products
• Paper and Paper Products
• Vehicular Products
Specific requirements can be found at the EPA’s website: http://www.epa.gov/cpg/products.htm.
Also, see section 01 54 00: Green Procurement.
3.06
AIR RESOURCES
A. Equipment operation and activities or processes performed by the Contractor in accomplishing
the specified construction shall be in accordance with the State rules and all Federal emission
and performance laws and standards. Ambient Air Quality Standards set by the Environmental
Protection Agency shall be maintained. The Contractor shall monitor all air areas affected by the
construction activities. Monitoring results will be periodically reviewed by 1 SOCES/CEAN to
ensure compliance.
B. Ozone Depleting Substances: The contractor shall adhere to Air Force and HFLD policies
regarding halons and chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). The contractor shall not introduce any Class I
Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) to Hurlburt Field during the course of this contract. The
contractor shall be responsible for the recovery and recycling of all Class II ODS, including any
necessary sampling marking, labeling, and disposal. The contractor may access the Hurlburt
Field ODS Management Plan for guidance. However, the contractor shall remain ultimately
responsible for any ODS work related to these tasks. Any work performed on equipment
containing ODS used as refrigerants shall only be done by EPA certified technicians. Certification
cards shall be on their person at all times. Intentional venting of ODS is strictly prohibited. Any
work performed on equipment containing ODS used as refrigerants should only be done by EPAcertified technicians. Certification cards should be on their person at all times.
C. Particulates: Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction activities; and
processing and preparation of materials, shall be controlled at all times, including weekends,
holidays and hours when work is not in progress. The Contractor shall maintain excavations,
stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow
areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which
would cause the air pollution standards to be exceeded or which would cause a hazard or a
nuisance. All reasonable precautions shall be taken during earthmoving and grading activitiesto
control small particulate matter from becoming airborne. Water or other dust suppressants shall
be used as necessary on unpaved surfaces, open stockpiles and conveyor systems to reduce
emissions of dust. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent the deposition of “dragout” dirt on paved surfaces, and all drag dirt shall be removed from paved roadways at the end of
each shift. The Contractor must have sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish
these tasks. Particulate control shall be performed as the work proceeds and whenever a
particulate nuisance or hazard occurs by employing BMP’s.
D. Employ the following BMP’s to minimize air pollutants:
1. Limit the entry/exit of vehicles to the site to minimize track-in and track-out of aggregate and
construction materials.
2. Apply water or other dust suppressants to unpaved roads..
3. Keep stock piles and open containers covered when not in use.
4. Landscape or vegetate as soon as practical.
5. Use water-based paints and low VOC surface coatings as per section 09 90 00.
3.07
SOLID WASTE
A. The contractor shall make every attempt to reduce the generation of solid and hazardous waste
to the maximum extent possible. The contractor shall utilize the Base Recycling Center (88401 56 00 - 6
MS0713
7577) for any office paper, cardboard, plastic, or metal wastes related to a project whenever
possible. All wastes, whether recycled or landfilled, shall be weighed prior to disposal. Detailed
disposition, to include; manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices , information shall be
reported by the fifth day of each quarter to 1 SOCES/CEAN. Solid wastes (excluding clearing
debris) shall be placed in containers and emptied, recycled or land-filled, on a regular schedule.
Containers used for solid waste shall be kept covered and closed at all times and shall be leakproof. Solid waste, including refuse and construction and demolition debris, shall not be stored
within 200 feet of jurisdictional wetlands or water bodies in accordance with FDEP regulation 62701.300. Design for pads that will house solid waste dumpsters must reflect the 200 feet set-back
from jurisdictional wetlands, water bodies and any stormwater conveyance structure. Segregation
measures shall be employed so that no hazardous or toxic waste is co-mingled with solid waste.
The Contractor shall transport solid waste (items not utilized by Base Recycling Center) off
Government property and dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements
for solid waste disposal. Vehicles used in transporting refuse shall be covered and enclosed to
prevent spillage. Expense and cleanup of any spills on or off base are always the responsibility
of the contractor.
B. Solid Waste Management Plan: The Solid Waste Management Plan, refer to paragraph titled
Submittals, shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Description and estimated quantities of the proposed job-site waste to be generated.
2. Landfill Options: The name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of, applicable landfill
tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project waste in the landfill(s).
3. Waste Diversion: A list of the waste materials from the project that will be separated for
reuse, salvage, or recycling, associated weights and estimated cost savings shall be reported
th
to 1 SOCES/CEAN by the 5 day of each quarter.
4. Handling Procedures: A description of the means by which any waste materials identified in
item 3 above will be stored and a description of the means to be employed in recycling the
above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.
5. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the waste and recycled
materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated center, or
whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site).
Request manufacturers to use the minimum packaging required for protection and
identification of project products, and to use packaging materials with recycled content where
economically feasible in accordance with FAR, Executive Order 13101, and the Hurlburt Field
Affirmative Procurement Plan.
6. Submit cost information on the Solid Waste Management Plan for Solid Waste Disposal,
Recycling, Cost savings for wastes diverted from the landfill to the Contracting Officer
th
by 5 day of each quarter.
C. Solid Waste Management Plan Implementation
1. The Contractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers
and overseeing and documenting results of the Solid Management Plan for the project.
2. The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Solid Management Plan to key personnel and
submit the plan to the Contracting Officer as part of the Environmental Protection Plan (see
Submittals section).
3. The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and
recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties.
4. The Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for
potential recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept
neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
5. The Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment, a Summary of
Solid Waste Generated by the project to 1 SOCES/CEAN. Failure to submit this information
shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress Payment. The
Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the
following information:
a. The amount (in tons) of material land-filled from the project, the identity of the landfill, the
total amount of tipping fees paid at the landfill, and the total disposal cost. Include
manifests, weight tickets, receipt, and invoices.
b. For each material recycled, reused or salvaged from the project, the amount (in tons),
the date removed from the job-site, the receiving party, the transportation cost, the
amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net
01 56 00 - 7
MS0713
c.
3.08
total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Attach manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
Any serviceable or salvageable items not accepted by DRMO or Base Supply will
become the property of the Contractor and will be properly handled, transported, and
disposed of off-base by the Contractor in conformance with the Solid Management Plan
and with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
HAZARDOUS WASTE (Includes Special and Universal Waste)
A. The contractor shall be considered the primary co-generator for all hazardous wastes generated
throughout the duration of the contract. All hazardous waste management activities shall be
coordinated and approved by 1 SOCES/CEAN.
B. The contractor’s key personnel must attend the Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Awareness
briefing prior to starting work on base. For reservations, contact Randy Trent at (850) 884-7923
or email [email protected]
C. The contractor is responsible for the management and disposal of all hazardous wastes he/she
generates on base. All cost for labor, equipment, materials, transportation, and other services
required to comply with federal, state and local laws governing hazardous/special waste
management and disposal are the responsibility of the contractor.
D. The contractor shall characterize their waste streams using specific and technical knowledge,
MSDS,s and/or sampling and analysis. This responsibility also includes preparation of waste
profile sheets, manifests (regulated and non regulated) packaging, marking and labeling of
wastes containers.
E. The contractor shall manage all hazardous waste, special waste, and universal waste IAW the
HFLD Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The contractor shall ensure that all employees,
including their subs, comply with the rules and procedures outlined in the Hurlburt Field
Hazardous Waste Management Plan.
F. The contractor shall be familiar with and have immediate access to the following publications and
regulations:
1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 260279
2. Department of Transportation (DOT): Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 171-177
3. Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Management Plan
G. If transportation of Hazardous Wastes is required, the contractor shall possess or ensure the
transportation company used for transportation of hazardous waste has a valid state and federal
EPA identification number and all DOT requirements are met.
H. The contractor shall prepare profiles and manifests for all waste transported off base for disposal.
A designated representative from 1 SOCES/CEAN, Environmental Element, must approve and
sign the hazardous waste/non-hazardous waste manifest. Contractor shall ensure the signed
manifest is returned to 1 SOCES/CEAN within 45 days from the time it’s received at the disposal
facility.
I.
The Hurlburt Field Hazardous Waste Storage Facility may accept contractor’s hazardous, special
and universal waste (that was generated on base) depending on type of waste, quantities
generated and provisions of the contract. 1 SOCES/CEAN must approve acceptance of the
waste before it’s generated.
3.09
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. For the purposes of the document, Hazardous Materials (HM) are defined as any product
material, chemical or substance listed in 49 CFR 172.101 (revised) and 40 CFR 302-304
(revised). Specifically, a HM is any substance or material, in any quantity or form that has the
potential to harm human health or the environment or displays specific characteristics (reactive,
corrosive, ignitable, and toxic).
01 56 00 - 8
MS0713
B. Absolutely no HM shall be brought onto Hurlburt Field until that material is coordinated with Base
Hazardous Material Program Manager per AFI 32-7086, Hazardous Materials Management . This
requirement shall apply for all HM that the contractor intends to bring onto government property
for any/all processes or applications. The contractor shall submit a complete hazardous material
inventory list including Material Safety Data Sheets and any other supporting documentation for
each HM used prior to contract start or introduction of that material to Hurlburt Field. The HM
inventory shall include the contract number, performance period, and a contractor point of
contactfor HM matters. All excess material and empty containers are the responsibility of the
contractor and shall be removed accordingly at the end of the contract. Should contractor HM
requirements change during the performance period, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
HAZMART and Base HM Program Manager of such changes in writing.
C. Storage of Hazardous Materials: All HM shall be stored at Hurlburt Field with approval and
coordination from 1 SOCES/CEAN, the base Fire Department (1 SOCES/CEF), and Wing Safety.
The contractor shall observe HM storage practices in accordance with regulations, policies, plans
and procedures employed by the base. HM storage shall be in a manner that limits exposure to
rainfall and prevents releases to the environment.
D. All contractor personnel shall immediately report to the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEAN
any hazardous materials, substances (including suspect asbestos containing materials),
chemicals, or contaminated areas encountered. Further, the contractor personnel shall
immediately cease work in the area unless the work is of an emergency nature and the risk of
exposure can be mitigated by the use of personal protective equipment (PPE) or clothing. The
government will determine the best means of sampling and corrective action and will notify the
contractor accordingly.
E. The contractor shall not use, store, or handle any Class I ODS during the course of this contract.
F. All hazardous materials and waste resulting from construction projects (including
renovation/repair and demolition) shall be managed in accordance with local, state, federal and
Hurlburt Field rules and regulations.
3.10
TOXIC WASTE
A. Asbestos: All asbestos work must be accomplished in accordance with federal, state, and local
laws and the Hurlburt Field Asbestos Management Plan. See Section 02 82 16.00 20.
1. Notice of Asbestos Renovation or Demolition, DEP Form 62-257.900(1) must be submitted to
Florida Department of Environmental Protection at least 10 working days prior to any
demolition and/or renovation regardless of whether asbestos is present or not. A copy of this
notification and all asbestos surveys conducted must be provided to 1 SOCES/CEAN prior to
performing any work. Upon completion of any asbestos abatement, the contractor will provide
copies of all disposal waste manifests to 1 SOCES/CEAN, Toxic Substance Program
Manager.
2. A copy of all submittals must be provided to 1 SOCES/CEAN with adequate time built in for
review.
3. The use of materials, products or equipment containing asbestos will not be allowed in the
construction of this project. See sample list below.
4. Prior to the commencement of construction, the prime contractor, each subcontractor and
material/equipment supplier shall provide the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEAN with a
Notarized statement that to the best of their knowledge, no asbestos will be used in the
construction of this project. Additionally, the contractor must have available the most current
Material Data Safety Sheet proving the materials contain no asbestos.
5. Sample list of Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM):
Note: The following list does not include every product/material that may contain asbestos. It
is intended as a general guide to show which types of material may contain asbestos.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cement pipes
Asphalt floor tile
Flooring backing
Decorative plaster
Spray-applied
insulation
Taping compounds
•
•
•
•
•
Cement wallboard
Vinyl floor tile
Construction mastics
Textured paints/coatings
Blown-in insulation
•
•
•
•
•
Cement siding
Vinyl sheet flooring
Acoustical plaster
Ceiling tiles & lay-in-panels
Fireproofing materials
•
Packing materials (for
•
High temperature gaskets
01 56 00 - 9
MS0713
•
•
(thermal)
Laboratory hoods
Fire curtains
•
•
•
•
HVAC duct insulation
Ductwork flexible fabric
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heating and electrical
•
Spackling compounds
•
Roofing felt
•
Fire doors
•
Wallboard
•
Electrical wiring insulation
wall/floor penetrations)
Laboratory gloves
Elevator equipment
panels
Boiler insulation
Cooling towers
Electrical panel partitions
Chalkboards
Base flashing
Caulking/putties
Joint compounds
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fire blankets & table tops
Elevator brake shoes
Breeching insulation
Pipe insulation (corrugated
connections air cell, block, etc.)
Electrical cloth ducts
Roofing shingles
Thermal paper products
Adhesives
Vinyl wall coverings
Caution needs to be taken to ensure materials purchased do not contain one or more % asbestos
by volume.
B. Lighting Ballast: When fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures are removed, the ballast must be
examined for PCB labeling. Ballast is presumed to contain PCBs unless they are clearly labeled “NO
PCBs”. Suspected ballast must be removed and disposed IAW Hurlburt Field directives.
C. Lead Based Paint: No paint containing lead shall be used during the course of this contract. The
Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA) Lead Construction Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62 is in effect
whenever materials are disturbed that contain any amount of lead. This will require contractors
disturbing lead-based paint to institute medical surveillance, training, engineering controls, worker
protection measures and employee monitoring until monitoring results per the lead paint standard
demonstrate that employee exposure is below the action level and permissible exposure limit. The
contractor on site must maintain all documentation regarding lead exposure by either historical data
or project data. This data shall also be made available to 1 SOCES/CEAN upon completion of
the project.
1. Prior to the commencement of construction, the prime contractor, each subcontractor and
material/equipment supplier shall provide to the Contracting Officer and 1 SOCES/CEAN with
a Notarized statement that to the best of their knowledge, no lead based paint will be used in
the construction of this project. Additionally, the contractor must have available the most
current Material Data Safety Sheet proving that the paint does not have any lead content. If
lead based paint has been identified, copies of surveys must be forwarded to 1
SOCES/CEAN, Toxic Substance Program Manager.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for collection and disposal of all lead paint chips and lead
paint-contaminated materials, and for accumulation of these chips/materials on site. The
contractor shall test the paint materials, provide containers for proper disposal, and transport
any resulting hazardous waste to an appropriate hazardous waste accumulation area should
it test positive as hazardous waste. All necessary accumulation, disposal activities and
documentation shall be coordinated with the 1 SOCES/CEAN flight.
3. A copy of contractor’s exposure assessment data shall be provided to 1 SOCES/CEAN.
4. Copies of all lead paint-related documentation generated from this project, including lead
testing, air monitoring and hazardous waste manifests, shall be provided by the Contractor to
the Contracting Officer. A copy shall be forwarded to the contracting office for 1
SOCES/CEAN within 10 working days of task completion.
5. On Military Family Housing Projects, there shall be in-depth coordination with the
1SOCES/CEAN flight to allow for resident notification and necessary arrangements. The
contractor is strongly encouraged to coordinate closely with 1SOCES/CEAN for any
required guidance on this critical issue.
6. Contractors performing renovation, repair and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint
in homes, child care facilities, and schools built before 1978, must be certified and must
follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination (40 CFR Part 745). Upon
completion of any lead base paint abatement, the contractor will provide copies of all disposal
waste manifests to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN, Toxic Substance Program
Manager.
01 56 00 - 10
MS0713
3.11
SPILL PREVENTION:
A. The contractor is required to familiarize their employees with spill procedures, fire suppression
systems and Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials used and/or stored at the project site.
In the event of an oil, fuel or chemical spill, the contractor shall immediately notify the Hurlburt
Field Fire Department by calling 911. The contractor shall also notify the Contracting Officer (CO)
and provide a detailed, written spill report to the contracting office for 1 SOCES/CEAN within 24
hours describing the events of the release. Costs incurred from contractor related spills are the
responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall reimburse any government cost associated
with spill response and clean-up.
B. The contractor shall provide and maintain spill containment equipment, sufficient in both type and
quantity, at all sites involving the storage, use or handling of hazardous waste and hazardous
materials. The type of spill equipment and quantity required will be identified in the contractor’s
site specific contingency plan. Equipment and materials must be adequate to contain any release
and secondary containment must be in use as required.
C. If the contractor is required to stockpile contaminated soil for testing prior to disposal, the CO will
inform the contractor of the stockpile location after consultation with 1 SOCES/CEAN.
D. Contractor vehicle and heavy equipment maintenance (including oil changing, lubrication, and
vehicle washing) is not authorized on base.
E. All fuel, oil, and chemical spills that occur on Hurlburt Field (regardless of amount) must
be immediately reported to the base Fire Department by calling 911.
3.12
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor shall as required use a laboratory capable of performing all analysis required to
determine Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) characteristics such as, but not
limited to, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) metals, TCLP volatile and semivolatile organic, flashpoint, reactivity, and pH. The laboratory shall also be capable of performing
any analysis required to determine the applicability of the used oil criteria detailed in 40 CFR, Part
279. The contractor shall ensure that all analytical work is performed IAW the methods and
procedures, including QA/QC requirements, detailed in EPA SW-8467. The analytical laboratory
shall be capable of providing accurate, complete data within eight (8) working days. Field
analysis and portable instrumentation shall not be used to fulfill laboratory requirements.
Thecontractor shall retain all data on file for a minimum of three years and keep it readily
available for inspection by any authorized agency, including 1 SOCES/CEAN Asset Management
Flight. Chain-of-custody documents shall be included with these records. At the end of the
contract, all of these data files may be transferred to 1 SOCES/CEAN.
3.13
POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
A. The Contractor shall clean up all areas affected by construction and restore them back to their
original condition to include landscaping, planting of trees, grass, and shrubs damaged by
construction; and raking and disposal of debris such as roof shingles, paper, nails, glass, sheet
metal, bricks, and waste concrete. Backfilled areas shall be compacted properly and replanted
with grass.
3.14
INSTALLATION RESTORATION PROGRAM (IRP)
A. Contractors and Project Managers (PM) planning projects on Hurlburt Field should be aware of
the potential to encounter soil/groundwater contamination throughout many areas of the base.
The following guidance has been developed to assist in the planning, designing and construction
of projects in possibly contaminated areas (IRP sites). The first set of guidance is the most
stringent and involves projects planned in an area that has known contamination and regulatory
Land Use Controls. The second set of guidance applies to projects planned near a known IRP
site with suspected contamination. The last set of guidance is general and applies to any areas
of the base where contamination has not been confirmed. It is imperative that planners,
designers and contractors involve 1 SOCES/CEAN early and often in the planning, designing,
and construction process to minimize the impact that contaminated soils/groundwater may have
on their project.
01 56 00 - 11
MS0713
B. Projects located on a site with known soil and/or groundwater contamination with land use
controls:
1. There are land use controls on this area imposed by an environmental regulatory agency
designed to protect public health.
2. Project Manager should investigate and plan to ensure all monitor wells/cleanup systems are
avoided.
3. Project Manager should submit detailed work plans to 1 SOCES/CEAN early in planning
stages so 1 SOCES/CEAN can obtain concurrence from the regulatory agencies on project
details.
4. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
5. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEAN.
C. Projects located near a site with known or suspected soil and/or groundwater contamination
without land use controls:
1. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEAN.
2. Project Manager should investigate and plan to ensure all monitor wells/cleanup systems are
avoided.
3. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
D. Sites without land use controls and not in close proximity to known contamination or IRP site:
1. If unusual soil or groundwater color/odor is encountered during subsurface work, contact
1 SOCES/CEAN.
2. Project Manager should educate workers on potential to encounter contamination and also
should ensure workers are adequately protected with personal protective equipment.
E. Be aware that the regulatory agency can halt the project for long periods of time due to the
discovery of contamination. 1 SOCES/CEAN is committed to expediting projects with IRP
compliance related issues.
3.15
STORAGE TANKS
A. 1 SOCES/CEAN must approve the use of fuel storage tanks on base, and the contractor
must ensure adequate spill containment (spill kits) for any tanks approved for use on
Hurlburt Field. The contractor must have written spill procedures for tanks and heavy
equipment that they use on base. Temporary gasoline storage is NOT permitted on base.
B. POL/Storage Tanks: Storage tanks and POL can be a source of contamination if not managed
appropriately. Contractor personnel obtaining fuels from Storage Tanks agree to follow all 62-762
FAC and the following list of Air Force Technical Order’s to ensure compliance: 37-1-1, 37A-1101, 42B-1-1, 42B-1-1S-2, 42B-1-16, 42B-1-22, 42B-1-23, and 42C-1-12.
C. Contractor must contact 1SOCES/CEAN for a copy of Hurlburt Field’s Integrated Contingency
Plan (ICP), if storage tank use is approved. A number of Federal and State agencies have
regulations pertaining to pollution prevention and emergency response requirements of oil and
hazardous storage and transfer facilities. The Hurlburt Field ICP has been developed to address
the issues of spill prevention, discharge containment / cleanup, and emergency response actions.
END OF SECTION
01 56 00 - 12
MS0612
SECTION 01 58 00
PART 1
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Project Identification Sign.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Design sign and structure in accordance with drawing shown on page 2 of this specification.
B. Use experienced professional sign painter.
C. Finishes shall be adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping, for duration of construction.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SIGN MATERIALS:
A. Structure and Framing: New, pressure-treated 4 x 4 x 12' support posts.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood, A-C, 1/2" thick, 4'-0" x 8'-0".
C. Paint and Primers: Exterior professional quality, high-gloss alkyd enamel.
D. Lettering: Exterior quality paint as per above, or pre-cut vinyl self-adhesive products, in accordance with
attached drawing.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install project identification sign within 15 days after Notice to Proceed.
1. Install at a location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site.
2. Erect sign surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.
3. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
3.02
MAINTENANCE:
A. Maintain sign and supports clean.
B. Repair deterioration and damage.
3.03
REMOVAL:
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of project and restore the area.
01 58 00 - 1
F
G
H
E
D
END OF SECTION
01 58 00 - 2
HEIGHT
5"
1"
1"
6"
3"
6"
1"
5"
LINE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LETTER
HEIGHT STROKE
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
5"
1/2"
5"
1/2"
2"
3/16"
2"
3/16"
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
NAME OF CONTRACTOR
7
5
4
6
1
2
3
1. USE 1/2" GRADE A-C EXTERIOR PLYWOOD
2. PAINT WITH EXTERIOR GLOSS ENAMEL:
a. 1 COAT PRIMER
b. 2 COATS COLOR #20122, FED. STANDARD 595B
c. WHITE LETTERS
3. MOUNT SECURELY ON PRESSURE TREATED 4x4s,
WITH BOTTOM 4' FROM GRADE
4. REMOVE SIGN AFTER COMPLETION OF
CONSTRUCTION
ARCHITECT-ENGINEER
1 SOCES/CEPM
PROJECT TITLE
PROJECT TITLE
U.S. AIR FORCE PROJECT
1 SPECIAL OPERATIONS CIVIL ENGINEER SQUADRON IN
PARTNERSHIP WITH 1 SPECIAL OPS CONTRACTING SQUADRON
4'-0"
SPACE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
C
A
B
8'-0"
MS0612
MS0612
SECTION 01 60 00
PART 1
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
1.01
PRODUCTS
A. Products means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and systems forming the
Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and
erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.
B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises except as specifically permitted by
the Contract Documents and approved by the Contracting Officer.
C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer for similar components.
1.02
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING:
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and
products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or
damage.
1.03
STORAGE AND PROTECTION:
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and
legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate controlled enclosures.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
C. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid
condensation.
D. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign
matter.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or
damage.
F. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are
undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.04
PRODUCT OPTIONS:
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards
or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for substitutions: Submit a
request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.05
SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
C. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the
specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the work to be
complete with no additional cost to the Government.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
01 60 00 - 1
MS0612
5. Will reimburse Government for redesign services associated with the request.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision
to the Contract Documents.
E. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit four (4) copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop Drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product
equivalence.
3. Submit one (1) copy of the material specification, product data, and a physical sample of each finish
material (carpet, rubber/vinyl base, wall covering, vinyl composition tile, ceramic tile, acoustical ceiling,
etc.) of the specified material for which a substitution is proposed. This information will be used to
compare the proposed substitution to the specified material to assure compliance with the contract
requirements.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 60 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 01 65 00
PART l
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify project inspector 7 days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt
tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the
equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative if required by
manufacturer or contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to
start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report in accordance with applicable Section of Specifications that equipment or system
has been properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and is functioning
correctly.
1.02
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Government personnel 7 days prior to date of final
inspection.
B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for demonstration. Review contents of manual with
government personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and
shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at equipment designated location.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data
becomes apparent during instruction.
1.03
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Contractor will appoint, employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting
and balancing.
B. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer indicating observations and
results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 65 00 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 01 70 00
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Spare parts and maintenance products.
G. Warranties.
H. Maintenance service.
1.02
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected,
and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for final inspection.
B. Upon completion of final inspection, correct punch list items to the satisfaction of the government, and
submit all closeout documents, the Government shall take beneficial occupancy of building (BOD).
All warranties will start when government takes BOD.
C. Provide closeout submittals to Government as required by contract documents. Complete and submit
attached closeout checklist.
1.03
FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum and remove any stains from
carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface
and material being cleaned.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
01 70 00 - 1
MS0612
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. Do not put extraneous
marks or other information on these documents. Maintain documents in good, clean condition free
from tears or damage.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each construction change on the respective
drawing sheet or sheets to record actual construction including:
1. Addenda issued prior to receipt of bid or proposal.
2. Change orders issued during the construction phase.
3. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
4. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced
to permanent surface improvements.
5. Measured locations of external and internal utilities, and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
6. Field changes of dimension and detail.
7. Details not on original Contract drawings.
8. Field changes related to materials.
G. Prior to final inspection the contractor shall:
1. Submit original record documents to Contracting Officer. Contractor is advised to have a
reproduced copy of the original record documents made for their records.
2. Obtain Disc copies of the contract drawings in current version of AUTOCAD used by
1SOCES/CEP. Verify with the project inspector. Correct drawing files (sheets) to reflect all as-built
conditions based on the changes made as per item F. above. Add the words “AS BUILT” to the
revision block of each sheet title block, the date the drawings were changed and the initials of the
person making the change.
3. Submit one set of prints of the corrected contract drawing files to allow Base Civil engineer to
verify accuracy of the corrected drawings against the record documents.
4. Upon review and approval of the corrected contract drawing files, provide disc copies to the
government for their records.
5. Completed Construction Data Worksheet. See Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.07
6. Project Closeout Check List. See end of section.
7. See Section 01 00 00, paragraph 1.15.C referencing 3% payment retention until receipt and
approval of Closeout Documents.
8. See Section 01 10 00, paragraph 3.05. referencing location of buildings, etc. to be
submitted with As-Built documents.
H. Upon acceptance of the building, project record documents and the “As Built” drawings by the
Contracting Officer and the Base Civil Engineer, final payment will be made to the contractor
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three ring binders with durable plastic covers and
digital electronic copy. General contractor shall assemble all O & M data required on project and
submit as a single submittal.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of
project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
01 70 00 - 2
MS0612
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description
identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of manufacturer's warranties.
E. Submit 1 draft copy of completed volumes 5 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed
and returned after final inspection, with comments. Revise content of all document sets as required
prior to final submission.
F. Submit two sets of revised final volumes, within 10 days after final inspection.
G. DIGITAL COPY: Contents of digital copy shall match those described for printed materials. Organize
the digital copy, per Volume, with a Table of Contents (digital file folder structure) for Parts 1-3.
Designated sections in file folders and subfolders shall be arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section and information required. For example:
A. Part 3 – Project Documents
1. HVAC System
a. Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units
i.
Shop drawings
ii.
Reports
iii.
Certifications
iv.
Warrantiies
1.07
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification
sections.
B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.08
CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTIES
A. Provide triplicate notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
C. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
D. All warranties shall be submitted within 10 days from BOD with warranty start dates printed on
warranties.
01 70 00 - 3
MS0612
1.09
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of components where indicated in specification sections during the
warranty period.
B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and
lubricate as required.
C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts
whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior
written consent of the Government
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED);
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 70 00 - 4
MS0612
PROJECT CLOSEOUT CHECK LIST
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR (mark n/a next to those items that are not applicable for this project)
________
TEST AND BALANCE REPORT SUBMITTED, APPROVED AND INCLUDED IN THE O&M
MANUALS. REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION.
________
HAVE O&M MANUALS BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. MANUALS ARE TO BE
ASSEMBLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND SUBMITTED UNDER A SINGLE
COVER PER SECTION 01700. (SEE ATTACHED LIST). MANUALS SHALL BE SUBMITTED
PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION.
________
PUNCH LIST COMPLETED.
________
HAS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BEEN COMPLETED.
________
HAS COMPLETED CONSTRUCTION DATA WORKSHEET.
________
HAVE THE RECORD DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS BEEN SUBMITTED AND
APPROVED PER SECTION 01700.
________
HAS THE DDC PROGRAMMING FOR THE HOST COMPUTER BEEN DOWN LOADED TO
THE CONTROLS SHOP.
________
HAS FINAL CLEANING BEEN COMPLETED.
________
HAVE SPARE PARTS BEEN TURNED OVER TO THE GOVERNMENT. (SEE ATTACHED
LIST)
________
HAVE WARRANTIES BEEN SUBMITTED AND APPROVED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST)
________
HAVE DIGITAL RECORD DRAWINGS BEEN SUBMITTED (SECTION 02811 LANDSCAPE
IRRIGATION AND 15330 FIRE SUPPRESSION)
________
HAS ALL REQUIRED TRAINING BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST)
________
HAS ALL REQUIRED TESTING BEEN ACCOMPLISHED. (SEE ATTACHED LIST).
________
HAVE ITEMS TO BE TURNED OVER TO GOVERNMENT BEEN TURNED OVER.
________
HAVE REPLACEMENT TREES BEEN PLANTED IN AUTHORIZED LOCATION
________
IS CONSTRUCTION SITE STABLE, NO EROSION
________
HAS ALL CONTRACTOR HAZMAT BEEN REMOVED FROM PROJECT SITE
________
HAS CONTRACTOR SUBMITTED THE TOTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS USED DURING
CONTRACT
________
HAS CONTRACTOR PROVIDED WITNESSED AND NOTARIZED STATEMENT THAT
PROJECT WAS CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS INCLUDING ALL CHANGES MADE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE.
________
WARRANTY FORM
01 70 00 - 5
MS0612
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
INSPECTORS
________
HAVE THE ABOVE ITEMS BEEN COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR.
________
HAS 100% COMPLETION LETTER AND BLUE BOOKS BEEN SENT TO CONTRACTING.
________
HAS FINAL PAYMENT BEEN APPROVED.
________
HAS WARRANTY DATE BEEN ESTABLISHED. DATE:__________________
________
HAVE RECORD DRAWINGS AND ORGINALS BEEN TURNED OVER TO DRAFTING FOR
DOING AS-BUILTS AND FILING.
________
HAVE O&M MANUALS BEEN TURNED OVER THE SHOPS.
________
HAS 1354 BEEN COMPLETED AND TURNED OVER TO REAL PROPERTY ALONG WITH
INPECTORS AND ENGINEERS FOLDERS. **
________
HAS CONTRACTOR’S WRITTEN, WITNESSED AND NOTARIZED STATEMENT RE
COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BEEN TURNED OVER TO THE GOVERNMENT.
SEE SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, PARAGRAPH 1.15.
________
HAS PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS BEEN RECEIVED, COMPLETED AND RETURNED.
________
HAVE ASBESTOS RECORDS BEEN RECEIVED FROM CONTRACTOR AND TURNED OVER
TO CEV.
________
HAVE ENVIRONMENTAL PERMIT CERTIFICATIONS ISSUED FOR POTABLE WATER,
SANITARY SEWER, OR STORMWATER BEEN CLOSED OUT.
** 1354 SHOULD BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO TURNING IN O&M MANUALS, AS-BUILTS DRAWINGS AND
BLUE BOOKS.
01 70 00 - 6
MS0612
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
SPARE PARTS
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 09 51 13 ceiling tile
________ Section 09 65 00 flooring base
Section 12 21 13 blinds
________ Section 21 13 13 fire sup. heads
Section 23 54 00 filters
________ Section 23 73 00 filters
Section 26 24 16 keys
________ Section 26 28 26 keys
Section 26 52 00 lamps
________ Section 28 16 00 intrusion detection
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
O&M MANUALS
________
________
________
system
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 32 84 00 irrigation sys
Section 09 68 00 carpet
Section 22 13 43 lift stations
________
________
________
Section 09 30 00 ceramic tile
Section 10 44 00 fire extinguishers
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam
Section 21 13 13 fire suppr.
________ Section 22 10 00 plumbing piping
Section 22 11 19 plumbing spec.
________ Section 22 40 00 plumbing fixtures
Section 22 30 00 pluming eq.
________ Section 23 21 16 hydronic spec.
Section 23 21 23 pumps
________ Section 23 52 34 boilers
Section 23 54 00 furn. & a/c
________ Section 23 55 00 unit heaters
Section 23 64 00 chillers
________ Section 23 73 00 air handlers
Section 23 34 23 ventilators
________ Section 23 36 00 terminal units
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 12 00 transformers
Section 26 28 26 transfer switch
________ Section 26 24 27 bypass switch
Section 26 51 00 interior lights
________ Section 26 56 00 site lighting
Section 26 33 00 emer. power
________ Section 26 32 13 generators
Section 28 31 00 fire alarm
________ Section 28 13 00 intrusion detection
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 23 72 00 enthalpy and desiccant wheel systems
WARRANTIES
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 31 31 16 termite control
________ Section 07 42 13 metal roofing
Section 07 90 00 joint sealers
________ Section 07 52 00 bituminous roofing
Section 08 14 16 wood doors
________ Section 13 34 19 metal bldg. roofing
Section 13 34 19 metal bldgs
________ Section 22 40 00 water cooler
Section 22 30 00 water heater
________ Section 23 52 34 boiler
Section 23 54 00 compressor
________ Section 23 55 00 unit heater
Section 23 64 00 chiller
________ Section 23 36 00 terminal units
Section 26 55 50 ballfield lighting
________ Section 26 33 00 emer. power supply
Section 26 32 13 generator
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
TRAINING
________
________
________
________
________
Section 23 52 34 boilers
________ Section 23 64 00 chillers
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 32 13 generators
Section 28 31 00 alarm system
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 21 13 18 high expansion foam system
01 70 00 - 7
MS0612
PROJECT # AND TITLE: ______________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________
TESTING
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Section 31 23 23 backfill
________ Section 31 23 16 trenching
Section 32 12 16 paving
________ Section 32 84 00 irrigation sys
Section 03 30 00 concrete
________ Section 04 05 03 mortar
Section 22 13 43 lift stations
________ Section 21 13 13 fire suppression
Section 22 10 00 plumbing piping
________ Section 22 15 00 compressed air
Section 23 21 13 hydronic piping
________ Section 23 52 34 boilers
Section 23 64 00 chillers
________ Section 23 81 26 heat pumps
Section 23 81 26 OA Units
________ Section 23 31 00 ductwork
Section 23 09 23 controls
________ Section 26 05 13 med-voltage cable
Section 26 27 26 wiring devices
________ Section 26 05 26 grounding
Section 26 32 13 generators
________ Section 28 31 00 alarm system
Section 28 16 00 detection sys
________ Section 27 00 00 LAN systems
Section 23 81 23 computer room air conditioning units
Section 23 72 00 enthalpy and desiccant wheel systems
01 70 00 - 8
MS0612
PR O J E C T
W A R R A N T Y
F O R M
BUILDING NUMBER & STREET ADDRESS: ____________________________________________________
PROJECT NUMBER & TITLE:
____________________________________________________
CONTRACT NUMBER: _____________________________________________________________________
PROJECT MANAGER & PHONE NO:
_______________________________________________
CONTRACT SPECIALIST & PHONE NO. _______________________________________________________
DATE OF GOVERNMENT ACCEPTANCE: ______________________________________________________
GENERAL 0NE YEAR WARRANTY EXPIRATION DATE: __________________________________________
ONE YEAR WARRANTY INPSECTION DATE (30 days prior to expiration)___________________________
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PRIME KTR, PHONE NO. & FAX NO. __________________________________________________________
HVAC SUBKTR, PHONE & FAX NO. __________________________________________________________
PLUMBING SUBKTR, PHONE & FAX NOS. _____________________________________________________
ELECTRICAL SUBKTR. PHONE & FAX NO'S ___________________________________________________
E X T E N D E D
W A R R A N T I E S
SPEC.
ITEM & WARRANTY -
RESPONSIBLE PARTY (IES)
31 31 16
Termite Treatment, 5 yrs,
Prime ktr & installer
32 84 00
Irrigation System, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & subktr
04 20 00
Masonry, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & subktr
07 42 13
Preformed Metal Roofing, general, 2 yr
Prime ktr & subktr
Panel finish, 20 year,
Manufacturer
Leaking, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
07 52 00
Modified Bitumen Roofing, 10 yr,
Manufacturer
07 62 00
Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim, finish 20 yr,
Manufacturer
08 33 23
Overhead Rolling Doors, one year plus warranty,
Manufacturer
13 34 19
Pre-Engineered Building Systems, general, 2 yr,
Prime ktr & installer
Siding finish, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
Panel finish, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
Leaking, 20 yr,
Manufacturer
22 40 00
Plumbing, water cooler compressor, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
22 30 00
Plumbing, water heater tank, 6 yr,
Manufacturer
22 15 00
Compressed Air Systems, air compressor, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
23 52 34
Finned Water Tube Boilers, boiler heat exchanger, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
01 70 00 - 9
MS0612
E X T E N D E D
W A R R A N T I E S, continued.
SPEC.
ITEM & WARRANTY -
RESPONSIBLE PARTY (IES)
23 54 00
Forced Air Furnaces &Split System Air Conditioning,
5 yr compressor, 10 yr heat exchanger,
Manufacturer
23 55 00
Fuel Fired Unit Heaters, unit heat exchanger, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
23 64 00
Air Cooled Water Chillers, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
26 55 50
Ballfield Lighting, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
26 33 00
Emergency Power Supply, 5 yr,
Manufacturer
G E NE R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N
SPEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION; MANUFACTURER, SPEC #, STYLE, TYPE, COLOR, ETC.
04 20 00
Brick, __________________________________________________________________________
04 20 00
Concrete Masonry _______________________________________________________________
04 20 00
Glass Masonry __________________________________________________________________
06 41 00
Custom Casework _______________________________________________________________
07 24 00
EIFS ___________________________________________________________________________
07 42 13
Prefrmd. Roofing & Access. _______________________________________________________
07 52 00
Modif'd Bitumen Memb. Roofing ___________________________________________________
08 13 14
Steel Doors & Frames ____________________________________________________________
08 14 16
Wood Doors ____________________________________________________________________
08 41 13
Alum. Entry & Storefront __________________________________________________________
08 51 13
Alum. Windows, Oper. & Fixed _____________________________________________________
08 71 00
Door H'dware Latchsets __________________________________________________________
Locksets _______________________________________________________________________
Closers ________________________________________________________________________
Exit Devices ____________________________________________________________________
09 30 00
Cer. Tile Floor & Wall _____________________________________________________________
09 51 13
Susp. Acoust. Ceiling ____________________________________________________________
09 65 00
Resilient Floor __________________________________________________________________
09 68 00
Carpet _________________________________________________________________________
09 90 00
Painting ________________________________________________________________________
10 21 14
Plas. Lam. Toil. Part's ____________________________________________________________
10 26 00
Bumper, Corner & Wall Prot. ______________________________________________________
10 14 00
Interior Signage _________________________________________________________________
10 28 00
Toil. & Bath Access. _____________________________________________________________
12 21 13
Mini & Vert. Blinds _______________________________________________________________
13 34 19
Pre-Engr. Bldg. Systems __________________________________________________________
26 12 00
Distribution Transfmers. __________________________________________________________
26 24 16
Panelboards ____________________________________________________________________
26 24 17
Load Centers ___________________________________________________________________
01 70 00 - 10
MS0612
G E NE R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N, continued.
SPEC
ITEM DESCRIPTION; MANUFACTURER, SPEC #, STYLE, TYPE, COLOR, ETC.
26 28 26
Transfer Switch _________________________________________________________________
26 28 27
By-pass Isolation Switch _________________________________________________________
26 51 00
Interior Luminaires ______________________________________________________________
26 56 00
Site Lighting ____________________________________________________________________
26 32 13
Pkg. Engine Generator Syst. ______________________________________________________
28 31 00
Fire Detect. & Alarm Syst. _________________________________________________________
28 16 00
Intrusion Detect. Syst. ____________________________________________________________
I N S T R U C T I O N S
1. The prime contractor shall complete this form and provide it with the close out documentation.
2. Extended warranties; Provide name, phone and fax number for the responsible party (ies).
3. General Information; Provide name, phone and fax number, and pertinent information indicated for each item
listed.
4. It may not be required to use all of the items listed under Extended Warranties and General Information, in the
construction of this project. Should this occur, simply line through the item to indicate it was not used on this
project.
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Prime Contractor (See note below)
Date
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Mailing Address
City, State and Zip Code
____________________________________
_____________________________________
Phone Number
Fax Number
____________________________________
E-mail Address
If prime contractor is a corporation, affix the corporate seal below and provide signature of responsible party who
can legally obligate the corporation.
01 70 00 - 11
MS0612
SECTION 02 41 19:
PART 1
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Provide all demolition as required by the Contract Documents.
1. Demolish interior and exterior portions of structures including but not limited to, walls, partitions,
windows, doors, roofing, paving/curb/guttering, site furniture, shrubs, trees, interior finishes, etc., and
associated components.
2. Demolish plumbing, mechanical, and electrical equipment and associated components
3. Demolished materials shall become the property of the Contractor unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings or in the Specifications.
4. Remove and dispose of demolished materials at a legally approved dumpsite off base.
5. Notify Contracting Officer prior to shut-off of existing utilities. Cap off utilities that are to remain in use.
6. Where fasteners, bolts, piping, wiring, ductwork and/or equipment that is/are to be removed are
attached to or pass through walls, floors, ceilings or roofs, the Contractor shall patch all holes or
openings under 1(one) square foot in size to match adjacent construction. Patch holes or openings in
fire rated walls as required to maintain fire rating.
7. Existing fire suppression systems, fire detection systems, and intrusion systems must remain
active unless approved by the Contracting Officer and the responsible agency (Fire
Department/Security Forces). Required deactivation of systems, or portions thereof, during
demolition/construction must be requested and approved 72 hours in advance. Contractor will be
responsible for protection of premises during periods of deactivation. If necessary, provide temporary
protection or services.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval selective demolition schedule, including schedule and methods for capping and
continuing utility service, and clearing & grubbing schedule.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced workmen.
1.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Government personnel will not occupy areas of Work during demolition.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
DEMOLITION
A. Do not damage building elements and improvements indicated to remain. Items of salvage value and not
included on schedule of salvage items to be returned to Government may be removed from structure.
Storage or sale of items at Project site is prohibited.
B. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, drives or other occupied or used spaces or facilities without the
written permission of the Contracting Officer and the authorities having jurisdiction. Do not interrupt utilities
serving occupied or used facilities without the written permission of the Contracting Officer and authorities
having jurisdiction. If necessary, provide temporary utilities
C. Cease operations if public safety or remaining structures are endangered. Perform temporary corrective
measures until operations can be continued properly. Complete closure of Air Force roads will not be
authorized.
END OF SECTION
02 41 19 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 03 30 00
PART 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Slabs on grade, slabs on grade including integral footings, foundations, beams, columns, and elevated
floor and roof slabs.
B. Equipment pads and thrust blocks.
C. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
B.
ACI 304R – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
C.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
D.
ACI 306R - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
E.
ACI 308R - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
F.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
G.
ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
H.
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
I.
ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
J.
ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
K.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
L.
ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
M.
ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method.
N.
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method.
O.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
P.
ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Q.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
R.
ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing.
S.
ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous
Type).
T.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
03 30 00 - 1
MS0612
U.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
V.
ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
W.
ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and
Asphalt Pavements
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, sealants, attachment accessories and admixtures.
C. Concrete mix design.
D. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
E. Provide 12-inch long sample of expansion joint and control joint.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components, which are concealed from view.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
E. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.07
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal or Type III - High Early Strength Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Course aggregate shall be washed and shall consist of
crushed stone. Particle shape of coarse shall be generally cubicle in shape.
03 30 00 - 2
MS0612
C. Water: ACI 318; potable, Clean and not detrimental to concrete with no chloride ions.
2.02
ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
B. Chemical: ASTM C494, Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding or Type E - Water Reducing and
Accelerating Admixture.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618. Type C or Type F (Loss on ignition for type F shall not exceed 6%). If an approved
pozzolanic material is used, the weight of flyash used shall not exceed 10% determined by
dividing the weight of flyash by the weight of Portland cement.
D. Use of all admixtures must be approved by the Contracting Officer. The use of ‘plastisizers’ is
prohibited unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion or two component modified epoxy resin.
B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class “B” reinforced, multi-ply vapor retarder (Water vapor resistance 0.3
perms, Tensile strength 30.0 lbf/in, Puncture resistance 1700 grams). Install in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s written instructions including filed taping of seams and installation of pipe boots
penetrating through the slab.
C. Non-shrink Grout: ASTM C1107: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,
water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400
psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.04
JOINT TYPES, DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS (Identify Type on Structural Drawings)
A. Isolation Joint (IJ): Asphalt impregnated glass fiber filler Type A: ASTM D994, minimum 1/2" inch thick or
as indicated on drawings.
B. Exterior Construction Joint (ECJ): Integral galvanized steel, formed to tongue and groove profile, with
removable top strip exposing sealant trough, and ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
C. Exterior Tooled Contraction Joint (ETC): Tool formed joint located between isolation joints.
C. Interior Transverse Construction Joint (ITC): Integral galvanized steel, formed to tongue and groove
profile, with ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge with removable cap for sealant pocket.
D. Interior Longitudinal Contraction Joint (ILC): Joint that is saw cut into the surface of the concrete as soon
as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from becoming dislodged by the cutting
process (usually 4-12 hours after the concrete hardens) and completed before drying shrinkage causes
cracking. Initial cut shall be 1/3 the thickness of the slab. After concrete has cured, joints shall be re-cut to
½” width x ½” depth. Provide foam backer rod and fill joint with sealant flush with top of slab.
E. All joint material shall match the thickness of the slab.
F. Sealant:
1. ASTM D6690: Hot applied synthetic rubber compound.
2. Cold applied two-part liquid neoprene.
2.05
CONCRETE MIX
A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Mix concrete in accordance
with ACI 304R. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather ONLY when approved by Contracting Officer. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
C. Accelerating admixtures shall not contain more than 0.1% calcium chloride.
D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Contracting Officer.
03 30 00 - 3
MS0612
E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately
placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials.
3.03
SCHEDULE - JOINT CONTROL
A. Floor Slab Perimeter and Exterior/Interior Isolation Joints: Joint filler Type A set 1/8 inch below floor slab
elevation.
B. Exterior/Interior Construction Joints: Set joints to line and grade.
C. Contraction Joints: Saw-cut joints to dimensions shown on the drawings.
D. See 2.04. above.
3.04
PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Notify Contracting Officer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed
during concrete placement.
D. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 8 inches and seal watertight by
taping edges and ends.
E. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier
material; lap over damaged areas minimum 8 inches and seal watertight.
F. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to
required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor finish.
I.
Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix.
J.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
L. Do not interrupt successive placements; do not permit cold joints to occur.
M. Saw cut joints within 12 hours of placing using 3/16-inch thick blade. Depth of cut shall not be less than
one-third (1/3) the thickness of the slab.
N. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
03 30 00 - 4
MS0612
3.05
CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Monolithic Foundation and Slab-on-Grade: 6” thick, 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, formed to line and grade.
Steel trowel finishes surface of slab. Vertical surfaces shall be repaired/patched and finished no later
than one day after form removal. Wet and rub surface with a carborundum brick or other approved
abrasive, producing a satisfactory finish, smooth and uniform in color and texture. Seal all joints with an
approved joint sealer.
C. Beams, Columns, Elevated Floor and Roof Slabs Exposed to View: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete.
Patch/repair surfaces after form removal, wet and rub surface with a carborundum brick or other approved
abrasive after patching/repair, producing a satisfactory finish, smooth and uniform in color and texture.
D. Exposed Exterior Sidewalks, Aprons, Landings, Steps: 4” thick, 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, air entrained,
and non-slip broom finish.
E. Below Grade Footings, Single-Story Structures: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish.
F. Below Grade Footings, Multi-Story Structures: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, form finish.
3.06
CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for
hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Cure concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03 39 00.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section
01 41 00.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review and approval prior to
commencement of work.
D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 40 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete
placed. Perform one compression test each at 7 days and 28 days, and one spare to be tested when
directed by Contracting Officer.
F. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. Slump shall be within 3”-5” range except
monolithic foundation and slab-on-grade shall be within 2”-4” range.
3.08
PATCHING
A. Allow Contracting Officer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Contracting Officer upon
discovery.
C. Patch imperfections as directed in accordance with ACI 301.
3.09
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements. Concrete not conforming to specified strength in 28 days will be considered
defective.
03 30 00 - 5
MS0612
B. Defective concrete will be removed and replaced. Removal will be to the nearest construction joint in all
directions. Repair of defective concrete will be permitted only upon approval from the Contracting Officer.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Contracting Officer for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
03 30 00 - 6
MS0612
SECTION 04 05 03:
PART 1
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar for masonry.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM C91 – Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
C. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
D. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
E. ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and
Concrete.
F. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain
and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
G. International Building Code (Latest Edition), Chapter 21 Masonry.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1.
Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1.
Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Provide design mix, Proportion method (by volume), required environmental conditions, and Forrer
admixture limitations. Base volume on cubic foot measurements. See table 2103.7(1) 2000 International
Building Code. The use of the Forrer admixture requires a reduction in the volume of water. Include
volume of water required in gallons. Do not use hydrated lime or lime putty in the design mix.
C. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's certificate indicating conformance to ASTM C270 and installation
instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products at site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. Maintain packaged
materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Cold Weather Construction.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Hot Weather Construction.
04 05 03 - 1
MS0612
1.07
MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar in accordance with Section 01 41 00 and in accordance with ASTM C780.
B. Test mortar mix for compressive strength, consistency and slump. Provide 4 copies of test results to
Contracting Officer for review and approval prior to commencement of work. Mix design for all masonry
units exposed to the weather, standard CMU and face brick must include Forrer Dry Block II or Forrer
Dry Brick Admixture, in the proportions recommended by the manufacturer for the type of mortar
specified. See 2.04 Mortar Mixes below. The use of Forrer Dry Block II or Dry Brick is not required in mix
design for masonry units not exposed to the weather.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
MATERIALS:
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type M or Type S.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, Type S, white cement, for glass unit masonry.
D. Admixtures: Forrer Dry Block or Dry Brick Admixture.
2.03
MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar for Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions and Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S utilizing
the Proportion Method to achieve 1800 psi strength.
B. Mortar for load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M, utilizing the Proportion Method to
achieve 2500 psi strength.
2.04
MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM
C270. Mortar shall be mixed between 3-5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer with the required amount
of water to provide the required consistency. Hand mixing is not permitted. See 1.03.B above.
B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
C. Mortars that have become stiffened may be re-tempered by adding the minimum amount of water to
achieve the required consistency.
D. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. Discard mortar beyond 2-1/2 hours.
2.05
TEST PANEL:
A. Provide 4’ x 4’ test panel to illustrate laying of masonry units including width and tooling of mortar joints.
Do not lay any masonry units until the Inspector has approved the test panel. The approved test panel
shall be the standard of quality for the project.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.02
INSTALLATION
04 05 03 - 2
MS0612
A. Install mortar to requirements of the specific masonry Section.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM C780 and under provisions of
Section 01 41 00.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each type of mortar to testing firm for review and approval prior to
commencement of work.
D. Tests of mortar, aggregates and admixtures may be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.
E. Three undisturbed samples of molded mortar test cylinders will be taken as follows:
1. For every 1000 s.f. of gross wall area or fraction thereof.
END OF SECTION
04 05 03 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 04 20 00
PART 1
UNIT MASONRY
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units.
B. Brick masonry units.
C. Glass masonry units.
D. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
E. Parged masonry surfaces.
F. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.02
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. See applicable sections of the Specifications and the Drawings.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick.
C. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
D. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
E. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
H. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
I.
ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale).
J.
ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
K. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
L. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber
M. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.
N. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
O. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
P. International Building Code (Latest Edition), Chapter 21 Masonry.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one sample of each masonry unit to be used in the construction to illustrate type, texture, range,
etc. under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
04 20 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
C. Submit product data and manufacturer's written installation instructions of all products used in the
construction under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit copy of UL Design for fire-rated wall assemblies.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
1.05 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.06
OUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer / Subcontractor: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 3
years documented experience.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the successful manufacture of many different styles and colors of
masonry units as specified in this Section with minimum of 3 years documented experience.
1.07
MOCK-UP
A. Prior to start of work, provide 4' x 4' mock-up of each type of exposed masonry unit except glass masonry
units. Provide 16” x 16” mock-up of glass units. Mock-up shall be constructed from approved CM units.
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate the minimum standard for the work. Mock-up may not remain
as part of the work. Do not start masonry work until mock up has been approved.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products at site on pallets to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and
damage to the products by weather, water or breakage. Products shall be delivered and stored in original
plastic packages until ready for use. Damaged packages will be rejected. Products must be kept dry.
Delivery, storage and handling shall also be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Cold Weather Construction.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: International Building Code, Chapter 21, Hot Weather Construction.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. The prime contractor and masonry subcontractor shall warrant the materials and installation for two years
from the date of acceptance by the Contracting Officer. Warranty shall include cleaning of efflorescence
from the Brick and Concrete Masonry Units, and repair of damaged BM / CMU due to efflorescence. Presealer and water repellant sealer shall be re-applied after repair or cleaning of the Brick / CMU.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
04 20 00 - 2
MS0612
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
2.02
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
B. Solid Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
C. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Type II - Non-Moisture Controlled, normal weight.
D. Fire Rated Concrete Masonry Units: CM units produced in accordance with the Standard for Concrete
Masonry Units, UL-618, are classified without further fire tests. Other CM Units are classified on the basis
of fire tests conducted in accordance with the Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials, UL-263. Supplier shall provide the appropriate Underwriters Laboratories Certificate indicating
the correct classification, in hours, for the unit to be incorporated into the construction. Construction of
fire-rated wall assemblies shall be in strict accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL Design
(Number) listed on the drawing. A copy of the UL design is available form the Base Civil Engineer's
office, Engineering Flight.
E. Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C55, of same Grade, Type, and weight as block units.)
F. Shape & Size: Nominal modular size of 8-inch x 8 inch x l6 inch, 4-inch x 8-inch x l6- inch and as
indicated on the Drawings. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and
bullnosed corners where indicated on the Drawings.
1. Back-up Wythe, interior partitions to receive additional finish, and below grade: Plain/standard CMU.
2. Exposed to view, above grade: Split Face, Split Face/Split Ribbed or Smooth or plain as indicated on
the drawings.
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBX, Grade MW; color as selected.
B. Common Brick: ASTM C62, Grade MW; solid units.
C. Size & Shape: Nominal modular size of 4 inches x 2-2/3 inches x 8 inches. Provide special units for 90degree corners, lintels, and bull-nosed corners as indicated on drawings.
1. Back-up Wythe, interior partitions to receive additional finish, and below grade: Common brick.
2. Exposed to view, above grade: Face Brick color and texture as per 2.03.G below.
3. Color shall match similar units used on base and must be approved by the Contracting Officer or his
representative.
D. Special Brick Shape: Shaped to profile indicated, surface texture on face, sides or ends as indicated on
the drawings.
E. Size and Shape of Giant Brick Units: As indicated on the drawings. Provide special units for 90-degree
corners, lintels, and bull-nosed corners as indicated on drawings.
F. Modular Brick Units: All brick units must be produced at one time for color/shade consistency.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Cunningham Brick Company, Lexington KY, Winestone Rockface
2. Cunningham Brick Company, Lexington KY, Winestone
G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
GLASS MASONRY UNITS:
A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently sealed hollow units by heat fusing joint with joint key and factory coating
at units edges to assist mortar bond. Provide special corner units, curved units, end units etc., as required
04 20 00 - 3
MS0612
and indicated on the drawings. Nominal size 8 inches x 8 inches x 4 inches. Color and pattern as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Solid Glass Units: Factory coated edges to assist mortar bond. Provide special corner units, curved units,
end units etc., as required and indicated on the drawings. Nominal size 8 inches x 8 inches x 3 inches.
Color and pattern as indicated on the drawings.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pittsburgh Corning Inc., 800 Presque Isle Road, Pittsburgh, PA 15239, phone1-800-9925769
2. Weck, Glashaus Inc., 450 Congress Parkway Suite “E”, Crystal Lake, IL, phone 1-815-356-8440
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.05
GROUT
A. Fine Grout: Ready mixed concrete fill at small spaces of CM units shall be 3000 psi concrete without
coarse aggregate. Use at spaces at least 0.75” wide horizontally but less than 3”. Spaces smaller than
0.75” shall be filled with mortar. Slump shall be between 8”-10”, about 8” for units with low water
absorption and about 10 “for units with high water absorption. Limit fly ash to 15% of the weight of
cement.
B. Coarse Grout: Ready mixed concrete fill at cell(s) of CM units shall be 3000 psi concrete with pea gravel
aggregate or smaller depending on job conditions. Use at spaces greater than 3 “ wide horizontally.
Slump shall be between 8”-10”, about 8” for units with low water absorption and about 10 “ for units with
high water absorption. Limit fly ash to 15% of the weight of cement.
2.06
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Joint Reinforcement: Truss type hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, high tensile cold-drawn steel
conforming to ASTM A82; manufactured by Dur-o- Wall or equal.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60-ksi-yield grade; deformed billet steel bars sized and located as shown
on the Drawings.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Through-Wall Flashing Assembly:
1. 5 ounce copper-fabric type; full sheet copper, asphalt coated both sides, laminated under pressure
between two layers (one each side) of treated glass fabric.
2. Termination bar, 1" x 1/8" stainless steel bar with pre-punched holes, top of bar 16" above weeps (at
foundation or steel angle lintel). Secure bar to each stud wall with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Apply sealant to screw heads.
3. Steel Lintel Drip Edge: 26 gauge stainless steel, width to equal horizontal leg of lintel with 3/4" vertical
leg up and down. Place on top of lintel and install copper-fabric flashing on top of drip edge.
B. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinylchloride material, regular, wide flange or “tee” design as required.
Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints. Must meet ASTM D-2240.
C. Preformed Joint Filler: Neoprene filler strip used at veneer control joints. Must meet ASTM D-1056, Class
RE41 or 2A1.
D. Veneer Wall Ties, Studwall Backup: 3/4" x 5" x 12 gauge hot galvanized steel screwed to studs with hot
galvanized 3/16" wire ties. (Dur-O-Wal #D/A 207 & D/A 703 or 750 trapezoid wire ties or equal)
E. Building Paper: No. 15 or 30 asphalt saturated felt as indicated on the drawings.
F. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry
joints.
G. Veneer Wall Ties, Masonry Backup: Rectangular adjustable wall ties, hot dipped galvanized 3/16” wire,
double pintel and double eye rod, at 16” o.c. vertically and 24” o.c. horizontally. Maximum vertical
adjustment 1.25”. (Dur-O-Eye D/A 3700 or approved equal)
04 20 00 - 4
MS0612
H. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Single Wythe: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 3/16” side rods with
#9 truss rod bracing, @ 16” o.c. vertically. Stagger with corrugated metal ties.
I.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Glass Masonry Units: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 9 gauge
side rods @ 1.625-1.75” o.c. to suite GMU, @ 16” o.c. 9 gauge ladder type bracing @ 8” o.c.
J.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement, Double Wythe: Hot dipped galvanized deformed bars, 3/16” side rods
with 3/16” truss rod bracing, hot dipped galvanized 3/16” welded double eye rod at and double pintel @
16” o.c. vertically.
K. Expansion strips, Glass Masonry Units: Dense glass fiber7/16 inch x 4-inch nominal size.
L. Panel Anchors, Glass Masonry Units: Steel strips, 20 gauge x 1-3/4 inch wide, punched with three
rows of elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to 1.25 ounce per square
foot.
M. Perimeter channel, Glass Masonry Units:
Extruded aluminum, channel profile, size as required to fit
GM unit, one piece per length installed (no joints/splices), anodized to match color as indicated on the
drawings.
N. Glass Masonry Units Grid System: Extruded anodized aluminum grid block system to accept Glass
Masonry Units. Manufacturer, Innovative Building Products Inc., phone 1-800-923-2263.
O. Z Bar Wall Ties: 0.25” thickness x length required @ 16” o.c., galvanized steel wire with moisture drip.
P. Weep Holes-Wicks: Cotton rope, 0.375” diameter x 7” in length at 16” o.c. horizontally at veneer
applications. On single wythe walls, install weep holes in center of each cell of CM units.
Q. Rigid Steel Partition Anchors: 0.25” thick x 1.25” (w) x length required @ 16” o.c.vertically.
R. Dovetail Anchors and Slots: Dovetail slot with dovetail anchors (corrugated ties, triangular wire-ties, and
stone anchors) as required to secure masonry to structure.
S. Mortar Net: High density polyethylene or nylon strands woven into a minimum 90% open mesh, installed
on top of through-wall flashing at the inside of the cavity. Thickness of materials shall match the depth of
the cavity. Material must not react with common building materials (PVC, polystyrene, polyethylene,
copper, lead, asphalt, etc. Must be a minimum of 16" above the top of the flashing and designed to
last the life of the building.
T. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, as recommend by masonry manufacturer for masonry to be painted, not
harmful to masonry work or adjacent material.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized a located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing condition.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors and accessories supplied in this section and other
sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure
provides permanent bracing
3.03
COURSING
04 20 00 - 5
MS0612
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and on mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
Joints shall be struck flush and tooled concave.
3.04
PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints uniformly jointed with other work.
B. Lay first course of hollow masonry units with full mortar bedding. Lay subsequent units with face shell
bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joint or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
E. Interlock intersections and external corners.
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made,
remove mortar and replace.
G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.
Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Protect all CMU, the air space on veneer construction, and the air space in cavity wall construction, from
water intrusion during construction by covering with plastic sheeting. CMU must be kept dry at all times.
I.
Glass Masonry Units: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
J.
It is extremely important that the air space between the back of the unit and sheathing be kept free
of mortar to allow for drainage of water and free air circulation. The contractor must use
moveable wood strips or other methods approved by the Contracting Officer, to prevent mortar
accumulation within the air space.
3.05
WEEPS AND MORTAR NET
A. Install weep hole-wicks as per 2.06.P. horizontally above through-wall flashing at first course above grade
and above shelf angles to allow for drainage and air circulation. Extend wick to the full depth of the air
space and under mortar net. Weeps at cored units shall be installed at the center of each cell to allow
drainage of water and air circulation within the masonry unit. Leave approximately 1” of rope extending
beyond the exterior face of the wall. Upon completion of all masonry work and prior to sealing the
masonry, carefully remove wick from the wall
B. Install mortar net above flashing and shelf angles as per manufacturer’s written instructions and
paragraph 2.07.
3.06
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. vertically.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend minimum 16 inches each aide of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings.
E. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with steel partition anchors 16 inches o.c.
alternating courses with horizontal reinforcement.
F. Install vertical wall reinforcement in accordance with the drawings.
3.07
LINTELS
A. Install lintels as scheduled on Drawings.
04 20 00 - 6
MS0612
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where precast concrete lintels are not scheduled.
C. Use single piece reinforcing bars only.
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Rod grout to insure full and complete filling
of each cell, free of voids.
F. Allow masonry lintel to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
G. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.08
GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated on the drawings, provide a minimum
of 2, No. 5 bars, and 1 inch from bottom web.
B. Lap rebar splices a minimum 24”.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned
position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Rod grout to insure full and complete filling
of each cell, free of voids.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cells with grout for a minimum 16 inches either side of opening.
F. Maximum height of CMU wall(s) prior to grouting cells is 4’-8”. Grout cells in accordance with the
drawings. After grout has been placed, continue CMU walls in 4’-8” increments until wall reaches full
height.
3.09
CONTROL JOINTS (Brick and CMU only)
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. Provide corrugated metal ties at 8”
o/c (vertically) at each portion of wall at each side of control joint.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner-joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. In lieu of preformed control joints, contractor may field construct control joints by providing ½” clear space
free of mortar between ends of masonry units. Provide backer rod and sealant.
D. Provide control joints:
1. Location and size of control joint as indicated on the drawings. If not shown on the drawings, see E.
below.
2. Where masonry meets dissimilar construction materials and remains in the same plane.
3. Where control or expansion joints occur in the structure.
E. Maximum control joint spacing measured horizontally:
1. 20-feet in either direction for walls up to 10 feet high.
2. 28-feet in either direction for walls 10 feet plus-14 feet in height.
3. 36-feet in either direction for walls 14 feet plus-18 feet in height.
4. Placement of the above shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer or his designated Civil
Engineering representative.
3.10
BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, anchor bolts, plates and other items
furnished by other Sections.
B. Build in items plumb and level.
04 20 00 - 7
MS0612
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
3.11
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more.
C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.
D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet.
E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
3.12
CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, cleaves and other items as may be required.
B. Obtain Contracting Officer for approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.13
CLEANING
A. Cleaning shall be in strict accordance with each manufacturer’s written instructions. Using cleaning
solution recommended by manufacturer. Provide two copies of each to Contracting Officer prior to
commencement of cleaning. If the manufacturer’s instructions conflict with the following procedure, notify
Contracting Officer immediately.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.14
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation without damaging completed work; provide protective boards at exposed
external corners, which may be damaged by construction activities.
3.15
FINISH
A. See section 09 90 00 PAINTING.
END OF SECTION
04 20 00 - 8
MS0612
SECTION 06 41 00:
PART 1
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Plastic laminate clad cabinet units.
B. Countertops.
C. Cabinet hardware.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware
B. Architectural Woodwork Institute:
1. AWI – AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
D. Green Seal:
1. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
2. GS-36 - Aerosol Adhesives.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work to "Custom Quality" in accordance with Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork
Institute (AWI).
B. A single firm shall do all work in this section.
1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
d. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify each composite wood product contains no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
d. Certified wood products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
06 41 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Product Data: Submit 4 copies of manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
indicating materials, hardware and finishes used in fabrication of cabinets.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit 4 copies of shop drawings indicating location and size of each type of cabinet and
countertop, accessories, materials, finishes, hardware types and locations, fillers, etc. Include fully
dimensioned plans and elevations and indicate details of anchorage to countertop and to walls.
D. Samples for plastic laminate selection: Submit manufacturer's full color and pattern range.
E. Samples for verification: Submit one 8 x 10 inch sample of each type, pattern, and color previously
selected.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials for interior woodwork indoors in air-conditioned spaces maintained within design
temperature and humidity range.
B. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. During and after installation of work in this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity in
building spaces as will occur after occupancy.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
3. Certified Wood Materials: Furnish wood materials certified in accordance with FSC Guidelines.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-36.
3. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS11.
4. Interior Composite Wood Products: Contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
2.02
BASIC MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: Grade A-C veneer interior grade with lumber core; type of glue recommended for
application; and the following:
1. Species of Veneer: Pine or as approved by the contracting Officer.
B. Hardwood Lumber: AWI grade II Custom Grade; maximum moisture content of 5-10 percent; and the
following:
1. Species of Wood: Basswood or Yellow Poplar or as approved by Contracting Officer.
2. Cut or Slicing of Wood: Plain sawn.
C. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, of thickness, type and grade indicated.
1. General Purpose Horizontal and High usage Exposure: NEMA Standard, GP50.
2. General Purpose Vertical and Medium Usage Exposure: NEMA Standard, GP28.
3. Post-Forming, Horizontal, Formed Radius Edges: NEMA Standard, PF42.
2.03
WALL AND BASE CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction Style:
1. Reveal Overlay on Face Frame Style: Provide base, wall and full height units (if any) with drawer
fronts, doors and fixed panels (if any) overlaying and concealing frames and sides of cabinet bodies.
06 41 00 - 2
MS0612
B. Cabinet Construction:
1. Laminate Clad Cabinets: Softwood Plywood core material with high-pressure plastic laminate facings
conforming to 2.01.C.
2. Joinery: All joints for casework construction are doweled and glued. Cabinet sides, bottoms and tops
are rabbeted to accept the back panel.
C. Component Construction:
1. Doors: 3/4" thick plywood with GP28 on exposed face and edges.
2. Drawer Fronts: 3/4" thick plywood with GP28 on exposed face and edges.
3. Exposed End Panels: 3/4" plywood with GP28 on exposed face and edges.
4. Exposed Side Panels and Stretchers: 3/4"thick plywood with GP28 on exposed face and edges.
5. Back Panels: 1/4" plywood.
6. Countertop: 3/4" thick plywood with GP50 on top and edges.
7. Splash: 3/4" thick plywood with GP28 on top and edges
8. Toe Kicks: 3/4" thick plywood with GP28 on exposed face
9. Drawer Boxes: 3/4" thick hardwood sides, sub-front and back with 3/8" plywood bottoms. Joints are
dovetail construction. The drawer sides and ends are dadoed to accept drawer bottom, which is glued
in place.
10. Exterior Finish: All visible exposed surfaces covered with GP28.
11. Interior Finish: Factory clear finish as standard with cabinet fabricator. Submit type of finish and
description of preparation and application of materials.
12. Edging: All edges of doors, drawer fronts and cabinet cases are edged with GP28 to match panels.
13. Semi-exposed Shelving (Within casework): 3/4" thick plywood panels with plastic laminate at front
edge to match cabinet body color. (See 10.)
14. Exposed Shelving: 3/4" thick plywood with GP28 on both faces and all edges to match.
2.04
HARDWARE
A. Shelf Standards and Rests: Formed steel channels and rests, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers;
satin finish.
B. Shelf Brackets: Formed steel brackets for attachment with lugs; satin finish.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Aluminum "U" shaped pull, satin finish, 4 inches wide.
D. Sliding Door Pulls: Oval shaped, aluminum with satin finish.
E. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, satin finish.
F. Catches: Magnetic.
G. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted wrap around guides, epoxy-coated steel with ball bearing/nylon rollers, selfclosing. Load rated for 100 lbs.
H. Hinges: Fully concealed, spring loaded, self-closing and fully adjustable, chrome steel finished.
Provide "snap-on" feature and allow for door movement through minimum of 165 degrees.
I.
PART 3
Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Galv. steel construction, ball bearing carriers fitted within tracks, multiple
pendant suspension attachments for door.
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure casework in-place rigid, plumb and level.
B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall-mounted components.
C. Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops.
06 41 00 - 3
MS0612
D. Carefully scribe casework against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32" inch max. Don't use
additional overlay material for this purpose.
E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorage.
F. Counter-sink anchorage devices at exposed locations used to wall mount components and conceal with
solid plugs to match surrounding finish material. Finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
G. Complete hardware installation.
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and
correctly.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
06 41 00 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 07 21 16:
PART 1
BLANKET INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall and ceiling construction.
B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and roof.
C. Batt or roll insulation (un-faced) for sound control at interior wall and ceiling spaces.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C665 – Standard Specification Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
B. ASTM E-84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM C991 – Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings
D. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier and vapor barrier at building enclosure
elements.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, tested “R” values,
and other pertinent data.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades. Take care to prevent damage to other work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
07 21 16 - 1
MS0612
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Batt and Roll Insulation:
1. Celotex, Certain Teed, Manville Building Products Group, Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Schuller.
B. Metal Building Roof & Wall Insulation:
1. Energy Miser by Insulation Corporation of America, Simple Saver by Thermal Design, Suspend-R by
Schuller.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Batt and Roll Insulation: Unfaced, preformed glass fiber bat/roll used for sound control, ASTM C665, Type
1.
B. Metal Building Wall Insulation: Combination roll/batt installation (ASTM C991, Type I) with highly reflective
white, heavy-duty reinforced, facing/vapor barrier. Facing/vapor barrier perm rating shall be not more than
0.025 grains per hour per square foot based on ASTM E96, procedure B. Special applications that require
that the facing not function as a vapor barrier shall be perforated with 3/16" minimum diameter holes
spaced no greater than 4" on center in each direction. UL flame spread classification of 25 or less and
smoke density of index of 50 or less based on ASTM E84. An insulation system specifically designed for
application between the wall girts of a pre-engineered metal building. System provides for full width and
thickness of insulation between girts without voids, gaps or sags. (Standard metal building roof
insulation does not qualify for this application)
C. Metal Building Roof Insulation: Combination roll/batt installation (ASTM C991, Type I) with highly reflective
white, heavy-duty reinforced, facing/vapor barrier. Facing/vapor barrier perm rating shall be not more than
0.025 grains per hour per square foot based on ASTM E96, procedure B. UL flame spread classification of
25 or less and smoke density of index of 50 or less based on ASTM E-84. An insulation system
specifically designed for application between or below the roof purlins of a pre-engineered metal building.
System provides for full width and thickness of insulation between or below purlins, without voids, gaps or
sags. (Standard metal building roof insulation does not qualify for this application)
D. Tape: Polyester self-adhering type or as required by insulation manufacturer, 2 inch wide.
2.04
THERMAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Overall thermal resistance (insulation only):
1. Interior Walls: R-13 (3.5”-4” wall thickness), Sound-Control @ Offices see Room Finish Schedule.
2. Exterior Stud Walls: R-19 (6” wall thickness), Admin/Office Facilities
3. Exterior Walls: R-19, Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings (PEMB).
4. Roof: R-30, Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings (PEMB).
5. Ceilings Under Vented Attic Spaces: R-38.
2.05
SOUND CONTROL
A. Sound control @ interior studwalls, see drawings Room Finish Schedule. Fiction-fit & un-faced fiberglass
batt or roll insulation, full thickness of studwall.
B. Sound control @ ceiling of rooms, see drawings Room Finish Schedule. Un-faced fiberglass batt or roll
insulation, 12” thick.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Exterior Walls: Install in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions without gaps or voids.
B. Interior Walls: Install in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions without gaps or voids.
C. Exterior Wall PEMB: Install horizontally between the girts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
without gaps or voids. Facing/vapor barrier shall be installed over the face of the girts before or after
07 21 16 - 2
MS0612
installation of insulation. (If installed after insulation, secure insulation to girts in a manner acceptable to
the Construction Inspector) Secure facing to girts with metal straps @ 4 feet o/c maximum spacing. Screw
straps to face of girts.
D. Roof PEMB: Install horizontally between the purlins in accordance with manufacturer's instructions without
gaps or voids. Facing/vapor barrier shall be installed over the face of the girts before installation of
insulation. Secure facing to girts with metal straps @ 4 feet o/c maximum spacing. Screw straps to face of
girts.
E. Vented Attic Spaces: Install batt or roll insulation between framing members prior to installation of gypsum
board ceiling. Vapor barrier to warm side of building.
F. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical
and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.
G
Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and sides flanges of
membrane over framing members.
H. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
END OF SECTION
07 21 16 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 07 84 00:
PART 1
FIRESTOPPING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through - penetration firestopping in fire rated construction.
B. Construction-gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire rated construction.
C. Construction-gap firestopping occurring within fire rated walls
D. Construction-gap firestopping occurring at the top of fire rated walls.
E. Through-penetration smoke-stopping in smoke partitions.
F. Construction-gap smoke-stopping in smoke partitions.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES
1. U.L. Fire Resistant Directory
a. Volume #1; Hourly ratings for beams, floors, roofs, walls & partitions.
b. Volume #2: Hourly ratings for joint systems & through penetration firestop systems.
c. Roofing Materials & Systems.
B. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS STANDARDS:
1. ASTM E814: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems
2. ASTM E84:Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
3. ASTM E119: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Buildings Construction and Materials
C. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of construction described or detailed
in referenced documents.
B. Barriers: Time rated firewalls, smoke barrier walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies and structural floors.
C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of
heat, fire, gasses and smoke.
D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or structural floor such that full
thickness of rated materials is not obtained.
E. Construction Gaps: Gaps between adjacent sections of walls, exterior walls, at wall tops between top of
wall and ceiling, and structural floors or roof decks; and gaps between adjacent sections of structural
floors.
F: System: Specific products and applications classified and numbered by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to
close specific barrier penetrations
G. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness of barrier and used to permanently
guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of penetrating system in other sections.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements
1. Fire-rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance
to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at
separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other
construction gaps.
07 84 00 - 1
MS0612
2. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all
penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction and at all separations required
to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.
1.05
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products and systems meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific
modifications, component connection anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures, plus the
following specific requirements.
1. Details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and applicable UL System number,
or UL classified devices.
2. Manufacturer or manufacturers representative shall provide qualified engineering judgements and
drawings relating to nonstandard applications as needed.
1.07
OUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum
five years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years
documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
MANUFACTURES
A. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
07 84 00 - 2
MS0612
B. IPC Corp.
C. Tremco
D. United States Gypsum Co.
E. 3M Inc.
F. Other manufacturers and products listed in the UL Fire Resistance
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Systems, devices and materials listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHBN, XHDG,
and XHEZ may be used, providing it conforms to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space
requirements and the fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical
for wall applications.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. Fill, void or cavity materials: As classified under category XHHW in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
B. Forming materials: As classified under category XHKU in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
C. Other materials as may be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory for a specific application. Submit
request to the Contracting Officer along with supporting data including applicable UL design. Proceed
upon approval of the Contracting Officer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine area and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify
conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that may affect bond of
firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that affect bond.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Apply/Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL Fire Resistance
Directory and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean up spills of liquid components.
B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.
C. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area and other work in undamaged, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
07 84 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 07 90 00
PART 1
JOINT PROTECTION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing.
1.02
REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
B. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
C. FS A-A-272B –Caulking Compounds.
D. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color
availability.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a
minimum of three years experience.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all related work referenced by other applicable sections and the
drawings.
1.08
WARRANTY:
A. Provide three-year warranty.
07 90 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and air
tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
SEALANTS:
A. Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Type II, Class A, color as selected.
B.
Butyl Sealant: FS A-A-272B, color as selected.
C. Polysulphide Sealant: ASTM C920, Type II, non-sag, class A, color as selected.
2.03
ACCESSORIES:
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible
with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056, round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod, oversized 30-50 percent larger
than joint width.
D. Bond Braker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION:
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and filed measurements are as shown on the Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.02
PREPARATION:
A. Clean joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for latex base sealants.
E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.03
INSTALLATION:
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.
07 90 00 - 2
MS0612
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Tool joints concave.
3.04
CLEANING AND REPAIRING:
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.05
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK:
A. Protect finished installation.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
3.06
SCHEDULE:
LOCATION
A. Exterior Door/Window
Frames/Walls
TYPE
COLOR*
Polysulphide
To be selected.
B. Interior Door/Window
Frames/Walls
Acrylic,
Solvent Cure
To be selected.
C. Under Thresholds
Butyl
To be selected.
D. Exterior Insulation
Finish System
As recommended
by EIFS manufacturer
To be selected.
*By Contracting Officer
END OF SECTION
07 90 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 08 13 14:
PART 1
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-rated, thermally insulated, steel doors and frames.
B. Rated, thermally insulated steel doors and frames.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/SDI- A205.8 – SDI – 100 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) the Hot-Dip Process.
C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames,
Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
D. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and locations for
glazing, louvers, and finish.
C. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cutouts for hardware reinforcement.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-A250.8 and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum
3 years documented experience.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
1.08
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doorframe and door hardware installation.
08 13 14 - 1
MS0612
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE DOOR MANUFACTURERS
A. Amweld, Ceco, Curries, Fenestra, Steelcraft.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Exterior Doors: SDI-100 Grade III, Model 1, 16 gage, galvanized. Exterior doors at conditioned spaces
shall be filled with polyurethane insulation.
B. Exterior Door Frames: SDI-100, Grade III, 16 gage, galvanized with welded corners.
C. Interior Doors: SDI-100 Grade I, Model 1, 20 gage.
D. Interior Door Frames: SDI-100, Grade I, 18 gage, knockdown frames.
E. Door Accessories: Door jamb anchors, floor anchors, door silencers, etc., as required to fully complete
the work.
F. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper
proof screws.
G. Sealant: Sealant and backer rod as specified.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel T shaped, specifically for double doors.
B. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
C. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel flush end closure. Seal joints
watertight.
2.05
FINISH
A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653 G60.
B. Primer: Baked.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and DHI.
B. Coordinate installation of fixed glass and louvers.
C. Upon completion of concrete masonry units, seal perimeter of frame where it abuts CMU with sealant.
Use backer rod if required.
3.03
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
08 13 14 - 2
MS0612
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
08 13 14 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 08 14 16:
PART 1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Wood doors and panels, fire rated and non-rated.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/WDMA I.S.1A – Architectural Wood Flush Doors
B. ASTM E90 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements.
C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.
D. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
E. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.03
ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
A. Acoustic Rating for Door and Frame Assembly: ASTM E90, minimum STC 31. See Door
Schedule on drawings for doors that are acoustical rated.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of AWI Quality Standard Section 1300 and 1400 Custom Grade.
B. Fire Door and Panel Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.
C. Installed Doors and Panels: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated on drawings.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for fire rated doors and panels.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
d. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify each composite wood product contains no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
d. Certified wood products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate door elevations, internal blocking for hardware attachment, and cutouts for glazing and/or louvers.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
D. Submit one sample 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating door construction.
08 14 16 - 1
MS0612
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
F. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that doors meet or exceed
specified acoustic and/or fire rated requirements.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Break seal on site to permit
ventilation.
C. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI or ANSI/WDMA requirements.
1.09
WARRANTY
A. Provide life of installation warranty.
B. Warranty: Warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Government may have
under the Contract Documents.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
3. Certified Wood Materials: Furnish wood materials certified in accordance with FSC Guidelines.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Composite Wood Products: Contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc., Weyerhauser Company.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
DOOR AND PANEL TYPES
A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction, wood veneer faces, acoustical and/or fire
rated as indicated.
B. Panels: To match door construction; face veneer to end match, acoustical and/or fire rated as indicated
on the drawings.
2.04
DOOR AND PANEL CONSTRUCTION (AWI QUALITY STANDARD)
A. Solid, Non-Rated Core: AWI Section 1300, PC-Particleboard.
B. Solid, Fire Rated Core: AWI Section 1300, Type FD 1-1/2. See Door Schedule on drawings for fire-rated
doors/frames.
C. Solid, Special Function Core: AWI Section 1300, Type SR - Sound Retardant (Acoustical). See Door
Schedule on drawings for acoustical-rated doors/frames.
2.05
DOOR AND PANEL CONSTRUCTION (ANSI/WDMA - I.S.1A STANDARD)
A. Solid, Non-Rated Core: ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A; solid particleboard mat formed wood flake or mat-formed
wood chip core.
B. Solid, Special Function Core: ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A; labeled fire performance as indicated on the drawings
and/or sound resistant (acoustical) type.
08 14 16 - 2
MS0612
2.06
FLUSH DOOR AND PANEL FACING
A. Facing Quality: AWI custom grade.
B. Flush Interior Door Veneer: Birch species wood, rotary sliced with random matched grain, for transparent
finish.
2.07
ADHESIVES
A. Interior Doors: AWI or ANSI/ WDMA, Type II.
2.08
ACCESSORIES
A. Glass Stops: Wood type for non-fire rated doors; rolled metal type designed to conform to UL
requirements for fire rated doors.
2.09
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards or ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A
requirements.
B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards or ANSI/ WDMA I.S.1A and to UL
requirements. Attach fire-rating label to door edge.
C. Provide flush doors with 1/2-inch thick edge strips of wood species to match face veneer.
D. Pre-machine doors for finish hardware.
E. Provide "Z" or "T" shaped metal astragal in one piece to UL requirements for double fire doors to rating
required.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Machine cut relief for hinges and closers and coring for handsets and cylinders.
C. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Trim fire door width from lock edge only, to a
maximum of 3/16 inch.
D. Trim door height by cutting equally on top and bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door
height at bottom edge only, to a maximum of one inch.
E. Drill pilot hole for screw and boltholes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges.
F. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware in accordance with AWI or ANSI/ WDMA requirements.
G. Conform to AWI or ANSI/ WDMA requirements for fit tolerances.
H. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
I.
Install door louvers.
3.02
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
08 14 16 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 08 71 00
PART 1
DOOR HARDWARE
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Hardware for doors.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
C. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
D. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
E. SDI - Steel Door Institute.
1.03
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal
reinforcement for door hardware.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years
experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 3 years
documented experience, approved by manufacturer.
C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work
of this Section.
1.05
CERTIFICATIONS
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that hardware and
installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as
specified herein.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, manufacturer's parts list, templates, and product data under provisions
of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware.
08 71 00-1
MS0612
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Samples: May be incorporated into the work or
returned to supplier.
1.08
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATE
A. Submit operation and maintenance data. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements,
and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
B. Lock manufacturer shall deliver keys directly to the Contracting Officer, properly tagged as to location and
arranged in sets.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS
A. Locksets/Latchsets:
1. Best, Schlage and Arrow.
2. Provide correct lockset or latchset as required to suite individual door use or as indicated on the door
and hardware schedule.
3. Provide locksets at all offices, mechanical rooms, storage rooms, equipment closets and similar
rooms as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
4. Provide latchsets at interior doors not receiving locksets and as indicated on the door and hardware
schedule.
5. Provide latchset at all fire-rated doors as indicated on the door or hardware schedule.
6. Grade 1, Series 4000, heavy-duty cylindrical lockset or latchset with removable core. (See J. below)
7. Locksets at aluminum entrances (storefront) must be supplied by the door manufacturer and as
indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
B. Deadbolts:
1. Best, Schlage and Arrow.
2. Provide deadbolts at exterior doors not scheduled to receive panic device and as indicated on the
door and hardware schedule.
3. Tubular lock with removable core, 1’ throw with concealed hardened steel roller with inside turning
knob.
4. Deadbolts at aluminum entrance supplied by door manufacturer.
C. Weather-stripping & Threshold:
1. National Guard, Pemko, Zero.
2. Provide thresholds at all exterior doors and other opening as indicated on the door and hardware
schedule.
3. Thresholds shall be ADA accessible, dark bronze anodized aluminum.
4. Thresholds at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
5. Provide weather-stripping at all exterior doors and as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
6. Provide acoustical and/or lightproof weather-stripping as indicated on the door and hardware
schedule.
7. Weather-stripping at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
D. Hinges:
1. Bommer, Hager, Stanley.
2. Provide minimum 3 hinges per door opening unless otherwise called for on the door and hardware
schedule. Size of hinges must be sized to accommodate door thickness, weight, width, type, backset,
08 71 00-2
MS0612
clearance, and frequency based on building occupancy and use, and as indicated on the door and
hardware schedule.
3. Full mortise steel at interior doors.
4. Full mortise stainless steel at exterior doors with non-removable pins.
5. Hinges at aluminum entrances supplied by the door manufacturer.
E. Closers:
1. Corbin, Dorma, and LCN.
2. Provide closers at all exterior doors, toilet room doors, and fire-rated doors. Provide closers at other
openings as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
3. ADA accessible at principal entry door openings and interior door openings equipped with closers.
Metal covers.
4. Closers at aluminum entrances supplied by the door manufacturer.
F. Surface Bolts:
1. Glynn-Johnson, Hager, Ives, Stanley.
2. Provide bolts at all inactive leaf of pairs of doors other than entry doors. Provide bolts at other
openings as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
3. 8” in length, mount at top and bottom of inactive door leaf. Provide bottom strike or modify threshold to
accept bolt.
4. Bolts at aluminum entrances supplied by the door manufacturer.
G. Push-Pad Panic Devices:
1. Adams-Rite, Dor-O-matic, Von Duprin and Yale.
2. Provide ADA accessible panic devices at principal exterior personnel ingress/egress openings.
Provide panic devices at other door openings as indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
3. Panic devices at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
H. Pushbutton Access Control:
1. Provide access control at doors indicated on the door and hardware schedule.
2. Simplex Model 1000 series or equal at doors other than those listed above.
3. Simplex Model L1000 series or equal for ADA accessible door openings.
4. Simplex Model LP1000 series or equal at exterior doors for ADA accessible doors. Must be used with
a rim mounted exit device.
5. Exit device at aluminum entrances, equipped with access control device, supplied by door
manufacturer.
I.
Wall and Floor Mounted Stops and Holders:
1. Baldwin hardware, H.B. Ives, Triangle Brass manufacturing.
2. Provide floor and/or door knob/wall mounted type at exterior doors and other doors as indicated on the
door and hardware schedule.
3. Provide door knob/wall type at interior doors or as indicated on the door schedule.
4. Stops and holders at aluminum entrances supplied by door manufacturer.
J.
Removable Cores: Removeable cores shall be compatible and interchangeable with Best 6-pin cores.
The contractor shall provide temporary construction cores, which will be returned to the contractor, upon
completion and acceptance of the project by the government. The government will provide the permanent
cores and keying to the government system.
K. Finishes:
1. Locksets, latchsets, deadbolts, surface bolts, etc, US26D at interior doors, US32D at exterior doors.
2. Thresholds, dark bronze anodized aluminum.
3. Closers, dark bronze finish.
4. Miscellaneous items, depending on availability of specified item, match as close a possible other
finishes used on the door and other hardware.
5. Finish of hardware used on aluminum entrances and storefronts shall be dark bronze.
L. Fasteners:
1. Fasteners, anchors, and similar devices shall be provided by the manufacturer or as recommended by
the manufacturer. Finish to match finish of item being installed.
M. Fire-Rated Doors:
08 71 00-3
MS0612
1. Provide hardware of types and quality listed above and complying with NFPA 80.
2.03
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. See drawings for Hardware Schedule.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI, NAAMM, BHMA,
and DHI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Coordinate installation of hardware with other trades.
D. Align hardware to be plumb and level, free of warp and twist, flush with adjacent surfaces, etc. Maintain
dimensional tolerances as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Adjust operable hardware for smooth operation free from binding, rubbing or scraping.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from hardware surfaces. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of
mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Remove dirt from crevices, etc. Wipe
surfaces clean and dry.
END OF SECTION
08 71 00-4
MS0612
SECTION 09 21 16:
PART 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Gypsum board.
B. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C1396 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ASTM C475 – Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
C. ASTM A1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High
Strength, Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra High Strength.
D. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw
Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
F. ASTM C1002 – Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
G. GA-214 – Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
H. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
I.
Gypsum Construction Handbook, published by United States Gypsum Board Co.
J.
South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with 3 years documented experience,
and approved by manufacturer.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, including but not limited to, manufacturer's installation instructions, metal
accessories, gypsum board, joint tape, screws, texturing material, drywall compound, etc., under
provisions of Section 01 33 00.
09 21 16 - 1
MS0612
B. Submit one sample of gypsum board panels, 2'x2', illustrating textured finish.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Domtar, Georgia-Pacific, Gold Bond, Temple-Inland, U.S. Gypsum Co.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum
permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
B. Moisture Resistant and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 5/8-inch thick, maximum permissible
length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
C. Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C1396; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper
faces.
D. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping, corrosive-resistant screws as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads, Edge Trim, Control Joints, Casing Beads, and Accessories: Metal.
B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 214, GA 216, Gypsum Construction Handbook, and in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Butt all joints loosely with maximum joint of 1/8”.
Maximum joint at outlet box, switch box and other similar devices, 3/8”.
B. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring
over firm bearing.
09 21 16 - 2
MS0612
C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.
Applies regardless of fire rating of wall.
D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
F. Double Layer Applications: Use fire rated gypsum-backing board for first layer of fire rated partitions.
Tape and mud joints. Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of
first layer.
G. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum
board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.03
CONTROL JOINTS
A. Provide control joints at each side of door and window openings from the header to the top of the wall.
Attach control joint to double studs spaced 0.5” apart.
B. Provide control joints:
1. Where partitions or ceilings of dissimilar construction meet and remain in the same plane.
2. Wings of “L”, “U”, & “T” shaped ceiling areas are joined.
3. Where control or expansion joints occur in the base wall construction and/or structure.
C. Maximum control joint spacing:
1. Partitions, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
2. Interior Ceilings with perimeter relief, 50 feet maximum in either direction.
3. Interior Ceilings without perimeter relief, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
4. Exterior Ceilings, 30 feet maximum in either direction.
3.04
JOINT MATERIALS/FINISH
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive final
finish coat. All walls will be textured with a minimum ‘orange peel’ texture unless otherwise noted.
Provide 12” x 12” sample of texture coat on 5/8” gypsum board for review, approval and record. The
approved sample will serve as the standard of quality the contractor must achieve with the actual final
finish. Minimum finish will be Level 3 for textured walls and Level 5 for untextured walls.
B. Walls with indentations, visible joint lines, ripples, surface defects, etc. will not be accepted.
C. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
09 21 16 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 09 22 16
PART 1
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed metal stud framing at exterior and interior locations.
B. Framing accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. ASTM A879 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for
Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface.
C. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
D. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type.
E. GA 216 – Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
F. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal stud framing system for exterior load bearing and non-load bearing walls and infill of existing
exterior walls
B. Metal stud framing system for interior load bearing and non-load bearing walls.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of prefabricated and panelized work for all exterior and interior load bearing and
non-load bearing walls, including but not limited to, component details, stud layout, framed openings,
headers and jambs, anchorage to structure and track, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or
items required of other related work.
B. Describe method of field construction of all exterior and interior load bearing and non-load bearing walls
including but not limited to, component details, stud layout, framed openings, headers and jambs,
anchorage to structure and track, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of
other related work.
C. Product data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts,
limitations, manufacturer's installation instructions, etc. under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
09 22 16 - 1
MS0612
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with GA 216.
B. Install all anchoring devise in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work required under this section with other work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, METAL STUDS, TRACKS AND JOISTS
A. Dale/Incor, Dietrich, Marino, Unimast.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, ANCHORAGE DEVICES
A. Conventional steel anchor bolts with washers/nuts, embedded in the concrete.
B. Mushroom head spike by Powers Fastening, Inc.
C. Dome head powder driven pins by Hilti Anchoring & Powder Actuate Systems.
D. Type, size and spacing of anchoring devices are shown on the drawings.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
STUD FRAMING MATERIALS (See Drawings for location. Gage and weight are minimum acceptable)
A. Exterior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 8" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized studs, 16" o. c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= 2.313#, Area= .6623 in2; I= 5.6294 in4; S= .1.3470 in3; R = 2.9154 in.
B. Exterior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 6" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized studs, 16" o. c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= 1.919#, Area= .5487 in2; I= 2.8033 in4; S= .08872 in3; R = 2.2602 in.
C. Interior Stud walls (Load Bearing), 3-5/8" x 16 gage, CEE 1-5/8" flange, galvanized, studs, 16" o.c.
Physical Properties; Wt/ft.= 1.452#, Area= .4138 in2, I= .8549 in4, S= .4388 in3, R= 1.4373 in.
D. Interior Stud walls (Fire-rated), 3-5/8" x 20 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 16" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .611#, Area= .180 in2, I= .342 in4, S= .171 in3, R= 1.595 in.
E. Interior Stud walls (Drywall), 3-5/8" x 22 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 24" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .415#, Area= .122 in2, I= .216 in4, S= .105 in3, R= 1.601 in.
F. Interior Stud walls (Drywall), 1-5/8" x 22 gage, DWS 1-1/4" flange, galvanized, studs, 24" o.c. Physical
Properties; Wt/ft.= .293#, Area= .086 in2, I= .034 in4, S= .035 in3, R= .746 in.
1. Physical Properties about major axis.
in = inches
in2 = inches squared
09 22 16 - 2
MS0612
in3 = inches cubed
in4 = inches foured
G. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs.
H. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose.
I.
Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws as recommended by manufacturer.
J.
Metal Backing: 20 gage galvanized steel for reinforcement.
K. Anchorage Devices:
1. Powder actuated pins at interior walls.
2. Anchor bolts, mushroom head spikes or dome head powder actuated pins at exterior walls. See 2.03.
above.
L. Primer: FS TT-P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02
ERECTION
A. Align and secure bottom runners (tracks) with approved anchoring devices.
B. Install studs vertically at spacing indicated above. Connect studs to runners using fastener method
recommended by stud manufacturer.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs.
D. Install top runner and brace to pre-engineered metal building system and cross-brace to adjacent stud wall
for rigid installation.
E. Splicing of studs is not permissible.
F. Construct corners using minimum three studs.
G. Double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs, and not more than 2 inches each side of
openings.
H. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame openings, supports and
attachments.
I.
Align stud web openings.
J.
Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed in
or behind stud framing.
K. Blocking: Secure steel channels to studs.
L. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural
building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs.
M. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch.
09 22 16 - 3
MS0612
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
09 22 16 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 09 30 00
PART 1
TILING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ceramic tile floor and base.
B. Wall tiles and trim.
C. General: Ceramic floor and wall tile includes but is not limited to, porcelain pavers, quarry products, glazed
floor tile, glazed wall tile, natural stone products, ceramic mosaics (glazed and unglazed), glass tile,
special purpose tile, and accessory items.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. TCNA (Tile Council of North America) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation latest
edition.
B. Scientific Certification Systems:
1. SCS EC10.2 - Environmental Certification Program Indoor Air Quality Performance.
C. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, placement of vertical & horizontal expansion joints, color
arrangement, perimeter conditions junctions with dissimilar materials, thresholds, and setting details.
B. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives
and grouts.
C. Submit manufacturer's recommended installation instructions along with applicable TCNA installation
specification.
D. Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials.
E. Provide samples for color selection.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Conform to current edition of TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation.
09 30 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Floors sloped for drainage must be installed on a full mortar bed with no exceptions.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
2. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. Interior Hard Surface Flooring: FloorScore Certified for VOC content in accordance with SCS EC10.2.
4. Interior Tile Setting Adhesives and Grout: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance
with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2.02
Tile
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of tile, surface texture, tile size, thickness, installation method for setting tile, type of grout, color
and pattern, etc.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
GROUT MATERIALS
A. Color: To be selected by the Contracting Officer from manufacturer's samples if not indicated on the
Room Finish and Color Schedule.
2.04
INSTALLATION METHOD AND GROUT MIX
A. Mix and proportion pre-mix setting bed/adhesives and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces.
09 30 00 - 2
MS0612
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
D. Apply sealer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
3.03
VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Provide vertical and horizontal expansion joints as indicated on the drawings. If not shown on the
drawings, provide expansion joints in accordance with the Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile
Installation and paragraph 1.04.A above. Failure to provide expansion joints will not relieve contractor of
he responsibility to repair and/or replace damaged tile due to buckling or related problems.
3.04
INSTALLATION METHOD
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable specification of the current edition TCNA Handbook for
Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation. See 1.04.C above.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated on shop drawings. Provide vertical and horizontal expansion joints as
indicated on the drawings and/or approved shop drawings. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and
wall joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints
watertight without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E. Sound tiles after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
F. Keep control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
G. Allow tiles to set for minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
H. Grout tile joints.
3.05
INSTALLATION - FULL MORTAR BED METHOD
A. Install mortar bed, tile, and grout in accordance with current edition TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass,
and Stone Tile Installation. See 1.04.C above.
B. Install shower pan or membrane.
C. Apply mortar bed. Slope to floor drains. Wood float surfaces to receive ceramic tile.
D. Lay tile to pattern indicated on shop drawings. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
E. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and
wall joints.
F. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints
watertight without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
G. Sound tiles after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H. Keep control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I.
Allow tiles to set for minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
J.
Grout tile joints.
09 30 00 - 3
MS0612
K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.06
CLEANING
A. Clean tile surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and applicable section of
TCNA.
END OF SECTION
09 30 00 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 09 51 13
PART 1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Suspended metal grid-ceiling system and perimeter trim.
B. Acoustical panels.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636 – Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D. Green Seal:
1. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and/or ceiling panels
with 5 years minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with 3 years minimum documented experience, and approved by the manufacturer.
1.04
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit and indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or
ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system, and product data
including manufacturer's installation instructions, under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00. One 6” x 6” sample of ceiling tile and one 12”-24”
sample of ceiling grid, hanger wire, wall trim.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during,
and after installation.
1.07
SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust-generating
activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
09 51 13 - 1
MS0612
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.08
EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 2 cartons of extra panels upon completion and Government acceptance of work.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS11.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Chicago Metallic Corporation, National Rolling Mill, Inc., Donn.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING PANELS
A. Armstrong, Celotex, United States Gypsum.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
SUSPENSION SYSTEM – CEILING PANEL COMPONENTS
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of suspension system, color, ceiling panel size, thickness, surface texture, acoustical properties,
etc.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's installation instructions, including #8
galvanized steel hanger wire to rigidly secure the suspension system to the structure above, including
integral mechanical and electrical components with a maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360.
B. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
C. Supply and install hangers, clips, etc. for attachment to the building structural system.
D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
09 51 13 - 2
MS0612
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Locate suspension system in room according to reflected ceiling plan.
G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed
deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each
corner or support components independently.
H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
I.
Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter
corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
J.
Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
K. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly
against abutting surfaces.
L. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
M. Lay sound control insulation, 24" x 48" x 6" batts, on top of ceiling panels maintaining tight fit to adjacent
insulation batts. See drawings, Room Finish Schedule for location of sound control insulation.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum.
END OF SECTION
09 51 13 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 09 65 00
PART 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient base.
B. Vinyl composition tile.
C. Rubber tile.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
C. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
D. Scientific Certification Systems:
1. SCS EC10.2 - Environmental Certification Program Indoor Air Quality Performance.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
2. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit manufacturer's standard samples, including pre-molded exterior corners, illustrating range of
colors, for Contracting Officer selection.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer 3 days prior to, during, and 24 hours
after installation of materials.
1.06
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 20 linear feet of base.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products in accordance with Section 01 60 00.
09 65 00 - 1
MS0612
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Hard Surface Flooring: FloorScore Certified for VOC content in accordance with SCS EC10.2.
3. Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RUBBER BASE
A. Burke, Flexco, Mercer, R.C. Musson, Roppe.
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S - RUBBER TILE
A. Azrock, Burke, Flexco, Mercer, R.C. Musson, Roppe.
2.04
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S - VINYL BASE
A. Azrock, Flexco, Johnsonite, Mercer, Roppe.
2.05
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Azrock, Armstrong, Kentile.
2.06
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.07
BASE-FLOORING MATERIALS
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of base and tile, color, size, thickness, surface texture, etc.
2.08
ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by the respective base/vinyl manufacturer.
B. Sub-Floor Filler: As recommended by the floor tile manufacturer.
C. Base Accessories: Pre-molded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as base.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to
receive work. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity,
carbonization, or dusting.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor
filler.
B. Apply, trowel and float filler to smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
09 65 00 - 2
MS0612
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
E. Apply primer to surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
3.03
INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use pre-molded units. At exposed ends use pre-molded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.04
INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
E. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned. Alternate pattern grain to produce basket weave
pattern on vinyl composition tile. Joints shall be parallel to building lines, with minimum 1/2 tile width at
room perimeter.
3.05
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Prohibit traffic in the area for 48 hours after installation. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and
wall surfaces without damage. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
09 65 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 09 68 00
PART 1
CARPETING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpeting glue down method
B. Base finish
C. Carpet
D. Accessories
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM E648 – Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. Carpet and Rug Institute:
1. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program.
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, and direction of carpet.
C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes,
patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include maintenance procedures, recommend maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning and shampooing.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet with three years minimum experience.
09 68 00 - 1
MS0612
B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience or approved by manufacturer.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to code for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Conform to ASTM E648.
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature three days’ prior to, during, and 24
hours after installation of materials.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Carpet: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with CRI Green Label
Plus Testing Program.
2.02
CARPET
A. See Room Finish and Color Schedule. Provide products that are equal to and match as close as possible
the salient characteristics of the products specified. Match as close as possible, includes but is not limited
to, type of carpet, backing, pile height, color and pattern, surface texture, total weight, fiber weight, fiber,
etc.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex or type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Primes and Adhesives: Waterproof of types recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1. Releasable carpet adhesive for carpet tiles.
C. Edge Strips: Rubber type, color to be selected.
D. Base Gripper: A one-piece gripper edging strip, wood or metal type, finish and color to be selected.
E. Base: Rubber or vinyl type, 4 inches by 1/8 inch, colors to be selected.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft and are
ready to receive work.
B. Verify concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C. Beginning of the installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
09 68 00 - 2
MS0612
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor
filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum floor surface.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Lay out rolls of carpet.
C. Verify carpet match before cutting. All carpet shall be from the same dye lot.
D. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
E. Locate seams in area of least traffic.
F. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
G. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic.
H. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another
room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
I.
Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
J.
Fit carpets tight to intersections with vertical surfaces without gaps.
K. Use Releasable Adhesive for Carpet Tile.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
3.05
PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
09 68 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 09 90 00
PART 1
PAINTING AND COATING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation
B. Surface finish schedule
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
B. ASTM D1653 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films
C. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
D. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
2. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with three years
experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years experience
approved by product manufacturer.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.
1.06
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each flooring system.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Paint and primers used shall be the highest
quality, top-of-the-line, professional coatings manufactured by each respective paint manufacturer.
B. Provide product data on all finishing products.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
09 90 00 - 1
MS0612
D. Submit one sample 12” x 12” in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface
finishing product scheduled, for selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's preparation and application recommendations for each type of material to be
painted under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage,
surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of
90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above
45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 Degrees C) for interiors, 50
Degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS11.
2. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
3. Interior Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings, Stains, Primers, and Shellacs: Maximum volatile
organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113.
4. Interior Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (PRIMER AND PAINT)
A. Devoe, Glidden, Benjamin Moore, Pittsburgh, Sherwin-Williams.
1. Paint and primers used shall be the highest quality, top-of-the-line, professional coatings
manufactured by each respective paint manufacturer.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
CLEANER, PRE-SEALERS & WATER REPELLANT SEALER FOR ARCHITECTURAL EXPOSED
CONCRETE & INTEGRALLY COLORED DECORATIVE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
09 90 00 - 2
MS0612
A. CMU Pre-Sealer: Pre-sealer used on all concrete and CMU surfaces to fill capillaries and large pores prior
to the application of the water repellant sealer. Pre-sealer must be manufactured by and compatible with
the water repellant sealer. Submit test data to substantiate conformance to ASTM D1653, and E96.
B. Water Repellant Sealer: Water based, VOC compliant, deep penetrating clear silane and/or siloxane
blend to protect horizontal and vertical surfaces. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 5 years
experience in the manufacturer of masonry sealer.
C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent material.
2.04
MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically
indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.05
FINISHES
A. Refer to Room Finish and Color Schedule on drawings for colors.
B. All surfaces exposed to view shall be painted in accordance with the schedule at the end of this Section.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat and ready to receive paint. Correct minor defects and
clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach.
Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of
etching primer.
F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar,
scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow masonry to dry as per paint
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Architectural Exposed Concrete Scheduled to Receive Pre-Sealer and Water Repellant Sealer: Remove
dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of
corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale
are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after
repairs.
I.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. (Prime metal
items including shop primed items.)
J.
Mill Finish Aluminum: Clean as per paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
09 90 00 - 3
MS0612
K. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal all surfaces, including top and bottom edges with primer.
L. Existing painted walls to receive new paint shall be repaired to “like new” condition prior to start of
painting. “Like new” means to remove all nails or other devices used for attaching objects to the wall, fill
holes, sand and make ready to receive prime and finish coats.
M. Beginning of painting means acceptance of surface and site conditions.
3.02
PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other
surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain before set. Wipe
excess from surface.
H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
I.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish with gloss varnish reduced
25 percent with mineral spirits.
3.04
FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical sections for schedule of color-coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are prefinished.
D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.
E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind
louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
F. Paint exposed conduits and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with color schedule. Color
band and identify with flow arrows and names.
09 90 00 - 4
MS0612
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.05
CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,
surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material, which may constitute a fire hazard and place in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site.
3.06
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
(Includes, but is not limited to, the following and all conduits, disconnect switches, louvers, condensing
units, roof vents, exhaust fans, masonry, etc. visible when viewing the exterior of the building.)
A. Steel
1.
Organic Zinc Rich Urethane Primer (Primer)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Zinc Content:
Test Criteria:
Organic Zinc Rich Urethane Primer
63%
83% by weight.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
50,000 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM G 85
Prohesion
15,000 Hours
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM G8
Cathodic Disbondment
Immersion Service
(Potable Water)
4,000 hours
Average of Three
Tests
30 Days Exposure
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report PSI Adhesion
7 years – No Failure
Epoxy Intermediate Coat
1.
2.
3.
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Test Criteria:
Polyamide Epoxy
56%.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
10,900 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM G 85
Prohesion
15,000 Hours
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
4,000 hours
ASTM D 4060
Abrasion
CS-17 Wheel
1,000 Gram Load
1,000 Cycles
Average of Three
Tests
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
09 90 00 - 5
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report mg Loss / Average of three
tests
Report PSI
MS0612
ASTM G8
Cathodic Disbondment
Immersion Service
(Potable Water)
3.
8.04
1.
2.
3.
30 Days Exposure
7 years – No Failure
Exterior Finish Coat
Generic Type:
Solids By Volume:
Test Criteria:
Fluoropolymer Polyurethane
60%.
Test Criteria
ASTM B 117
Salt Spray (Fog)
Test Duration
10,000 hours
(Scribed Panel)
ASTM D 4585
Humidity
3,000 hours
ASTM D 4060
Abrasion
CS-17 Wheel
1,000 Gram Load
1,000 Cycles
Average of Three
Tests
16,000 hours
ASTM 4541
Adhesion
ASTM D 4587
QUV Exposure
Cycle 4: 8 hours UV –
4 hours condensation
ASTM D 4587
QUV Exposure
Cycle 4: 8 hours UV –
4 hours condensation
ASTM D 4141
(EMMAQUA)
Exterior Exposure
ASTM D 4141
(EMMAQUA)
Exterior Exposure
ASTM D 522
Flexibility
ASTM 2794
Impact
ASTM D 503`1
Weatherometer
AAMA 2604-98
Proposed Product Test Results
Rust @ Scribe:
Plane Rust:
Blisters:
Rusting:
Blistering:
Report mg Loss / Average of
three tests
Report PSI
Gloss Retention:
25,000 hours
Gloss Retention:
Color Change: DED FMCII
1,260MJ/m2
Exposure
Gloss Retention:
Color Change:
3,500MJ/m2
Exposure
Gloss Retention:
Color Change:
Method A
Conical Mandrel
Cracking:
% Elongation:
Average of Three
Trials
5,500 hours
Direct Impact:
5 Years Exposure
% Gloss Retention:
Color Change: DED
Report:
Color Retention:
Gloss Retention:
Chalking:
Erosion:
B. Steel - Galvanized
1. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss.
C. Aluminum Mill Finish
1. Prime coat as per paint manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss.
D. Architectural Exposed Concrete
09 90 00 - 6
MS0612
1. Upon completion of the cleaning, allow the concrete to dry as recommended by the manufacturer of
the sealer system. Verify that the surface is cleaned and ready to receive the pre-sealer. The area to
receive the sealer must be cleaned, etc. to the satisfaction of the installer and sealer system
manufacturer and allowed to dry. If not acceptable to the sealer manufacturer's representative, the
area must be re-cleaned, etc. Paint system manufacturer shall certify that the surface is acceptable to
receive the sealer prior to the application of the finish coats. Correction of any surface irregularities or
imperfections will then be the responsibility of the contractor applying the pre-sealer and finish coats.
Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Upon completion of and curing of the pre-sealer, install sufficient number of coats of the sealer as per
the manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the written
instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Units
1. Upon completion of the cleaning, allow the masonry to dry as recommended by the manufacturer of
the paint system. Verify that the surface is cleaned and ready to receive the primer-sealer. The area to
receive the primer-sealer must be cleaned, etc. to the satisfaction of the installer and paint system
manufacturer and allowed to dry. If not acceptable to the paint manufacturer's representative, the area
must be re-cleaned, etc. Paint system manufacturer shall certify that the surface is acceptable to
receive the primer-sealer prior to the application of the finish coats. Correction of any surface
irregularities or imperfections will be the responsibility of the contractor applying the primer sealer and
the finish coats. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Upon completion of and curing of the primer-sealer, paint a minimum two coats Acrylic Latex (flat) and
additional coats as directed by the manufacturer’s written instructions. Installation shall be in strict
accordance with the written instructions.
F.
Existing Painted CMU or EIFS Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface and prime as per paint manufacturer recommendations.
2. Paint two coats Acrylic Latex, or as recommended by manufacturer, flat, on CMU surfaces.
3. Paint two coats 100% Acrylic, or as recommended by manufacturer, flat, on
EIFS surfaces.
G. Factory Finished Items:
1. Prepare surface as per paint manufacturer recommendations and paint two coats Acrylic Latex, semigloss or flat.
H. Miscellaneous Surfaces:
1. One coat primer as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Acrylic Latex, semi-gloss or flat.
3.07
SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A. Steel - Unprimed
1. One coat Latex primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
B. Steel - Shop Primed
1. Touch-up with original primer or as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
C. Steel - Galvanized
1. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
D. Aluminum Mill Finish
1. One coat as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin.
E. Plaster, Gypsum Board
1. One coat Latex wall primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, eggshell.
F. Plywood, Wood (Painted)
1. One coat Latex Primer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
09 90 00 - 7
MS0612
G. Plywood, Wood (Clear or Stained)
1. One coat alkyd based, non-masking, penetrating stain.
2. Two coats clear acrylic polyurethane, low luster.
H. Miscellaneous Surfaces
1. One coat primer as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2. Two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
I.
Factory Finished Items
1. Prepare surface and paint two coats Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
J.
Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Prepare surface as per paint manufacturer recommendations.
2. Prime as required and paint two coats Acrylic Latex, flat or Latex Enamel, satin or eggshell.
3.08
SCHEDULE
A. As per Room Finish and Color Schedule.
END OF SECTION
09 90 00 - 8
MS0612
SECTION 10 14 00
PART 1
SIGNAGE
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
ANSI Z97.1
Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
1.02
GENERAL
A. Interior signage shall be of the sizes and types shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements
specified herein, and shall be provided at the locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering,
and related components for a complete installation. Signs shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate signs that have
been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalogs cuts, installation and cleaning instructions.
2. Samples: One sample of each of the following sign types showing typical quality and workmanship.
The samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.
a. Door sign.
b. Wall sign
B. Two samples of manufacturer's standard color chips for each material requiring color verification.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean, dry
area.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
COLORS
A. Colors shall be as scheduled.
2.03
ACRYLIC SHEET
A. Acrylic sheet for panels and components shall conform to ANSI Z97.1.
10 14 00 - 1
MS0612
2.04
PLAQUE SIGNS
A. Plaque signs shall be a modular type signage system. Signs shall be fabricated of acrylic plastic
conforming to ANSI Z97.1.
1. Standard Modular Plaque Signs: Plaque signs shall consist of matte finish acrylic plastic, thickness
and size as shown. Corners of signs shall be squared.
2. Type of Mounting For Plaque Signs: Surface mounted signs shall be provided with 1/16 inch thick
vinyl foam tape.
2.05
GRAPHICS
A. Graphics Application: Signage graphics shall conform to the following:
1. Message shall be applied to panel using the silkscreen process. Silk-screened images shall be
executed with photo screens prepared from original art. No hand cut screens will be accepted.
Original art shall be defined as artwork that is a first generation reproduction of the specified art.
Edges and corners shall be clean.
2. Fabricate signs to accept changeable inserts for room number and room name to accommodate
future changes.
B. Messages: See drawings and schedule for message content, Typeface: Helvetica regular as indicated.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Signs shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the
drawings. Signs shall be installed plumb and true at mounting heights indicated, and by method shown or
specified. Signs on doors or other surfaces shall not be installed until finishes on such surfaces have
been installed.
1. Anchorage: Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions.
2. Protection and Cleaning: The work shall be protected against damage during construction. Sign
surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.
END OF SECTION
10 14 00 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 10 21 14
PART 1
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floor mounted, head rail braced toilet partitions.
B. Floor braced urinal screens.
C. Shower cubicles.
D. Attachment hardware.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
B. ASTM A167 – Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
C. Green Seal:
1. GS-36 - Aerosol Adhesives.
D. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings indicating partition layout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door swings,
elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes.
B. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
C. Submit one sample 3 x 6 inches in size illustrating selected panel colors and patterns.
D. Provide a sample of each type of hardware.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and ADA code for provisions for the physically handicapped.
1.06
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
10 21 14 - 1
MS0612
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-36.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (When in compliance with requirements)
A. All American Metal Corp.; American Sanitary Partition Corp.; Ampco Products; Bobrick Toilet
Compartments; Flush-Metal Partition Co.; Global Steel Products; Sanymetal; Robart Partitions.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Solid Phenolic Core panel material with laminating facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel
manufacture, machine and finish smooth.
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3 General Purpose type 0.062 inch thick.
C. Adhesive: Contact type.
D. Head rail: 1 x 1-5/8 inch, anti-grip, and clear anodized extruded aluminum; with cast socket type wall
brackets.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. Pilaster Shoe: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel, 3 inch height with adjustable screw jack.
B. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, theft proof type, heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets.
C. Through Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel with tamperproof heads.
D. Steel Plate Reinforcement: Carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1/8 inch thick.
2.05
HARDWARE
A. Hinges: Non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning, nylon bearings.
B. Latch and Keeper: Thumb turn door latch, door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.
C. Coat Hook: Cast alloy hook with rubber bumper tip.
2.06
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate partitions by applying single sheet plastic laminate finish to faces and edges of core material
using adhesive and pressure bonding. Seal edges of cut-outs. Bevel corners and edges.
B. Reinforce pilaster and panels with steel plate reinforcement sandwiched within core at attachment points.
Router cut openings as required.
C. Thickness of Partition Panels and Doors: One inch.
D. Thickness of Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch.
2.07
FINISHES
A. Plastic Laminate: Finish color and pattern as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated on the drawings,
selection shall be made by the Contracting Officer’s designated Civil Engineering representative from the
manufacturer’s standard color palette.
10 21 14 - 2
MS0612
B. Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 finish.
C. Exposed Steel Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.
D. Aluminum: Clear anodized.
E. Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
B. Verify correct location of built-in framing, blocking, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02
ERECTION
A. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install partition components secure, plumb and level.
C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls and floors using appropriate anchor devices.
D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. Locate head rail joints at pilaster
centerline.
E. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with two panel brackets and to vertical pilaster upright consisting of
tubular stock with end sockets anchored to floor and ceiling.
F. Provide 1/2-inch space between wall surface and panels or pilasters.
G. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster.
Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes.
H. Equip each toilet stall door with top and bottom hinges, and door latch.
I.
Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch.
J.
Equip each toilet stall door panel with one coat hook and bumper.
3.03
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb or Level: 1/8 inch.
B. Maximum Misplacement From Intended Position: 1/8 inch.
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance, not to exceed 3/16 inch, at vertical edges of doors.
B. Adjust door hinges so that free movement is attained and will locate in-swinging doors in partial open
position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.
3.05
CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings.
B. Clean surfaces and hardware.
3.06
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation.
10 21 14 - 3
MS0612
B. Field touch-up of finished surfaces will not be permitted. Replace damaged components.
END OF SECTION
10 21 14 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 10 28 00
PART 1
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet and shower, washroom accessories.
B. Attachment hardware.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
B. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
C. ASTM A1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled , Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
D. ASTM B456 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium
and Nickel Plus Chromium.
E. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet and Strip.
F. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service.
G. Green Seal:
1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
2. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
H. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates:
a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related
primer.
b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
KEYING
10 28 00 - 1
MS0612
A. Supply three keys for each accessory to Owner.
B. Master key all accessories.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of all accessories, including height above finished floor, relationship of accessory to other
items, etc., shall conform to ANSI A117.1.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of
toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:
1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule
1168.
2. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS11.
3. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
2.02
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Provide toilet room accessories for each toilet room in accordance with paragraph "3.04 SCHEDULE OF
TOILET ACCESSORIES".
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. American Specialties, Inc.; Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Bradley Washroom Accessories;
General Accessory Mfg. Co.; McKinney/Parker; World Hand Dryers.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.04
MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
B. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof, and security type.
D. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component
and substrate.
2.05
FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
10 28 00 - 2
MS0612
F. Provide steel anchor plates, concealed solid wood blocking, adapters, and anchor components for
installation.
2.06
FACTORY FINISHING
A. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, polished finish.
B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on the drawings, in
accordance with ADA accessibility requirements and/or instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions and substrate.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
D. Verify that all concealed blocking, anchors, etc. are in place prior to finishes being installed.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall remove all protective wrappings, etc., and clean
each piece thoroughly.
3.04
SCHEDULE OF TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER (ONE PER TOILET): 20 gauge steel body with brushed stainless steel
cover; 1, 9.375" x 4" roll on 3" core; double-prong key lock; hinged front cover; indicator slot; ABS plastic
tear-off bars on sides.
B. RECESSED ELECTRIC HAND / HAIR DRYER (ONE PER THREE LAVATORIES, TWO PER FOUR TO
SIX LAVATORIES): Electric hand/hair dryer; automatic hands-off operation; chrome-plated heavy die-cast
zinc cover with tamper-resistant screws; non-corrosive plated interior components; minimum 1/10 H.P.
shaded brush less motor, 120 volt, 17 amp, 2000watt; 10 year limited warranty.
C. MIRROR (ONE PER LAVATORY): 24”(W) X 36”(H) X 22 gauge, satin finish, roll-formed stainless steel
channel mirror edge; 20 gauge galvanized steel back separated from mirror with poly fill; 1/4" float glass
mirror, electro-copper backed, meeting Fed. Spec. DD-M-00411b with tape protected edges.
D. GRAB BARS (ONE set per handicap toilet): 1.5" O.D. stainless steel, non-slip finish, concealed mounting;
1, 42" straight bar with center support at side of toilet and 1, 36" straight bar behind toilet.
END OF SECTION
10 28 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 10 44 00
PART 1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Cabinets.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.
C. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.
1.03
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products.
b. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products.
c. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.
C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design
requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for the following products:
a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products.
b. Products with recycled material content.
c. Regional products.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details and
cabinet/extinguisher dimensions.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide units conforming to UL 711.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 10 for requirements for extinguishers.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
A. Section 01 81 13 – Green Procurement: Requirements for sustainable design compliance.
B. Materials and Resources Characteristics:
10 44 00 - 1
MS0612
1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.
2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles (800
km) of Project site.
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries; Larsen's Manufacturing Co.; Potter-Roemer; Watrous.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
2.03
EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Cast steel tank, with pressure gage;
1. Class 4A-60BC with rechargeable metal heads.
2. Class 2A-10BC for use at dormitory or similar units with rechargeable metal heads.
2.04
EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Metal: Formed sheet steel, white epoxy finish primer; 18 gage thick base metal, size to accommodate
extinguisher.
B. Configuration: Semi-recessed type, sized to accommodate accessories.
C. Extinguisher cabinets recessed within fire-rated walls or partitions shall be fire-rated to match that of the
wall or partition.
D. Trim Type: Rolled edge construction, 2.5" return trim projection.
E. Door:
1. 18 gage thick reinforced for flatness and rigidity; flush pull to meet ADA code and projection
requirements, full glass, non-locking with friction catch or rolling ball latch.
2. Fire extinguishers used at exterior applications shall use doors, hinges, etc. of stainless steel and be
equipped with locks.
F. Door Glazing:
1. Glass, clear, 1/4 inch thick tempered.
2. Fire extinguishers used at exterior applications shall use break-away-acrylic-panel.
G. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.05
FINISHES
A. Extinguisher: Steel, baked enamel to standard red color.
B. Cabinet Interior, Exterior Trim and Door: White baked enamel finish.
2.06
EXTERIOR CABINETS
A. Surface mounted injection molded ABS plastic with brass lock, removable or breakable cover, and labels.
Sized to accommodate required fire extinguisher.
2.07
FABRICATION
A. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles.
B. Pre-drill for anchors.
C. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon roller type catch.
D. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
E. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing.
2.08
BRACKETS
A. Fire extinguishers in mechanical rooms or similar spaces shall be bracket mounted.
PART 3
EXECUTION
10 44 00 - 2
MS0612
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify location of extinguishers in accordance with drawings.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, height above finish floor to conform to ADA code.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
E. Mounting height shall be 4’-0” to top of cabinets or extinguisher.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Clean glass, interior and exterior of cabinet and extinguisher.
END OF SECTION
10 44 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 21 13 00:
PART 1
WET AND DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Design and install wet and/or dry-pipe sprinkler system as indicated on drawings.
B. Fire sprinkler piping.
C. Fire department connection.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
C. ASME B16.4 - Grey Iron Threaded Fittings.
D. ASME B16.5 - Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
E. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttweld Fittings.
F. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded.
G. ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends for Pipe, Valves, Flanges and Fittings.
H. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
I.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless.
J.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
K. ASTM A795 – Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
L. ASTM F438 – Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
M. ASTM F439 – Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
N. ASTM F442/F442M – Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chlorinated) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR)
O. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum).
P. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
Q. NFPA 1963 – Standard for Fire Hose Connections
R. UFC 3-600-01 – Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.
S. UL 405 - Fire Department Connection Devices
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System to provide coverage for entire building.
B. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. Coordinate with alarm system contractor.
21 13 00 – 1
MS0612
C. Provide system to NFPA 13, UFC 3-600-01, and as required in this section. Where conflicts exist the
most stringent shall apply.
D. Provide dry pipe system in areas subject to freezing.
E. Provide fire department connection.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design and installation to conform to NFPA 13 (latest edition) and UFC 3-600-01.
B. Equipment and Components: All materials used shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual approved, and
bear UL or FM label or marking.
C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with three years experience.
D. Design by or under the supervision of a certified sprinkler designer.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, and Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of certified sprinkler
designer.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, calculations, layout, and product data.
B. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories.
C. Submit shop drawings, product data, installation instructions and hydraulic calculations sealed by a
certified sprinkler designer.
D. Contractor shall prepare shop drawings in AutoCAD format and submit paper copies for approval. Upon
completion of the project the contractor shall submit a digital copy of the as-built shop drawings. The base
shall provide standard border sheet and drawing sheets in digital format as required for the preparation of
the shop drawings. Title block is to be filled out the same as the contract drawings and numbered FP-1.
E. Submit certification of all individuals involved in preparation of shop drawings and calculations. Individuals
must currently be certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET)
as an engineering technician with minimum Level - III certification in Automatic Sprinkler System program.
F. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
G. The submittals, training, and zoning for the sprinkler system shall be prepared and provided by in-house
personnel employed by the Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
H. The submittals shall be approved by the Hurlburt Fire Department prior to the purchase of materials or any
installation of work is begun.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data.
B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and record drawings.
1.08
EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13.
B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
C. Provide metal storage cabinet and located in the mechanical room.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
PIPING MATERIALS
21 13 00 – 2
MS0612
A. Buried Piping: Cast iron within 5’ of building.
B. Above Ground Inside Building Piping:
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B or ASTM A795, Schedule 40, black. All pipe and fittings for a
dry pipe sprinkler system shall be Schedule 40, galvanized. No Schedule 10 pipe shall be acceptable
in any system.
a. Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld ends; ASTM
A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME
B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.
b. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.6, threaded fittings
c. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings.
d. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, “C” shaped
elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
2. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F442/F442M, SDR 13.5, UL listed for wet pipe systems, carrying a rated working
pressure of 175 psi @ 150 Degrees F
a. Fittings: ASTM F438 schedule 40 or ASTM F439 schedule 80, CPVC.
b. Joints: ASTM F493, solvent weld.
2.02
GATE VALVES
A. Up to and Including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid
wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged or grooved
ends.
2.03
CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
C. Iron body; bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged
ends.
2.04
DRAIN VALVES
A. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread.
B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.
2.05
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Riser Valve: Check type valve, main drain connection, and inlet and outlet gauge connections.
Ductile iron body, brass seat and rubber-faced clapper assembly hinged to a removable access cover.
B. Fire Department Connection: Standard wall type; ductile iron; chrome plated finish, double clapper type;
thread size to suit fire department hardware; two way threaded dust cap and chain of same material and
finish, 3/4 inch (19 mm) automatic drip connected to drain; marked "Sprinkler - Fire Department
Connection".
C. Water flow switch: Vane type with adjustable delay and two single pole double throw switches (for wet
systems only). Provide type as permitted by NFPA 13 for dry systems.
D. Dry Pipe Valve: U.L. listed latching differential type with associated trim package for system operation,
maintenance, and testing. Provide protection against accumulation of water above the clapper by an
automatic draining device.
E. Air Compressor: Automatically maintained pressure system capable of restoring normal air pressure in
the system within 30 minutes. Provide domestically manufactured assembly. Air compressor shall be
single stage for motors below 1-1/2 hp and two stage for 1-1/2 hp and above, capable of producing air at
150 psi. Sixty gallon tanks and larger shall be ASME stamped. Pumps shall be cast iron with metal belt
guard, intake air filter, pressure switch control, tank gauge, check valve, tank drain, pressure relief valve
and outlet valve. Motor speed shall not exceed 1200 rpm. Magnetic starters and overloads shall be
provided for all three phase motors.
21 13 00 – 3
MS0612
F. Gate Valve and Indicator Post: Gate valves for underground installation shall be of inside screw type with
counter-clockwise rotation to open. Indicating valves shall be gate valves with approved indicator post of
length to permit the top of the post to be located 35" above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator
posts shall be UL or FM listed. Provide BEST paddle lock with removable 6-pin core at each indicator
post. Indicator post will be painted with one coat chromate primer and two coats alkyd enamel – dark
bronze.
G.
Double Check Valve Assemblies: ASSE 1015, AWWA C510-89; stainless steel body with corrosion
resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with test
cocks and two OS&Y shutoff valves. Approved for use in fire protection systems and approved for
installation in the vertical position. All backflow preventors 2 inches and smaller shall be installed with
unions for easy removal and maintenance. All backflow preventors shall access ports for each check
valve, no dual access type services ports shall be allowed. The riser shall be configured with a test
header to allow forward flow testing of backflow preventors at full system demand. Assembly shall include
an isolation valve and exterior wall mounted header with multiple test ports sufficient to accommodate full
system demand gpm.
2.06
SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Standard pendant type with chrome plated finish, with matching escutcheon.
B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with chrome plated finish.
C. Sidewall Type: Chrome plated finish with matching escutcheon.
D. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard.
2.07
SPRINKLER GUARDS
A. Sprinkler guards shall be provided in areas where the heads are subject to mechanical damage, including
mechanical.
2.08
YARD-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Standard: UL 405.
B. Type: Exposed, freestanding.
C. Pressure Rating: 15 psig minimum.
D. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
E. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and threads.
Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.
F. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
G. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, floor type.
H. Outlet: Bottom, with pipe threads.
I.
Number of Inlets: Two.
J.
Sleeve: Brass.
K. Sleeve Height: 18 inches (460 mm).
L. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to AUTO SPKR.
M. Finish Including Sleeve: Rough brass or bronze.
N. Outlet Size: NPS 4 (DN 100).
O. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping
between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to spill to outside building.
21 13 00 – 4
MS0612
P. Provide valve box at the base of the yard-type FDC to house the check valve and ball drip.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work and reflected ceiling plan.
B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs.
C. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and out, before assembly.
D. CPVC piping shall be packaged immediately after its manufacture to prevent damage and shall be stored
indoors after production until shipped. Piping shall be protected from damage and sun light on site.
3.02
INSTALLATION - PIPING
A. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator (PIV), if indicated. PIV shall be installed
so that the top of the post is 36 inches above grade. PIV’s shall be protected by bollards when installed 5
feet or less from paved areas. Bollards shall be arranged so that they do not hinder operation of the valve.
B. Install vertical type double check valve assembly in sprinkler system riser. Provide tamper switches for
each valve and connect to the alarm panel. FDC shall be installed between 36 inches and 48 inches
above grade.
C. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese
connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
D. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
E. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. In open areas or areas without suspended
ceilings, install piping as close as possible to structure above to allow maximum clearance below piping.
F. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon
spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.
G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at main drain. Where the capacity of trapped sections of piping
is less than 5 gallons, an auxiliary drain consisting of not less than a ½” valve shall be provided. Where
the capacity of trapped sections of piping is more than 5 gallons, an auxiliary drain consisting of two 2”
valves and a 2” by 12” condensate nipple (drum drip) shall be provided. Auxiliary drains shall be
terminated outside the building. Install valves in an accessible location or provide access panel.
H. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb, and parallel to building structure.
I.
Exposed Areas: Paint piping with one coat zinc chromate primer and two coats alkyd enamel to match
wall/ceiling color. Provide stencils or pipe markers in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
J.
Mechanical Rooms and Concealed areas: Paint piping with one coat zinc chromate primer and two coats
red Alkyd enamel.
K. Connect water flow switch and other signaling devices to alarm panel.
L. Inspector’s test station shall be installed in the riser room downstream of the flow switch.
M. Locate outlet of inspectors test outside building 2'-0" above grade with splash block.
N. Piping for inspectors test or auxiliary drains shall not be exposed in finished areas. Install piping
concealed in wall or construct furred out space to conceal piping. Provide access door where needed for
access to valves.
O. CPVC piping shall only be installed when and where indicated on the project drawings. Installation shall be
in accordance with manufactures installation instructions, NFPA 13 and its listing.
21 13 00 – 5
MS0612
P. Provide sleeve at all wall and floor slab pipe penetrations.
Q. All piping joints under building slabs and foundations shall be installed with thrust blocks and joint
restraints.
R. The Contractor shall notify the Hurlburt Fire Department prior to taking an existing sprinkler system out of
service for modification or repair. The Contractor shall perform a function test on the flow switch before
taking the system down. The Contractor (not the Fire Department) shall valve off the system, drain the
system, perform the repair/modifications, and then put the system back in operation. The Contractor shall
perform a function test on the flow switch then notify the Contracting Officer after system is ready for
inspection and operation.
S. When performing repairs or modifications on a fire sprinkler system with a fire pump, the Contractor shall
shut down the fire pump first, and then shut the jockey pumps down second. After work is complete, the
Contractor shall put the jockey pump back in service before the fire pump is put back in service.
T. All fire suppression valves that are put into service shall be monitored by factory supplied switch in the
normal operational position. If the valve is to be closed under normal system operation, then the valve
shall be monitored in the closed position. If the valve is to be open under normal system operation then
the valve shall be monitored by factory supplied switch in the open position. Valves that are monitored
open under normal system operation will not be accepted as closed valves.
U. All fire systems shall have a posted sequence of operation. The Contractor shall provide and post a
laminated sequence of operation near the fire riser.
V. Fire sprinkler systems that protect facilities with multiple floors shall have a flow switch at each floor
control valve. This flow switch shall provide a signal to the fire alarm control panel to indicate which part of
the building has flow to the sprinkler heads.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
3.04
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. System acceptance shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Test shall be witnessed by Government contract inspector.
C. Test control sequence for operation.
D. At time of the systems acceptance the contractor shall fill out the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate
and submit for final approval.
E. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the International Plumbing Code at the
time of installation. Use attached inspection form and submit for approval.
END OF SECTION
21 13 00 – 6
Hurlburt Field
PWS ID No. 1460782
MS0612
Device
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Make:
Model:
Serial #:
Date Installed:
Test Date:
Device Location:
New
Orientation
Use
Existing
Previous Device Serial #:
Testing & Maintenance
Domestic
Containment
Vertical Down
Fire
Isolation
Horizontal
Irrigation
Passed
Annual Test
Failed
Line Pressure:
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY
Check Valve No. 2
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
Shut Off Valve No. 2
Protection
Vertical Up
Initial Test
Check Valve No. 1
Size:
Relief Valve
Failed to Open
Opened At
Closed Tight
Leaked
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
Check Valve No. 1
Check Valve No. 2
With Flow
Against Flow
With Flow
Against Flow
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER
Air Inlet Valve
Opened At
Failed to Open
Check Valve
Leaked
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across Check Valve
Test Kit
Test Kit Make:
Model:
Serial No.
Tester
Comments:
Name of Certified Tester:
Tester Certification Number:
Expiration Date:
PASS
Last Calibration
Date:
FAIL
I Hereby certify I have tested the device in accordance with FAC Rule 62-555.330(6) and FAC Rule 62-555.360(2).
Tester's Signature:
Form must be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of testing.
Date:
MS0612
SECTION 22 07 00:
PART 1
PLUMBING INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
B. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).
E. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
F. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
G. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and
Vessel Lagging.
H. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
I.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form.
J.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
K. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
L. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
M. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal
Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
N. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
O. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
P. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel.
Q. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal
Insulation.
R. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation.
S. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and
120.
T. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
22 07 00 - 1
MS0612
U. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for
each service, and location.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper
installation procedures.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not
exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.
C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
experience.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 60 00 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including
product density and thickness.
C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in
original wrapping.
1.07
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE INSULATION
A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. Conform to ASTM C795 for application on
Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
B. TYPE P-2: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. Conform to ASTM C795 for application on
Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
22 07 00 - 2
MS0612
C. TYPE P-3: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
Conform to ASTM C795 for application on Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type II, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
D. TYPE P-4: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible. Conform to ASTM C795 for
application on Austenitic stainless steel.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
E. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F.
F. TYPE P-6: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 300 degrees F.
G. TYPE P-7: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, nonhalogen, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 250 degrees F.
H. TYPE P-8: ASTM C547, Type I or II, mineral fiber preformed pipe insulation, noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F.
3. Canvas Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton fabric treated with fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
I.
TYPE P-90: ASTM C578, Type XIII, extruded polystyrene insulation, formed into shapes for use as pipe
insulation.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 180 day aged value of 0.259 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 297 to 165 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied film of 6 milsthickness and water vapor
permeance of 0.02 perms.
J.
TYPE P-10: ASTM C533; Type I, hydrous calcium silicate pipe insulation, rigid molded white; asbestos
free.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.45 at 200 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.
2.02
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white
color.
2. Thickness: 15 mil.
3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
C. ABS Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
D. Aluminum Pipe Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
22 07 00 - 3
MS0612
3.
4.
5.
6.
Finish: Smooth.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.03
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type
40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less than 6
inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece
construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
G. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
H. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
I.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
2.04
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. TYPE E-1: ASTM C553; glass fiber, flexible or semi-rigid, noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 1.5 pound per cubic foot.
B. TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied aluminum foil jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3. Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
C. TYPE E-3: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type II, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing
adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
D. TYPE E-4: ASTM C612; semi-rigid, fibrous glass board noncombustible.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 650 degrees F.
E. TYPE E-5: ASTM C533; Type II, hydrous calcium silicate block insulation, asbestos free.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.45 at 200 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.
F. TYPE E-6: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 220 degrees F.
2.05
EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, sheet material, off-white color.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
22 07 00 - 4
MS0612
3.
4.
5.
6.
Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
Thickness: 15 mil.
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
B. Aluminum Equipment Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3. Finish: Embossed.
4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
D. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:
1. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2. Glass Fiber Fabric:
a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c. Weave: 5 x 5.
3. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:
a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
2.06
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02
INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire
resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through
assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of
assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.
C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump
bodies, and expansion joints.
2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with
pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets
with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
22 07 00 - 5
MS0612
D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to
equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities.
E. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation:
1. Wrap elbows and fitting with vapor retarder tape.
2. Seal butt joints with vapor retarder tape.
F. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding
staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or
both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such
locations.
G. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding
staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or
both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
H. Inserts and Shields:
1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and
insulation.
2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish
jacket.
a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range
and service.
3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and
inserts.
I.
Insulation Terminating Points:
1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the coil
control valve.
2. Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated components up to coil
connection.
3. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation.
J.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Push insulation on to piping.
2. Miter joints at elbows.
3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
K. High Temperature Pipe Insulation:
1. Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled.
2. Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands before installing next layer.
3. Stagger joints between layers.
4. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
22 07 00 - 6
MS0612
L. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished
floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers, ABS jacket and fitting covers, or aluminum jacket.
M. Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with
insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor
retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of
horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal piping.
N. Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be
installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose
service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick
aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with
polyester film.
O. Heat Traced Piping Interior to Building: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,
thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer.
P. Heat Traced Piping Exterior to Building: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,
thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer.
Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with
overlap facing down to shed water.
Q. Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.03
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
D. Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
2. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to
equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
3. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with
pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets
with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
4. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
E. Equipment Containing Fluids 140 degrees F Or Less:
1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
F. Equipment Containing Fluids Over 140 degrees F:
1. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
G. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting
covers or aluminum jacket.
H. Equipment Located Exterior to Building: Install vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced
vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal
equipment.
I.
Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with insulation.
22 07 00 - 7
MS0612
J.
Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and
replacement without damage.
K. Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
3.04
SCHEDULES
A. Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM
TYPE
Domestic Hot Water Supply
and Recirculation
P-1
Domestic Hot Water Supply
and Recirculation systems with
domestic water temperature
maintenance cable
P-1
Domestic Cold Water
P-1 or P-5
Deionized Water
PIPE SIZE
P-1 or P-5
THICKNESS
inches
1-1/4 inches and smaller
0.5
1-1/2 inches and larger
1.0
1 inch and smaller
1.0
1-1/4 inches to 2 inches
1.5
2-1/2 inches and larger
2.0
1-1/4 inches and smaller
0.5
1-1/2 inches and larger
1.0
All sizes
1.0
B. Drainage Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
INSULATION
THICKNESS
PIPING SYSTEM
TYPE
PIPE SIZE
inches
Storm Piping (horizontal above
ground within building)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
Storm Piping (horizontal and
vertical above ground within
building when PVC pipe is used)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
Sanitary Sewer Piping (horizontal
and vertical above ground within
building when PVC piping is used)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
C. Equipment Insulation Schedule:
INSULATION
EQUIPMENT
INSULATION
THICKNESS
TYPE
inches
Roof Drain Bodies
E-2 or E-6
1.0
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks
E-1 or E-2
1.5
Domestic Water Storage Tanks
E-1, E-2, or E-6
1.0
Domestic Water Booster Pump Bodies
E-6
0.5
Water Softeners and Tanks
E-1, E-2, or E-6
1.0
22 07 00 - 8
MS0612
END OF SECTION
22 07 00 - 9
MS0612
SECTION 22 11 19:
PART 1
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibs.
D. Backflow preventers.
E. Water hammer arrestors.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Wall Hydrants, Anti-Backflow Types.
C. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
D. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
E. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.04
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts and backflow preventers.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
FLOOR DRAINS
A. ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible
clamping collar, trap prime, and 8 inch round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
B. Mechanical rooms: ASME A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange,
weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and minimum 8” round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer with
extended anti-splash rim.
2.02
CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
B. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with serrated cover in
service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
22 11 19 – 1
MS0612
C. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed
cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
D. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical
rainwater leaders.
2.03
HOSE BIBS
A. ANSI/ASSE 1011; anti-siphon hose bibb with chrome plated wall plate, hose thread spout, handwheel, and
integral vacuum breaker. Exterior hose bibb shall be provided with a rough brass recessed wall box.
2.04
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal
parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm
type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under
back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves,
strainer, and four test cocks.
2.05
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature
range -33 to 180 degrees F and maximum 150 psig working pressure.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain by means of an approved air gap. Install backflow
preventers in an accessible location (i.e. not greater than 5’ above floor and 12” clear space around
backflow preventer, unless otherwise noted).
E. Install water hammer arrestors in an accessible location, complete with isolation valve on hot and cold
water supply piping. Water hammer arrestors are to be installed between the last two fixtures on each
branch line.
F. Provide access doors to all water hammer arrestors that are not accessible.
G. Provide deep seal "p" trap for all floor drains.
H. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the International Plumbing Code at the
time of installation. Use attached inspection form and submit for approval.
END OF SECTION
22 11 19 – 2
Hurlburt Field
PWS ID No. 1460782
MS0612
Device
Backflow Prevention Device Inspection and Maintenance Form
Make:
Model:
Serial #:
Date Installed:
Test Date:
Device Location:
New
Orientation
Use
Existing
Previous Device Serial #:
Testing & Maintenance
Domestic
Containment
Vertical Down
Fire
Isolation
Horizontal
Irrigation
Passed
Annual Test
Failed
Line Pressure:
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY
Check Valve No. 2
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
Shut Off Valve No. 2
Protection
Vertical Up
Initial Test
Check Valve No. 1
Size:
Relief Valve
Failed to Open
Opened At
Closed Tight
Leaked
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
Check Valve No. 1
Check Valve No. 2
With Flow
Against Flow
With Flow
Against Flow
Leaked
Leaked
Closed Tight
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across No. 1 Check
Pressure Differential
Across No. 2 Check
PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER
Air Inlet Valve
Opened At
Failed to Open
Check Valve
Leaked
Closed Tight
Pressure Differential
Across Check Valve
Test Kit
Test Kit Make:
Model:
Serial No.
Tester
Comments:
Name of Certified Tester:
Tester Certification Number:
Expiration Date:
PASS
Last Calibration
Date:
FAIL
I Hereby certify I have tested the device in accordance with FAC Rule 62-555.330(6) and FAC Rule 62-555.360(2).
Tester's Signature:
Form must be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of testing.
Date:
MS0612
SECTION 22 30 00:
PART 1
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Water heaters.
B. Pumps.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 – BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1
B. UL 499 – Electric Heating Appliances
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified.
B. Ensure products and installation of specified products is in conformance with recommendations and
requirements of the following organizations:
1. American Gas Association (AGA).
2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are
non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published
maximum efficiency curve.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to AGA requirements for water heaters.
B. All equipment shall be Energy Star compliant.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include data on water heaters and pumps
C. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction.
D. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating
point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include operation, maintenance, and replacement part numbers.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Provide six year manufacturer's warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of water heater tank.
22 30 00 – 1
MS0612
PART 2
GENERAL
2.01
GAS FIRED WATER HEATER
A. Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage type, glass lined welded steel tank; single flue passage, flue
baffle and draft hood; thermally insulated with rigid polyurethane foam, minimum R-11; encased in
corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs.
B. Automatic water thermostat and built-in gas pressure regulator; temperature range adjustable from 120 to
170 degrees F, cast iron or sheet metal burner, safety pilot and thermocouple.
C. Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high density magnesium anode, and temperature and
pressure relief valve.
2.02
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A. Automatic, electric, vertical storage type, glass lined welded steel tank, thermally insulated with rigid
polyurethane foam, minimum R-11; encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
B. Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 120 to 170 degrees F,
flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box.
C. Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high density magnesium anode, and temperature and
pressure relief valve.
D. Instantaneous Water Heater: Heater shall be crossflow design with service water in the coil and hot water
in the shell. An integral internal controller shall be provided, anticipating a change in demand so that the
final temperature can be maintained under all normal load conditions when used in conjunction with pilotoperated temperature control system. Normal load conditions shall be as specified by the manufacturer
for the heater. Unit shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1, and shall be
certified for 1.03 MPa 150 psi working pressure in the shell and 1.03 MPa 150 psi working pressure in the
coils. Shell shall be carbon steel with copper lining. Heads shall be cast iron. Coils shall be copper.
Shell shall have metal sheathed fiberglass insulation, combination pressure and temperature relief valve,
and thermometer. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION.
E. Electric Instantaneous Water Heaters (Tankless): UL 499 and UL listed flow switch activated, tankless
electric instantaneous water heater for wall mounting below sink or lavatory.
2.03
IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
A. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure.
B. Impeller: Bronze.
C. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two, oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.
D. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
E. Drive: Flexible coupling.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install water heaters on concrete 6”
house keeping pads or shelves. Provide plastic drain pans for electric water heaters and aluminum drain
pans for gas water heaters, pipe to exterior of building or nearest floor drain.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and electrical work to achieve
operating system.
3.02
PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
22 30 00 – 2
MS0612
B. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are
non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published
maximum efficiency curve.
END OF SECTION
22 30 00 – 3
MS0612
SECTION 22 40 00:
PART 1
PLUMBING FIXTURES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Water closets.
B. Urinals.
C. Lavatories.
D. Sinks.
E. Service sinks.
F. Showers.
G. Electric water coolers.
H. Eyewash fountains.
I.
Emergency showers.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
B. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eye Wash and Shower Equipment.
C. ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.
D. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
E. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
F. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout.
B. Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include fixtures, sizes, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
C. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
1. Water Efficiency Certificates:
a. Certify plumbing fixture flow rates.
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty.
22 40 00 – 1
MS0612
B. Warranty: Include coverage of electric water cooler compressor.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER CLOSET
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2
inch spud, china bolt caps. Low water consumption type (1.6 GPF).
B. Flush Valve: ASME A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle,
escutcheon, seat bumper, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker. Low water consumption type
(1.28 GPF). Provide with trap primers where indicated.
C. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without cover.
2.02
URINAL
A. Urinal: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china, wall hung washout urinal with shields, integral trap, removable
stainless steel strainer, 3/4 inch top spud, steel supporting hanger. Low water consumption type (0.125
GPF). Provide with trap primers where indicated.
B. Flush Valve: ASME A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle,
escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. Low water consumption type (1.0 GPF).
C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall
attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs.
2.03
WALL-HUNG LAVATORY
A. Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall-hung lavatory 19 x 17 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back,
drillings on 4 inch centers, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator, long
single lever handle, chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.
Water shall be provided with a quarter turn ball valve. Valve shall be sweat or screwed.
C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall
attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.
D. Maximum Water Flow: 0.5 Gallons per minute for private fixtures and 0.25 gallons per cycle for metering
fixtures in public spaces.
2.04
COUNTERTOP LAVATORY
A. Lavatory: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china self-rimming countertop lavatory, 19 x 17 inches with drillings
on 4 inch centers, front overflow, soap depression, seal of putty, caulking, or concealed vinyl gasket.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator, long
single lever handle, chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.
Water shall be provided with a quarter turn ball valve. Valve shall be sweat or screwed.
C. Maximum Water Flow: 0.5 Gallons per minute for private fixtures and 0.25 gallons per cycle for metering
fixtures in public spaces.
2.05
SINK
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; double compartment 32 x 21 x 8-1/8 inch outside dimensions 20 gage, Type 304
stainless steel, self-rimming with undercoating, 3-1/2 inch crumb cups, and stainless steel drain,
ledgeback drilled for trim.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with 7-1/4" tubular swing spout, water economy
aerator, indexed lever handles; chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with cleanout plug and arm with
escutcheon. Water shall be provided with a quarter turn ball valve. Valve shall be sweat or screwed.
C. Maximum Water Flow: 1.2 Gallons per minute.
22 40 00 – 2
MS0612
2.06
SHOWER
A. Built-in tile, 36 x 36 x 75 inch high, with stone texture receptor, soap dish, removable chrome plated
strainer, tailpieces. Provide cabinet and all accessories as required to be handicap accessible.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower supply with pressure balanced mixing valves, and shower head
assembly to meet handicap requirements.
C. Maximum Water Flow: 1.6 Gallons per minute.
2.07
ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A. Fountain: ARI 1010; surface, high-low, handicapped mounted electric water cooler with stainless steel top,
vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, mounting
bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser; capacity of 8 gal/hr of 50 degree F water with inlet
at 80 degree F and room temperature of 90 degree F. Outdoor cooler shall be all stainless steel and
freeze-proof.
B. Trim: Water shall be provided with a quarter turn ball valve. Valve shall be sweat or screwed.
2.08
SERVICE SINK
A. Bowl: 24 x 24 x 10 inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide shoulders, stainless
steel strainer.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; exposed wall type supply with lever handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker,
hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and
adjustable threaded wall flanges; 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose, hose
clamp, mop hanger.
2.09
EMERGENCY EYE WASH
A. ANSI Z358.1; free standing, self cleaning, non-clogging eye wash with quick opening, full-flow valves,
stainless steel eye wash receptor, twin eye wash heads, stainless steel dust cover, copper alloy control
valve and fittings.
2.10
EMERGENCY SHOWER
A. ANSI Z358.1; free standing, self cleaning, non-clogging 8 inch diameter stainless steel deluge shower
head with elbow, one inch full flow valve with pull chain and 8 inch diameter ring, one inch interconnecting
fittings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and
installation.
B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops reducers, and
escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture.
F. Provide flush water closets and urinals with reclaimed water where available.
G. Mount fixtures to the following heights above finished floor:
22 40 00 – 3
MS0612
Water Closet:
Standard
Handicapped
Urinal:
Standard
Handicapped
Lavatory:
Standard
Handicapped
Drinking Fountain:
Handicapped
15
18
inches to top of bowl rim
inches to top of seat
22
19
inches to top of bowl rim
inches to top of bowl rim
31
34
inches to top of basin rim
inches to top of basin rim, 29” clear knee space.
34-36
Water Closet Flush Valves:
Standard
11
Shower Heads:
Adult (male)
Adult (female)
inches to bubbler, 27” clear knee space.
inches min. above bowl rim
69.5 inches to bottom of head
64.5 inches to bottom of head
Emergency Eye Wash:
Standard
38
inches to receptor rim
Emergency Shower:
Standard
inches to bottom of head
84
H. Provide manufactured covers for the exposed supply lines and drains at handicapped lavatories to meet
ADA requirements. Pipe insulation is not acceptable.
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
C. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.
END OF SECTION
22 40 00 – 4
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 00:
PART 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 21, 22, and 23 Sections, in addition to
Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.02
WORK SEQUENCE
A. During the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Prime contractor.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable Building Code for the state of Florida.
B. Fire Protection: Conform to NFPA.
C. Plumbing: Conform to International Plumbing Code.
D. The contractor shall perform all demolition, installation, inspection and maintenance of air conditioning
equipment in accordance with the latest Environmental Protection Agency guidance, specifically Title IV of
the Clean Air Act, Amendments Section 608.
E. All personnel servicing air conditioning equipment shall be certified in refrigerant recovery and recycling by
a State of Florida authorized organization.
F. All equipment used in servicing air conditioning equipment shall be certified for refrigerant recovery and
recycling by a State of Florida authorized organization.
G. Any servicing of air conditioning equipment must recover, and if possible, recycle all refrigerant. The only
alternate to this is to recover and dispose of the refrigerant in accordance with the latest and most
restrictive guidance from the Environmental Protection Agency or the Florida Department of
Environmental Regulation.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Submit for approval before proceeding.
C. Where existing equipment (i.e. air handlers, chillers, water heaters, etc.) is to remain, the contractor shall
verify condition of that equipment prior to beginning work. If equipment does not work properly, contractor
shall notify government for that item to be fixed or problem to be noted prior to beginning work. If
contractor does not notify government of any problems it is assumed that all existing equipment to remain
is in perfect working order and will be returned in that condition. Contractor is responsible for protection of
existing equipment to remain, and any operation of equipment required while under construction.
D. When existing air handling equipment is to remain in service during construction the Contractor shall place
temporary construction filters at all return air grilles. These filters shall be removed when construction is
complete. The Contractor shall replace the filters at the unit for all existing and new air handlers after
construction is complete.
E. Project drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all required turns, elbows, transitions, etc. that may
be required due to existing conditions or work done by other trades. It is the contractors responsibility to
provide all such turns, elbows, transitions, etc. and coordinate with other trades as required to provide a
complete and operational system. This shall be done at no additional cost to the government.
F. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with concrete housekeeping pads.
G. All pumps shall be anchored in place.
23 05 00 – 1
MS0612
H. On all air handling and exhaust systems, the Contractor shall provide approved fixed ladder/platform for
maintenance and repair of new equipment installed.
1.05
GAS SERVICE
A. Where gas services are required it is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with local gas utility
(Okaloosa County Gas District). Any charges associate with gas services are the responsibility of the
contractor.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. All warranties shall begin on the day the government takes beneficial occupancy of the project unless
system is placed in operation in several phases at government’s request. When system is completed the
contractor shall submit letter requesting acceptance of that system. Warranty for that system shall begin
on the date it is accepted by the government.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide operation and maintenance manuals and other info as required to be included in project O & M
Manuals per Section 01 70 00 of this specification. Manuals shall contain written instructions for each
system, shop drawings, as-builts, schematic drawings, catalog cuts (submittal information),
manufacturer’s instructions, warranties, and test and balance report as applicable for every section in this
division.
B. Manuals shall be available for review at the time of the final inspection.
1.08
TEST AND BALANCE/COMMISSIONING
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide the services of a third party, independent firm for Test and
Balance and Commissioning.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
23 05 00 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 01:
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Removal of designated mechanical items.
B.
Removal of designated construction.
C.
Disposal of materials. Storage of removed materials.
1.02
A.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
Submit work plan for outages and temporary services to areas that remain occupied (see paragraph
3.01E).
1.03
A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to all applicable codes for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical
disconnection and re-connection.
B.
Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit.
C.
Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without approval by base fire department.
D.
Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
1.04
A.
B.
PART 2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Conduct demolition to minimize interference with any adjacent and occupied building areas.
Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Contracting Officer. Do not
resume operations until directed.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
PREPARATION
Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
B.
Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued
Owner occupancy.
C.
Protect existing materials and finishes which are not to be demolished.
D.
Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.
E.
Maintain existing mechanical and plumbing systems to any occupied areas of the building. Where
disruption of systems feeding these areas can not be avoided, contractor shall minimize disruption to the
greatest extent possible. Contractor shall submit for approval a work plan that shows how he intends to
minimize disruption and the duration of any anticipated disruption. Contractor shall notify occupants 48
hours prior to any disruption of services. Work may be required to be done over a weekend. Where
duration of disruption exceeds 2 days (unless noted otherwise) the contractor shall provide temporary
services.
F. Where ductwork systems or air handling equipment is to remain in place during demolition and
construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene over openings to prevent
construction dust from entering. Contractor will be required to clean ductwork, air handlers and coils
where this has not been accomplished.
23 05 01 – 1
MS0612
G. Confirm with Contracting Officer’s Representative about disposition of any systems to be retained by the
Government.
3.02
A.
DEMOLITION
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members and building
components to remain.
B.
Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury
materials on site.
C.
Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.
D.
Where piping, wiring, ductwork and/or equipment are being removed passes through walls, floors, ceilings
or roofs, patch holes to match adjacent finishes. Patch holes in fire rated walls as required to maintain fire
rating.
E.
Where exposed mechanical items are being removed, finish surfaces behind item to match adjacent
surfaces.
F.
Where removal of mechanical items require demolition of existing building components to remain, make
repairs to match construction that was removed.
G.
Remove all controls and electrical associated with the removal of mechanical items unless they are shown
to remain or required for installation of new equipment. Removal shall be back to any existing panels or
devises that remain in operation.
H.
Remove all hangers, supports, and anchors associated with mechanical items being removed. Patch
surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
END OF SECTION
23 05 01 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 29: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.
B. Equipment bases, supports, and curbs.
C. Sleeves, seals, and chases.
D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
B. Supports for Ductwork: In conformance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and
Flexible.
C. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is
installed according to specified requirements.
D. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration
firestopping.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
I.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180
degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
J.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering protective
saddles.
K. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in 90
degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.
L. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
23 05 29 – 1
MS0612
2.02
HANGER RODS
A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.03
INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger
rods.
2.04
FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.05
SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with
steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated
fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
F. Stuffing or Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
G. Calk: Acrylic sealant.
H. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance
rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another,
with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
2.06
FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for
continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
2.07
CHASES
A. PVC chases/conduit run underground or under slabs for the purpose of running refrigerant piping or other
mechanical services shall have wall thickness equal to schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated.
2.08
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: Galvanized steel band iron or rolled angle and 3/8" (9 mm) rods.
B. Wall supports: Galvanized steel band iron or fabricated angle bracket.
2.09
EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, 1-1/2 inch thick
insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Color to match color of roofing panels on metal roofs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23 05 29 – 2
MS0612
3.01
INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspended hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and side of reinforced concrete
beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed
square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.02
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch
1-1/2 to 2 inch
2-1/2 to 3 inch
4 to 6 inch
8 to 12 inch
PVC (All Sizes)
C.I Bell & Spigot
(or No-Hub)
MAX. HANGER SPACING
6'-6"
10'-0"
10'-0"
10'-0"
14'-0"
6'-0"
5'-0"
and at Joints
HANGER DIAMETER
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
7/8"
3/8"
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
F. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.
H. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
3.03
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond all
floor supported equipment unless detailed otherwise on drawings.
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.04
FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or
waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Seal floor, shower, mop sink and other drains watertight to adjacent materials.
C. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flexible
sheet flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight.
3.05
SLEEVES
23 05 29 – 3
MS0612
A. Install sleeves at all wall, ceiling, and floor piping and ductwork penetrations. Sleeves shall extend a
minimum of 1 inch beyond building element on both sides. Size sleeve to allow minimum of 1 inch void
between sleeve and building element.
B. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves full depth and provide
floor plate.
D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and
adjacent work with stuffing or fire stopping insulation and calk seal air tight. Install chrome plated steel
escutcheon covers where penetration is located in occupied spaces or below finished ceilings. Install
penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturers written installation instructions.
3.06
CHASES
A. Install chases water tight. Caulk both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a
firm but pliable mass, or provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
3.07
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Duct up to 30" wide - 1" x 16 gauge at 10' spacing.
B. Horizontal duct on wall supports up to 18" wide - 1-1/2" x 16 gauge or 1" x 1/8" at 8' spacing.
3.08
ROOF CURBS
A. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and
counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap
base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
B. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks.
Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.09
FIRE STOPPING
A. At penetrations through fire rated walls, ceilings, or floors, install fire stopping materials to achieve fire
ratings of adjacent construction.
3.10
FINISH
A. Prime coat steel hangers and supports. Paint exposed steel hangers and supports to match color of walls
and/or ceilings. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended ceiling
spaces are not considered exposed.
END OF SECTION
23 05 29 – 4
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 53: IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 23 00 00.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
D. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
E. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF
INSULATION OR PIPE
3/4" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 6"
8" - 10"
Over 10"
Ductwork and Equipment
LENGTH OF
COLOR FIELD
8"
8"
12"
24"
32"
-------
SIZE OF
LETTERS
1/2"
3/4"
1-1/4"
2-1/2"
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
F. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel.
G. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and fluid being conveyed.
H. Plastic Tape Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
I.
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape of not less than
6 inch wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Identification markers/markings shall be applied after application of insulation and/or final painting.
B. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
C. Plastic or Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
23 05 53 – 1
MS0612
E. Plastic Tape Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
G. Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, condensers, exhaust fans, VAV boxes, chillers, tanks,
water treatment devices and any other equipment with plastic nameplates or stencil painting. Small
devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with plastic or metal tags. Equipment shall be identified
as they are shown and scheduled on drawings(i.e. AHU-1, CWP-1, CH-1).
H. Controls: Identify control panels, thermostats, switches, disconnects and other major control components
outside panels with plastic nameplates. Controls should be identified to indicate the piece of equipment
they control and/or purpose of control component.
I.
Piping/Piping Insulation: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape
markers, or stenciled painting. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align
with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,
adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each
obstruction. See applicable sections for pipe painting requirements on applicable services.
J.
Ductwork/Ductwork Insulation: Identify ductwork with stenciled painting or plastic tape markers. Identify as
to type of air (supply, return or exhaust), piece of equipment serving ductwork, and flow direction. Locate
identification on main trunk lines and branch lines at air handling equipment, at each side of a structure or
enclosure penetration, at each obstruction and at a spacing of not more than 20 feet. See Section on
ductwork for ductwork painting requirements.
K. Valves shall be identified with a metal tag that has the valve identification number and a designation as
“NORMALLY OPEN” or “NORMALLY CLOSED” or “THROTTLING.”
END OF SECTION
23 05 53 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 05 93: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems.
B. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
D. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 21 days after award of Contract.
B. Submit test and balance reports prior to the final inspection. Include full size drawing (24” x 36”) with test
report indicating the location of all items tested as required.
C. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data
required.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for
Contracting Officer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing
tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and
equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project
Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.
G. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
H. Upon approval of the test and balance report, submit copy of the report in digital (MS Word or
Excel) format.
1.04
SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1. HVAC Pumps.
2. Boilers.
3. Forced Air Furnaces.
4. Chillers.
5. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.
6. Packaged Heating/Cooling Units.
7. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units.
8. Unit Air Conditioners.
9. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.
23 05 93 – 1
MS0612
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Air Coils.
Terminal Heat Transfer Units.
Unit Ventilators.
Fan Coil Units.
Air Handling Units.
Fans.
Air Terminal Units.
Air Inlets and Outlets.
Heat Exchangers.
1.05
REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance or NEBB forms.
B. Forms shall include the following information:
1. Title Page:
a. Company name (Test and balance contractor)
b. Company address
c. Company telephone number
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Contractor (General contractor and Mechanical sub-contractor)
2. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
3. Air Moving Equipment:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Return air flow, specified and actual
f. Outside air flow, specified and actual
g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
h. Inlet pressure
i. Discharge pressure
j. Fan RPM
4. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
f. Inlet pressure
g. Discharge pressure
h. Fan RPM
5. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a. Identification/location
b. Design air flow
c. Actual air flow
d. Design return air flow
e. Actual return air flow
f. Design outside air flow
g. Actual outside air flow
h. Return air temperature
i. Outside air temperature
j. Required mixed air temperature
k. Actual mixed air temperature
l. Design outside/return air ratio
m. Actual outside/return air ratio
6. Electric Motors:
23 05 93 – 2
MS0612
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
a. Manufacturer
b. HP/BHP
c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.
d. RPM
e. Service factor
f. Starter size, rating, heater elements
V-Belt Drive:
a. Identification/location
b. Required driven RPM
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d. Belt, size and quantity
e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
c. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature
j. Air correction factor
Air Monitoring Station Data:
a. Identification/location
b. System
c. Size
d. Area
e. Design velocity
f. Design air flow
g. Test velocity
h. Test air flow
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a. Air terminal number
b. Room number/location
c. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow
j. Percent of design air flow
Terminal Unit Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c. Identification/number
d. Location
e. Model
f. Size
g. Minimum static pressure
h. Minimum design air flow
i. Maximum design air flow
j. Maximum actual air flow
k. Inlet static pressure
Pump Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Size/model
d. Impeller
e. Service
f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
23 05 93 – 3
MS0612
g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
h. Discharge pressure
i. Suction pressure
j. Total operating head pressure
k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l. Shut off, total head pressure
13. Air Cooled Chillers:
a. Identification/number
b. Manufacturer
c. Capacity
d. Model
e. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
f. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
g. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
h. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
i. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Condenser leaving water temperature, design and actual
k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
l. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual
14. Cooling Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j. Water flow, design and actual
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n. Air pressure drop, design and actual
15. Heating Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
f. Water flow, design and actual
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual
16. Flow Measuring Station:
a. Identification/station
b. Location
c. Size
d. Manufacturer
e. Model
f. Design flow rate
g. Design pressure drop
h. Actual/final pressure drop
i. Actual/final flow rate
j. Station calibrated setting
17. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
b. Duct design operating pressure
c. Duct design test static pressure
d. Duct capacity, air flow
23 05 93 – 4
MS0612
18.
19.
20.
21.
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f. Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
Combustion Test:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model number
c. Serial number
d. Firing rate
e. Overfire draft
f. Gas meter timing dial size
g. Gas meter time per revolution
h. Gas pressure at meter outlet
i. Gas flow rate
j. Heat input
k. Burner manifold gas pressure
l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO)
m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)
n. Percent oxygen (O2)
o. Percent excess air
p. Flue gas temperature at outlet
q. Ambient temperature
r. Net stack temperature
s. Percent stack loss
t. Percent combustion efficiency
u. Heat output
Air Cooled Condenser:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Manufacturer
d. Model number
e. Serial number
f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h. Number of compressors
Electric Heater:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Design kW
f. Number of stages
g. Phase, voltage, amperage
h. Test voltage (each phase)
i. Test amperage (each phase)
j. Air flow, specified and actual
k. Temperature rise, specified and actual
Unit Ventilator and Fan Coil Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number
e. Size
f. Air flow, design and actual
g. Water flow, design and actual
h. Water pressure drop, design and actual
i. Entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
23 05 93 – 5
MS0612
k.
l.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
1.06
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents.
B. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and certified by AABC MN-1. Perform Work under
supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and
Adjusting Supervisor. All documentation shall be signed by a registered Professional Engineer.
B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC MN-1 or NEBB Procedural Standards
for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.08
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before
Substantial Completion of Project.
B. No modifications shall be performed on any factory supplied systems without written approval of the
Government. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer is system modification is required above
standard procedure and practice.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:
1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Correct fan rotation.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.
12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Correct pump rotation.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Contracting Officer.
C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance.
D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.
E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available
to Base Civil Engineering (BCE) to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
23 05 93 – 6
MS0612
3.03
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent
for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.
B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated.
3.04
ADJUSTING
A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has
been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as
selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
3.05
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air
quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers
and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary
branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total
pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full
heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required
relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm
connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature
control.
3.06
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
23 05 93 – 7
MS0612
A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to determine flow rates
for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature
difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to
thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air
balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not
use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in
one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.07
COMMISSIONING
A. The commissioning procedures shall be performed as required.
END OF SECTION
23 05 93 – 8
MS0612
SECTION 23 07 00:
PART 1
HVAC INSULATION
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Insulation jackets.
C. Equipment insulation.
D. Covering.
E. Breeching insulation.
F. Piping insulation.
G. Jackets and accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
D. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement.
E. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
F. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form.
G. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
H. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
I.
ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications.
J.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
K. ASTM C1290 – Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
L. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
M. ASTM E2231 - Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess
Surface Burning Characteristics.
N. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in insulation application with three years minimum experience.
B. Insulation, Coverings, and Linings: UL listed; maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and mounting procedures of
ASTM E 2231.
23 07 00 – 1
MS0612
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C1290; commercial grade; 'k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft
minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim facing. Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer
glass cullet.
B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 0.002 inch foil scrim
facing. Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer glass cullet.
C. Type C: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density;
coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min (20.3 m/sec) air velocity. Insulation shall be made of at least
20% post consumer glass cullet.
D. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type.
E. Indoor Jacket: 6 oz/sq yd canvas.
F. All exterior ductwork shall be factory double wall ductwork and shall be sealed watertight. All exterior
ductwork shall be finished to match the adjacent building components.
G. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to NFPA 255.
H. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage. Secure with epoxy adhesive as recommend by manufacture.
I.
Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.
J.
Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
K. All ductwork insulation systems shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 requirements in addition to the
requirements of this section.
2.02
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. When factory insulation of HVAC equipment is available or is offered as an option, all HVAC equipment
shall be provided with pre-insulated with factory insulation.
B. Type A: Flexible mineral fiber blanket; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 2.0 lb/cu ft density.
C. Type B: Rigid mineral fiber board; ASTM C612; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 6.0 lb/cu ft density.
D. Type C: Cellular glass; ASTM C552; 'k' value of 0.35 at 75 degrees F; 8.0 lb/cu ft density.
E. Type D: Calcium silicate; ASTM C533; asbestos free; 'k' value of 0.40 at 250 degrees F; 14 lb/cu ft
density.
2.03
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Bedding Compounds: Non-shrinking, permanently flexible, compatible with insulation. All bedding
compounds shall contain zero VOC’s.
23 07 00 – 2
MS0612
B. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with insulation. All vapor
barrier coatings shall contain zero VOC’s
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool. All insulating cement shall contain zero
VOC’s.
D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive resistant metal; hexagonal pattern.
2.04
PIPING INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ASTM C547, Type I; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; noncombustible.
Insulation shall be made of at least 20% post consumer glass cullet.
B. Type B: Cellular glass; ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2; maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.1
perms; 'k' value of 0.40 at 75 degrees F.
C. Type C: Cellular foam; ASTM C534, Type I; tubular form, flexible, plastic; 'k' value of 0.28 at 75 degrees F.
All cellular foam piping insulation shall be provided with a metal jacket.
2.05
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Interior Applications:
1. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints.
2. PVC Jackets: One piece, premolded type.
3. Canvas Jackets: UL listed treated cotton fabric, 6 oz/sq yd.
B. Exterior Applications:
1. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.020 inch thick; smooth finish.
2. Stainless Steel Jackets: Type 304 stainless steel; 0.010 inch thick; smooth finish.
2.06
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick galvanized steel.
B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool. All insulating cement shall contain zero
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s).
D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M. All finishing cement shall contain zero VOC’s.
E. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation and containing zero VOC’s..
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Install materials after ductwork /piping has been tested and approved.
B. Clean surfaces for adhesives.
3.02
DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature.
C. Exterior Insulation (Type A or Type B) Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or
tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent
sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop
23 07 00 – 3
MS0612
and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing
wrapping.
D. Liner (Type C) Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical
fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20
inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by
mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork to
allow for insulation thickness.
E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
F. Exposed insulation or ductwork: Where ductwork or insulation is exposed in mechanical rooms or in
finished spaces, paint jacketing to match color of interior finish as approved by architect. Use paint
suitable for substrate and in accordance with manufactures instructions.
G. Where externally insulated ductwork connects to internally insulated ductwork or internally insulated
pieces of equipment ensure there is a thermal break to prevent condensation on internally insulated items.
3.03
EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
C. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if
necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires , or bands.
D. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
E. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.
F. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such.
G. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install
insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
H. Select insulation types best suited for the equipment which it is to be installed, as recommended by
insulation manufacturer. Insulation shall have a neat appearance and provide protection against heat loss
or gain and condensation. Provide vapor barriers at all equipment below ambient temperature. Insulation
shall be a minimum 2” thick.
I.
3.04
Equipment shall be provided from the manufacture with insulation which has documentation that the
equipment will not condensate.
PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not
insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.
F. Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation,
23 07 00 – 4
MS0612
between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to
prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.
G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
H. Install preformed insulation, of the same type and thickness, and aluminum jackets, where aluminum
jackets are required, at elbows, tees, valves, etc.
I.
Jackets:
1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall
have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. Insulate fittings,
joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
cloth and adhesive. PVC jackets may be used. Excluding Type C insulation.
2. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. Insulate fittings,
joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and finish
with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. Excluding Type C insulation.
3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished
spaces, insulate as for concealed applications. Finish with canvas jacket; size for finish painting. Do
not use PVC jackets. Include on all types of insulation.
4. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located
on bottom side of horizontal piping. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material
and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Include
on all types of insulation.
5. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with selfsealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil (0.025 mm) thick aluminum
foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester
film. Excluding Type C insulation.
J.
Finish Painting: Finish exterior of pipe jackets on all indoor exposed piping to match color of surface
located behind pipes. Finish exterior of pipe jackets on all exterior piping to match color of surfaces
behind piping.
3.05
SCHEDULES:
A. Ductwork
LOCATION
Ductwork Exposed in Mech Rooms or
other finished areas
Ductwork not Exposed (above ceilings)
Air Transfer Ducts
TYPE
B
THICKNESS (INCH)
2” (unless noted otherwise)
A
C
2” (unless noted otherwise)
2” (unless noted otherwise)
B. Equipment
EQUIPMENT
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks
Domestic Cold Water Storage Tanks
Domestic Cold Water Pressure Tanks
Heat Exchangers/Converters
Air Separators
Hot Thermal Storage Tanks
Boiler Feed Water Storage Tanks
Steam Condensate Receivers
Condensate Tanks
Stacks to Roof
Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated)
Cold Thermal Storage Tanks
Chilled Water Pump Bodies
Expansion Tanks
23 07 00 – 5
MS0612
C. Piping
PIPING
Domestic Hot Water
Tempered Domestic Water
Domestic Cold Water
Roof Drains
Chilled Drinking Water
Heating Water Supply and Return
Low Pressure Steam Piping
Low Pressure Steam Condensate
Boiler Feed Water
Chilled Water
Condenser Water
Cold Condensate Drains
Refrigerant Suction
Refrigerant Hot Gas
TYPE
A
A
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
C
C
PIPE SIZE,
INCH
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
1/2" - 1-1/4"
1-1/2" - 2"
2-1/2" - 3"
4" - 6"
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
END OF SECTION
23 07 00 – 6
THICKNESS,
INCH
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
2"
1"
1"
1"
1"
MS0612
SECTION 23 08 00:
PART 1
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. HVAC commissioning description.
2. HVAC commissioning responsibilities.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: For requirements and procedures
concerning testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems.
B. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Submittal, training, and programming
requirements.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1. ASHRAE Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process.
B. Building Commissioning Association:
1. BCA - Commissioning Handbook.
C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning.
D. Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau:
1. TABB - Commissioning Manual.
1.04
COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION
A. HVAC commissioning process includes the following tasks:
1. Testing and startup of HVAC equipment and systems.
2. Equipment and system verification checks.
3. Assistance in functional performance testing to verify testing and balancing, and equipment and
system performance.
4. Provide qualified personnel to assist in commissioning tests, including seasonal testing.
5. Complete and endorse functional performance test checklists provided by Commissioning Authority to
assure equipment and systems are fully operational and ready for functional performance testing.
6. Provide equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during
commissioning process to fulfill contract and warranty requirements.
7. Provide operation and maintenance information and record drawings to Commissioning Authority for
review verification and organization, prior to distribution.
8. Provide assistance to Commissioning Authority to develop, edit, and document system operation
descriptions.
9. Provide training for systems specified in this Section with coordination by Commissioning Authority.
B. Equipment and Systems to Be Commissioned:
1. New HVAC systems that were installed under this Contract.
2. Existing HVAC systems that were modified, adjusted, upgraded, or affected by the work performed
under this Contract.
C. The following is a partial list of equipment that may be included in this HVAC Commissioning:
1. Chillers.
2. Pumps.
3. Cooling tower.
4. Boilers.
5. Piping systems.
6. Ductwork.
7. Variable frequency drives.
8. Gas-fired heating ventilating units.
9. Gas-fired makeup air units.
23 08 00 - 1
MS0612
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
Packaged roof top air conditioning units.
Split system air conditioning units.
Humidifiers.
Air handling units.
Air handling unit AHU duct system.
Packaged heat pump units.
Self-contained air conditioning units.
Packaged terminal air conditioning units.
Packaged terminal heat pump units.
Water source heat pumps.
Induction Units.
Unit Ventilators.
Fan Coil Units.
Electric terminal heating equipment.
Hot water terminal heating equipment.
Unit heaters.
Heat exchangers.
Computer room units.
Data room units.
Constant volume terminal units.
Variable volume terminal units.
Fans.
Variable volume changeover bypass system.
Fume hoods.
Laboratory room differential pressures.
Hospital room differential pressures.
Specialty fans.
Chemical treatment systems.
Fire dampers.
Smoke dampers.
Indoor air quality.
Equipment sound control.
Equipment vibration control.
Egress pressurization.
Smoke evacuation system.
Dust collection system.
Radiant floor heating system.
Kitchen hood supply systems.
Kitchen hood exhaust systems.
Automatic HVAC control system.
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work.
1.05
COMMISSIONING SUBMITTALS
A. Draft Forms: Submit draft of system verification form and functional performance test checklist.
B. Test Reports: Indicate data on system verification form for each piece of equipment and system as
specified. Use AABC forms as guidelines.
C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing completion of equipment or system verification checks
equipment or system to achieve specified performance.
1.06
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 70 00 – Contract Closeout: Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record revisions to equipment and system documentation necessitated by
commissioning.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit revisions to operation and maintenance manuals when
necessary revisions are discovered during commissioning.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC requirements.
23 08 00 - 2
MS0612
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.08
COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Equipment or System Installer Commissioning Responsibilities:
1. Attend commissioning meetings.
2. Ensure temperature controls installer performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as specified
below.
3. Ensure testing, adjusting, and balancing agency performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as
specified.
4. Provide instructions and demonstrations for Owner's personnel.
5. Ensure subcontractors perform assigned commissioning responsibilities.
6. Ensure participation of equipment manufacturers in appropriate startup, testing, and training activities
when required by individual equipment specifications.
7. Develop startup and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s startup procedures and functional
performance checklists for equipment and systems to be commissioned.
8. During verification check and startup process, execute HVAC related portions of checklists for
equipment and systems to be commissioned.
9. Perform and document completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing
copy to Commissioning Authority.
10. Provide manufacturer’s representatives to execute starting of equipment. Ensure representatives are
available and present during agreed upon schedules and are in attendance for duration to complete
tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
11. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain validity of
warranties.
12. Provide personnel to assist Commissioning Authority during equipment or system verification checks
and functional performance tests.
13. Prior to functional performance tests, review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and
equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during tests.
14. Prior to startup, inspect, check, and verify correct and complete installation of equipment and system
components for verification checks included in commissioning plan. When deficient or incomplete
work is discovered, ensure corrective action is taken and re-check until equipment or system is ready
for startup.
15. Perform verification checks and startup on equipment and systems as specified.
16. Assist Commissioning Authority in performing functional performance tests on equipment and
systems as specified.
17. Perform operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority.
18. Conduct HVAC system orientation and inspection.
B. Temperature Controls Installer Commissioning Responsibilities:
1. Attend commissioning meetings.
2. Review design for ability of systems to be controlled including the following:
a. Confirm proper hardware requirements exist to perform functional performance testing.
b. Confirm proper safeties and interlocks are included in design.
c. Confirm proper sizing of system control valves and actuators and control valve operation will
result capacity control identified in Contract Documents.
d. Confirm proper sizing of system control dampers and actuators and damper operation will result
in proper damper positioning.
e. Confirm sensors selected are within device ranges.
f. Review sequences of operation and obtain clarification from Architect/Engineer.
g. Indicate delineation of control between packaged controls and building automation system, listing
BAS monitor points and BAS adjustable control points.
h. Provide written sequences of operation for packaged controlled equipment. Equipment
manufacturers’ stock sequences may be included, when accompanied by additional narrative to
reflect Project conditions.
3. Inspect, check, and confirm proper operation and performance of control hardware and software
provided in other HVAC sections.
4. Submit proposed procedures for performing automatic temperature control system point-to-point
checks to Commissioning Authority and Architect/Engineer.
5. Inspect check and confirm correct installation and operation of automatic temperature control system
input and output device operation through point-to-point checks.
6. Perform training sessions to instruct Owner's personnel in hardware operation, software operation,
23 08 00 - 3
MS0612
programming, and application in accordance with commissioning plan.
7. Demonstrate system performance and operation to Commissioning Authority during functional
performance tests including each mode of operation.
8. Provide control system technician to assist during Commissioning Authority verification check and
functional performance testing.
9. Provide control system technician to assist testing, adjusting, and balancing agency during
performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
10. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning
Authority.
C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Commissioning Responsibilities:
1. Attend commissioning meetings.
2. Participate in verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing report for verification or diagnostic
purposes. Repeat sample of 20 percent of measurements contained in testing, adjusting, and
balancing report.
3. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning
Authority.
1.09
COMMISSIONING MEETINGS
A. Attend initial commissioning meeting and progress commissioning meetings as required by
Commissioning Authority.
1.10
SCHEDULING
A. The General Contractor shall prepare schedule indicating anticipated start dates for the following:
1. Piping system pressure testing.
2. Piping system flushing and cleaning.
3. Ductwork cleaning.
4. Ductwork pressure testing.
5. Equipment and system startups.
6. Automatic temperature control system checkout.
7. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
8. HVAC system orientation and inspections.
9. Operation and maintenance manual submittals.
10. Training sessions.
B. Schedule seasonal tests of equipment and systems during peak weather conditions to observe full-load
performance.
C. Schedule occupancy sensitive tests of equipment and systems during conditions of both minimum and
maximum occupancy or use.
1.11
COORDINATION
A. Notify Commissioning Authority minimum of two weeks in advance of the following:
1. Scheduled equipment and system startups.
2. Scheduled automatic temperature control system checkout.
3. Scheduled start of testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
B. Coordinate programming of automatic temperature control system with construction and commissioning
schedules.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install additional balancing dampers, balancing valves, access doors, test ports, and pressure and
temperature taps required to meet performance requirements.
B. Place HVAC systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation during each working day
of commissioning.
23 08 00 - 4
MS0612
C. Install replacement sheaves and belts to obtain system performance, as requested by Commissioning
Authority.
D. Install test holes in ductwork and plenums as requested by Commissioning Authority for taking air
measurements.
E. Prior to start of functional performance test, install replacement filters in equipment as specified in
individual section.
3.02
FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Seasonal Sensitive Functional Performance Tests:
1. Test heating equipment at winter design temperatures.
2. Test cooling equipment at summer design temperatures.
3. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance at peak seasonal
conditions.
B. Be responsible to participate in initial and alternate peak season test of systems required to demonstrate
performance.
C. Occupancy Sensitive Functional Performance Tests:
1. Test equipment and systems affected by occupancy variations at minimum and peak loads to
observe system performance.
2. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance with actual occupancy
conditions.
END OF SECTION
23 08 00 - 5
MS0612
SECTION 23 09 23: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems for HVAC Systems.
B. Software.
1.02
REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
A. AIR-MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSN, INC (AMCA)
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE, INC (ANSI)
ANSI B40.1 -Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type-Elastic Element
C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 269 -Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
2. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
3. ASTM D 635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
Horizontal Position
3. ASTM D 1693 - Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics
D. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 15 - (Vol II) Radio Frequency Devices
E. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS GG-T-321 - (Rev D; Am 2) Thermometers, Self-Indicating Liquid-in-Glass for Machinery and Piping
Systems
F. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS, INC (IEEE)
IEEE No. 587 - Guide for Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
G. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSN (NEMA)
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Incl Rev 1 (1000 Volts Maximum)
H. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC (UL)
1. UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
2. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment
1.03
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product
which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items shall be supported by a service
organization. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations and
qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment on a regular
and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
B. Identical Items: Items of the same classification as specified in PART 2 - PRODUCTS shall be identical,
including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.
C. Nameplates, Lens Caps, and Tags: Nameplates and lens caps bearing legends as shown and tags
bearing device unique identifiers as shown shall have engraved or stamped characters. Nameplates shall
23 09 23 – 1
MS0612
be mechanically attached to HVAC control panel interior doors. A plastic or metal tag shall be
mechanically attached directly to each field-mounted device or attached by a metal chain or wire. Each air
flow measurement station shall have a tag showing flow rate range for signal output range, duct size, and
identifier as shown.
D. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, shall verify all
dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any
work.
E. Drawings: Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the mechanical, electrical,
and finish conditions that could affect the work to be performed, shall arrange such work accordingly, and
shall furnish all work necessary to meet such conditions.
F. Power-Line Surge Protection: All equipment connected to ac circuits shall be protected from power-line
surges. Equipment protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE No. 587. Fuses shall not be used for
surge protection.
G. System Support: The contractor shall provide 1 year of system support for all hardware in the control
system at no additional cost to the building owner. System support shall include trouble-shooting,
calibration, hardware replacement and other required services to maintain fully functioning, calibrated
HVAC control systems. The system support service shall be available 5 days per week between 9 am
and 4 pm. During the 1 year system support period, the contractor shall maintain a duplicate set of HVAC
control drawings. At the owner's option, control problems will be solved by verbal instruction or on-site
correction by the contractor. The number of system support calls and site visits shall be unlimited during
the 1 year support period.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data.
B. Detail Drawings
1. Detail drawings shall be submitted. Detail drawings shall include: a drawing index; a list of symbols; a
series of drawings for each HVAC control system using abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature and
identifiers as shown on the contract drawings; valve schedules; damper schedules; and a
compressed-air station schematic on 34-inch by 22-inch sheets. Detail drawings shall also include:
equipment data, product specific catalog cuts, and an ASME air-storage tank certificate. All detail
drawings shall be delivered together as a complete submittal. Valve and damper schedules may be
submitted in advance but shall be included in the complete submittal.
2. Each control-system element on a drawing shall have a unique identifier as shown.
3. Each series of drawings for an HVAC control system shall include a schematic as shown, a ladder
diagram as shown, an equipment schedule as shown, a wiring diagram, a list of equipment with
manufacturer and model number, a control-panel arrangement drawing, and an HVAC control-system
sequence of operation.
4. The wiring diagram shall show the interconnection of conductors and cables to HVAC control-panel
terminal blocks and to the identified terminals of starters and packaged equipment, with all necessary
jumpers and ground connections. The wiring diagram shall show the labels of all conductors. All
sources of power required for HVAC control systems and for packaged-equipment control systems
shall be identified back to the panel board circuit breaker number, HVAC system control panel,
magnetic starter, or packaged control equipment circuit. Each power supply and transformer not
integral to a controller, starter, or packaged equipment shall be shown. The connected volt-ampere
load and the power supply volt-ampere rating shall be shown.
5. The HVAC control-panel arrangement drawing shall show nameplate legends, fabrication details, and
enclosure operating temperature-rise calculations. Fabrication details shall include interior door front
and rear views, back panel layout and terminal block layout.
6. The sequence of operation for each HVAC control system shall be in the language and format shown
on the drawings. No operational deviations from specified sequences will be permitted without prior
written approval of the Contracting Officer. The sequence of operation shall refer to each device by its
unique identifier.
7. The valve schedule shall include each valve's unique identifier, size, flow coefficient (Cv), pressure
drop at specified flow rate, spring range, positive-positioner range, and actuator size, supported by
close-off pressure data, dimensions, operation rate, and access and clearance requirements data.
8. The damper schedule shall contain each damper's and each actuator's identifier, nominal and actual
sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, spring ranges, operation rate, positive23 09 23 – 2
MS0612
positioner ranges, locations of actuators and damper end switches, arrangement of sections in multisection dampers, and methods of connecting dampers, actuators, and linkages. The damper
schedule shall include the maximum expected velocity through the damper at the intended location
and the maximum leakage rate at the operating static-pressure differential. The damper schedule
shall contain actuator selection data supported by calculations of the torque required to move and seal
the dampers, access and clearance requirements.
9. The equipment data shall be in booklet form, and indexed to the unique identifiers, and shall consist of
data sheets that document compliance with the specification and a copy of each HVAC control system
bill of materials. Catalog cuts shall be in booklet form indexed by device type. Where multiple
components are show on a catalog cut, the application specific component shall be marked.
C. Test Reports
1. The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of the site testing procedures. The site testing procedures shall
identify each item to be tested and shall clearly describe each test. The test procedures shall include
a list of the test equipment to be used for site testing, manufacturer and model number, and the date
of calibration and accuracy of calibration within 6 months of the test date.
2. The Contractor shall submit 4 copies of the site testing data. Original copies of all data produced
during site testing, including results of each test procedure, shall be turned over to the Government
after Government approval of the site tests.
3. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the performance verification test plans and procedures. The
test plan and procedures for the performance verification test shall be indexed and submitted in
booklet form 60 days before the Contractor's scheduled test dates.
4. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the performance verification test report after completion of a
successful test. Documentation of test results for the entire HVAC control system shall be submitted
complete, in booklet form and indexed, within 30 days after each test.
D. Training Data
1. The Contractor shall furnish a training course in the maintenance and operation of the HVAC control
systems specified 60 days prior to the start of training. The training shall be oriented to the specific
systems being installed under this contract. One training manual shall be furnished for each trainee,
plus two additional copies delivered for archival storage at the project site. The manuals shall include
the agenda, the defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter
for each lesson. Two copies of audiovisual materials shall be delivered to the Government for archival
storage at the project site, either as a part of the printed training manuals or on the same media as
that to be used during the training session.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. The Contractor shall furnish 4 complete copies of operation manuals for each HVAC control system,
in booklet form and indexed, outlining the step-by-step procedures required for each HVAC control
system's startup, operation, and shutdown. The manuals shall include all detail drawings, equipment
data, each controller's configuration check sheet and manufacturer supplied operation manuals for all
equipment.
2. The Contractor shall furnish 4 complete copies of maintenance manuals, indexed in booklet form
listing maintenance procedures. The maintenance instructions shall include a maintenance check list
for each HVAC control system. Maintenance manuals shall include spare parts data and
recommended maintenance tool kits for all control devices. Maintenance instructions shall include
recommended repair methods, either field repair, factory repair, or whole-item replacement.
3. If operation and maintenance manuals are provided in a common volume, they shall be clearly
differentiated and separately indexed.
F. Operating Instructions
1. Commissioning Procedures shall be provided for each HVAC control system, and for each type of
terminal-unit control system. The procedures shall reflect the language and format shown. The
commissioning procedures shall refer to the devices by their unique identifiers as shown. The
commissioning procedures shall include step-by-step configuration procedures for each controller.
The configuration procedures shall be product specific and shall include a configuration check sheet
showing all configuration parameters, dip switch settings, initial recommended P, I and D constants.
2. The Contractor shall provide 4 copies of Commissioning Procedures, in booklet form and indexed, for
each type of control device provided, such as controllers, pilot positioners, adjustable relays, and
transmitters. Commissioning procedures shall include general instructions on how to set control
parameters, including: setpoints; proportional, integral, and derivative mode constants; contact output
settings for the specific devices provided. Commissioning procedures shall be specific to each HVAC
system, shall detail the steps involved, and shall refer to the procedures in the booklet for specific
23 09 23 – 3
MS0612
devices. Commissioning procedures shall be submitted 60 days prior to system commissioning.
G. Records
1. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of the calibration, adjustment and commissioning report which
shall include controller setpoints and proportional, integral and derivative-mode constant settings,
calibration data for all instruments and controls, and all the data resulting from adjusting the controlsystem devices and commissioning HVAC control system.
2. The Contractor shall furnish 4 copies of a list of service organizations qualified to service the HVAC
control system. The list shall include the service organization name and telephone number.
1.05
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Products shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and
dust, and other contaminants, within the storage-condition limits published by the equipment
manufacturer. Dampers shall be stored so that seal integrity, blade alignment and frame alignment are
maintained.
1.06
INTEGRATION OF EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS
A. Where products provided by others are required to interface to the DDC system the Equipment provider
shall be responsible for providing a Bacnet MSTP interface. The Equipment provider is responsible for
providing a product that will properly interface with all specified points exposed and a table of points and
point names to the DDC contractor. The Equipment provider may provide a demo unit to the DDC
contractor for testing. The DDC contractor shall then test the interface and provide the Equipment
provider with feedback that it works, works with deficiencies, or does not work. It is the Equipment
provider’s responsibility to provide a working system. It is the DDC contractor’s responsibility to make
every effort to help verify compatibility and work with the Equipment provider to accomplish a certification
that it will work. Field installation of the Equipment provider’s interfaces will not be acceptable unless this
is approved by all parties before Equipment delivery.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: The contractor shall provide a Schneider Electric I/A Network
8000 Direct Digital Control System as specified below.
A. Schneider Electric I/A Network 8000 Direct Digital Control System: Schneider Electric I/A Network
8000 Direct Digital Control System, hereinafter referred to as I/A DDC, shall consist of a G3 Building
Controller with Web page engineering and graphics, Microzone II, MNL or MNB for air handling units,
Microzone II, MNL or MNB for the boiler and chiller, and Variable Air Volume Box Controllers for variable
air volume terminals. The system shall be set up for connection to the Base's dedicated area network,
VLAN 466, this system as specified is the ONLY system that has undergone the stringent CTO/RTO
process. The system shall be complete with all sensors, wiring, software, and hardware to form a
functional HVAC automation system. Sensors, sensor wiring, gauges, thermometers and other
accessories which are not part of the packaged I/A Network 8000 system shall be as specified hereinafter.
Training shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 3.06 TRAINING. Control system submittals shall
be made in accordance with paragraph 1.04 SUBMITTALS. In addition to the hardware and software
required at the building, the contractor shall also provide the following software development for the
existing I/A Network 8000 Host System located in the Energy Management Control System (EMCS)
section of Base Civil Engineering.
1. Graphical Building Representation: A graphical building representation with room names and room
numbers shall be created for the Web based System. The software shall allow logical routing from
the room to the boiler and/or chiller through all intermediate items of equipment. At each level, the
user shall be able to route to the previous display, the next logical equipment item, or the main
building plan. User interface shall be web based for use with roller mouse or digitizer for this
operation. All building related attributes such as room setpoints, occupied schedules, etc. shall be
displayed real-time and accessible from the graphic screen for modification.
2. Graphical System Schematics: A graphical system schematic for each air handling unit, chiller, pump,
boiler, and variable air volume terminal shall be supplied with all sensed parameters displayed. In
addition to the sensed parameters, system schematics including water coils shall display the chilled
water or hot water supply temperature as measured at the chiller or boiler respectively. All system
related attributes such as equipment control setpoints, throttling ranges, operating schedules, etc.
shall be displayed real-time and accessible from the graphic screen for modification.
3. System Support: The contractor shall provide 1 year system support for all hardware and software in
the control system at no additional cost to the building owner. The system support service shall be
available 5 days per week between 9 am and 4 pm. During the 1 year system support period, the
23 09 23 – 4
MS0612
contractor shall maintain a duplicate set of building software on his support computer. At the owner's
option, software problems will be solved by verbal instruction, or on site correction by the contractor.
The number of system support calls shall be unlimited during the 1 year period.
B. Electrical and Electronic Devices
1. All electrical, electronic, and electro-pneumatic devices not located within an HVAC control panel shall
have an enclosure NEMA 1 in accordance with NEMA 250 unless otherwise shown.
2. Standard Signals: The output of all analog transmitters and the analog input and output of all singleloop controllers and function modules shall be 4-to-20 mAdc signals. The signal shall originate from
current-sourcing devices and shall be received by current-sinking devices.
C. Ambient Temperature Limits
1. Actuators and positive positioners, and transmitters shall operate within temperature limit ratings of
plus 35 to 150 degrees F. All panel-mounted instruments shall operate within limit ratings of 35 to 120
degrees F and 10 percent to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. All devices installed
outdoors shall operate within limit ratings of minus 35 to 150 degrees F.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Tubing
1. Copper: Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 and shall have sweat fittings and valves. Plastic
tubing shall have barbed fittings and valves. Plastic tubing shall have the burning characteristics of
linear low-density polyethylene tubing, shall be self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 635, shall have UL 94 V-2 flammability classification, and shall withstand stress cracking
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1693. Plastic-tubing bundles shall be provided with mylar
barrier and flame-retardant polyethylene jacket.
2. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A 269, and shall have stainless steel
compression fittings.
B. Wiring
1. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be insulated, modular, feed-through, clamp style with
recessed captive screw-type clamping mechanism, shall be suitable for rail mounting, and shall have
end plates and partition plates for separation or shall have enclosed sides.
2. Control Wiring for 24-Volt Circuits: Control wiring for 24-volt circuits shall be 18 AWG minimum and
shall be rated for 300-volt service.
3. Wiring for 120-Volt Circuits: Wiring for 120-volt circuits shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated
for 600-volt service.
4. Analog Signal Wiring Circuits: Analog signal wiring circuits within control panels shall not be less than
20 AWG and shall be rated for 300-volt service.
5. Instrumentation Cable: Instrumentation cable shall be 18 AWG, stranded copper, single or multipletwisted, minimum 2-inch lay of twist, 100% shielded pairs, and shall have a 300-volt insulation. Each
pair shall have a 20-AWG tinned-copper drain wire and individual overall pair insulation. Cables shall
have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20-AWG tinned-copper
cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation.
6. Non-conducting Wiring: Non-conducting wiring duct in control panels shall have slotted sides, snapon duct covers, fittings for connecting ducts, mounting clips for securing ducts, and wire-retaining
clips.
2.03
ACTUATORS
A. General Requirements: Actuators shall fail to their spring-return positions as shown on signal or power
failure and shall have a visible position indicator. Actuators shall open or close the devices to which they
are applied within 60 seconds after a full scale input signal change. Electric or electronic actuators
operating in parallel or in sequence shall have an auxiliary actuator driver. Actuators shall be electronic.
1. Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the motive power
necessary to operate against the pressure shown. The actuator stroke shall be limited by an
adjustable stop in the direction of power stroke. The actuators shall be provided with mounting and
connecting hardware.
2. Valve Actuators: Valve actuators shall be rated for at least 125 percent of the motive power
necessary to operate the valves over their full range of operation against the total and differential
pressures shown.
2.04
AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Valve Assembly: Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended necks to clear
the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall be designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150
23 09 23 – 5
MS0612
percent of the system operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve leakage rating shall be .01 percent
of rated Cv.
B. Butterfly-Valve Assembly: Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service, and
for modulation to the fully-closed position, with carbon-steel bodies and non-corrosive discs, stainless
steel shafts supported by bearings, and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees to
plus 250 degrees F. Valves shall have a manual means of operation independent of the actuator.
C. Two-Way Valves: Two-way modulating valves shall have equal-percentage characteristics.
D. Three-Way Valves: Three-way valves shall provide linear flow control with constant total flow throughout
full plug travel.
E. Duct-Coil and Terminal-Unit-Coil Valves: Control valves with flare-type ends shall be provided for duct or
terminal-unit coils. Flare nuts shall be furnished for each flare-type end valve.
F. Valves for Chilled-Water, Condenser-Water, and Glycol Service:
1. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends.
Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze or iron. Bodies for 2inch valves shall have threaded ends. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches shall have
flanged-end connections. Valve Cv shall be 100 percent to 110 percent of the Cv shown. Internal
valve trim shall be brass or bronze except that valve stems may be type 316 stainless steel.
2. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
G. Valves for Hot-Water Service Below 250 Degrees F:
1. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends.
Bodies for 2-inch valves shall have threaded ends. Bodies for valves 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches shall
have flanged-end connections. Valve Cv shall be 100 percent to 110 percent of the Cv shown.
2. Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulating plugs, and springs) of valves controlling water
hotter than 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze.
4. Nonmetallic parts of hot-water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating
temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is
higher.
5. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
2.05
DAMPERS
A. Damper Assembly
1. A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and shall be no higher than 72
inches. Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inches. Larger sizes shall be made from a
combination of sections. Dampers shall be steel, or other materials where shown. Flat blades shall
be made rigid by folding the edges. All blade-operating linkages shall be within the frame so that
blade-connecting devices within the same damper section will not be located directly in the air stream.
Damper axles shall be 0.5-inch (minimum) plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by
stainless steel or bronze bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.
Pressure drop through dampers shall not exceed 0.04 inch water gauge at 1,000 fpm in the wide-open
position. Frames shall not be less than 2 inches in width. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with
AMCA 500.
2. Operating links external to dampers (such as crankarms, connecting rods, and line shafting for
transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers) shall withstand a load equal to at least twice
the maximum required damper-operating force. Rod lengths shall be adjustable. Links shall be
brass, bronze, zinc-coated steel, or stainless steel. Working parts of joints and clevises shall be
brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
3. Adjustments of crankarms shall control the open and closed positions of dampers.
4. Modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade type and two-position dampers shall be parallel-blade
type.
B. Outside-Air, Return-Air, and Relief-Air Dampers: The dampers shall be as shown. Blades shall have
interlocking edges and shall be provided with compressible seals at points of contact. The channel
frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage. Dampers shall not leak
in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed. Seals shall be
suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Dampers shall be
23 09 23 – 6
MS0612
rated at not less than 2000 fpm air velocity.
C. Mechanical and Electrical Space Ventilation Dampers: The dampers shall be as shown. Dampers shall
not leak in excess of 80 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when closed.
Dampers shall be rated at not less than 1500 fpm air velocity.
D. Damper End Switches: Each end switch shall be a hermetically-sealed switch with a trip lever and overtravel mechanism. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting on the duct exterior and shall
permit setting the position of the trip lever that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the
damper blade.
2.06
SMOKE DETECTORS
A. FIRE DETECTING DEVICES: Fire detecting devices shall comply with the applicable requirements of
NFPA 72E, NFPA 90A, UL 268, and UL 521. The detectors shall be provided as indicated. Detector base
shall be detachable and have screw terminals for making connections. No solder connections will be
allowed. Detectors shall be connected into alarm initiating circuits. Installed devices shall conform to the
classification of the area. All fire detecting devices and or detector bases with the exception of flame
detectors shall be addressable and shall be dynamically supervised and uniquely identified in the control
panel.
1. Smoke Detectors: Detectors shall be designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities. Smoke
detectors shall be photoelectric type. Detectors shall contain a visible indicator LED that shows when
the unit is in alarm condition. Detectors shall not be adversely affected by vibration or pressure.
Detectors shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals for making all wiring
connections. Smoke detectors shall be addressable and remotely adjustable from the control panel.
a. Duct Detectors: Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed
where indicated. Units shall consist of a Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing
fitted with duct sampling tubes. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct
detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and shall be UL listed for use in
air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from
the fire alarm control panel. All LED'S to indicate the operation and alarm condition and the test
and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place.
Detector mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet shall be readily accessible.
Detectors shall have auxiliary contacts to provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions by the
fire alarm control panel. Duct detector shall be addressable and controlled by the fire alarm
control panel. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm vendor to ensure complete system
compatibility.
2.07
INSTRUMENTATION
A. Measurements: Transmitters shall be calibrated to provide the following measurements, over the
indicated ranges, for an output of 4 to 20 mAdc:
1. Conditioned space temperature, from 50 to 85 degrees F.
2. Duct temperature, from 40 to 140 degrees F except that return-air temperature for economizer
operation shall be minus 30 to plus 130 degrees F.
3. Chilled-water temperature, from 30 to 100 degrees F.
4. Heating hot-water temperature, from 100 to 250 degrees F.
5. Outside-air temperature, from minus 30 to 130 degrees F.
6. Relative humidity, 0 to 100 percent for high-limit applications; from 20 to 80 percent for space
applications.
7. Differential pressure for VAV supply-duct static pressure from 0 to 2.0 inches water gauge.
B. Temperature Instruments
1. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD): Each RTD shall be platinum with a tolerance of plus or
minus 0.1 percent at 32 degrees F, and shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,
anodized aluminum, or copper. Each RTD shall be furnished with an RTD transmitter as specified,
integrally-mounted unless otherwise shown.
a. Continuous-Averaging RTD: Continuous-averaging RTDs shall have a tolerance of plus or minus
1.0 degree F at the reference temperature, and shall be of sufficient length to ensure that the
resistance represents an average over the cross-section in which it is installed. The sensing
element shall have a bendable copper sheath. Each averaging RTD shall be furnished with an
RTD transmitter as specified, to match the resistance range of the averaging RTD.
b. RTD Transmitter: The RTD transmitter shall be selected to match the resistance range of the
RTD. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device. The transmitter shall produce a
linear 4-to-20 mAdc output corresponding to the required temperature measurement. The output
23 09 23 – 7
MS0612
error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of the calibrated measurement. The transmitter shall include
offset and span adjustments.
C. Relative-Humidity Instruments: Relative-humidity sensing element shall use non-saturating sensing
elements capable of withstanding a saturated condition without permanently affecting calibration or
sustaining damage. Sensing elements shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent of full scale
within the range of 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. A 2-wire, loop-powered transmitter located at the
sensing elements shall be provided to convert the sensing elements output to a linear 4-to-20 mAdc
output corresponding to the required humidity measurement. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, looppowered device. The output error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of calibrated measurement. The
transmitter shall include offset and span adjustments.
D. Pressure Instruments: The instrument shall be a pressure transmitter with an integral sensing element.
The instrument over pressure rating shall be 25 psig. The sensing elements accuracy shall be plus or
minus 2 percent of full scale. Transmitter accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.25 percent of the calibrated
measurement. The transmitter shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device. The transmitter shall produce a
linear 4-to-20 mAdc output corresponding to the required pressure measurement. Each transmitter shall
have offset and span adjustments.
E. Thermowells: Thermowells shall be Series 300 stainless steel with threaded brass plug and chain, 2-inch
lagging neck and extension-type well, and inside diameter and insertion length as required for the
application.
F. Sunshields: Sunshields for outside-air temperature sensing elements shall prevent the sun from directly
striking the temperature sensing elements. The sunshields shall be provided with adequate ventilation so
that the sensing element responds to the ambient temperature of the surroundings. The top of each
sunshield shall have a galvanized-metal rainshield projecting over the face of the sunshield. The
sunshields shall be painted white or shall be unpainted aluminum.
G. Water Flow Meters: Flow meter type shall be magnetic type unless drawings allow turbine or ultrasonic
types. All flow meters shall output a 4-20 ma signal. All meters shall have a flow range of 3 to 30 FPS.
Magnetic flow meters shall have an accuracy of 0.2% at 1.64 FPS velocity and have SCADA ready
outputs. Ultrasonic and turbine type meters shall have a +/- 2% accuracy.
H. Meters: Utility meters shall be provided with BACnet interface and a NIPR drop.
2.08
THERMOSTATS
A. Ranges: Thermostat ranges shall be selected so that the setpoint is adjustable without tools between plus
or minus 10 degrees F of the setpoint shown.
B. Space Low Limit Thermostats: Contacts shall be single-pole double-throw (SPDT), hermetically sealed,
and wired to identified terminals. Maximum differential shall be 2 degrees F unless otherwise specified.
Thermostat covers shall be made of locking metal or heavy-duty plastic, and shall be capable of being
locked by an allen-head wrench or a special tool. Thermostats shall have manual switches as required by
the application.
C. Low-Temperature-Protection Thermostats: Low-temperature-protection thermostats shall be manual
reset, low-temperature safety thermostats, with NO and NC contacts and a 20-foot element which shall
respond to the coldest 18-inch segment.
D. Standard Unit Heater and Exhaust Fan Thermostats: Thermostat contacts shall be SPDT and wired to
identified terminals. Thermostat housing shall be a NEMA 4X waterproof enclosure which will tolerate
continuous spraying with water, high humidity, and airborne contaminants. Temperature scale and
adjusting knob shall be mounted on the face of the thermostat such that setpoint adjustment can be made
without tools. Adjusting knob penetration shall be sealed with a lubricated 0-ring or other positive sealing
method to maintain the integrity of the enclosure. Temperature range of thermostats shall be 40 to 100
degrees F. Temperature differential shall be not greater than 3 degrees F. Contact rating shall be
sufficient to switch the connected load.
2.09
PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SOLENOID VALVES
A. Pressure Switches: Each switch shall have an adjustable setpoint with visible setpoint scale. Range shall
be as shown. Differential adjustment shall span 20 to 40 percent of the range of the device.
23 09 23 – 8
MS0612
B. Differential-Pressure Switches: Each switch shall be an adjustable diaphragm-operated device with 2
SPDT contacts, with taps for sensing lines to be connected to duct pressure fittings designed to sense air
pressure. These fittings shall be of the angled-tip type with tips pointing into the air stream. Range shall
be 0.5 to 6.0 inches water gauge. Differential shall be a maximum of 0.15 inch water gauge at the low end
of the range and 0.35 inch water gauge at the high end of the range.
2.10
INDICATING DEVICES
A. Thermometers
1. Ductwork Insertion and Piping Systems: Thermometers for insertion in ductwork and piping systems
shall have brass, malleable iron, or aluminum alloy case and frame, clear protective face, permanently
stabilized glass tube with indicating-fluid column, white face, black numbers, and a 9-inch scale.
2. Thermometers for piping systems shall have rigid stems with straight, angular, or inclined pattern, and
shall conform to FS GG-T-321.
3. Thermometer Stems: All thermometer stems shall have expansion heads as required to prevent
breakage at extreme temperatures. On rigid-stem thermometers, the space between bulb and stem
shall be filled with a heat-transfer medium.
4. Air-Duct Thermometers: Air-duct thermometers shall have perforated stem guards and 45-degree
adjustable duct flanges with locking mechanism.
5. Averaging Thermometers: Averaging thermometers shall have 3-1/2 inch (nominal) dial, with black
legend on white background, and pointer traveling through a 270-degree arc.
6. Accuracy: Thermometers shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
Thermometers shall have the following ranges:
a. Mixed-air temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
b. Return-air temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
c. Cooling-coil-discharge temperature: 0 to 100 degrees F in 1-degree F graduations.
d. Heating-coil-discharge temperature: 30 to 180 degrees F in 2-degree F graduations.
e. Hydronic-heating systems below 220 degrees F: 40 to 240 degrees F in 2-degree graduations.
B. Pressure Gauges: Gauges shall have black legend on white, background, and shall have a pointer
traveling through a 270-degree arc. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 3 percent of scale range. Gauges
shall meet ANSI B40.1.
1. Hydronic-System Applications: Gauges for hydronic-system applications shall be 4-1/2 inch (nominal)
size and have ranges and graduations as shown below.
a. Pump Suction - 30 psi range, 1 psi graduations, 5 psi figure interval.
b. Pump Discharge - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
c. Coil Supply - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
d. Coil Return - 30 psi range, 1 psi graduations, 5 psi figure interval.
e. Chiller Inlet and Outlet - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
f. Boiler Inlet and Outlet - 60 psi range, 2 psi graduations, 10 psi figure interval.
2. Low Differential Pressure Gauges: Gauges for low differential-pressure measurements shall be 4-1/2
inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps, and shall have a diaphragm-actuated pointer, white
dial with black figures, and pointer zero adjustment. Gauges shall have ranges and graduations as
shown. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of scale range.
2.11
CONTROL DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Relays: Relays shall be 2-pole, double-throw (2PDT) with a 10-ampere resistive rating at 120 Vac, and
shall have an enclosed 120-Vac coil with 11-pin blade connectors, and a matching rail-mounted socket.
Power consumption shall not be greater than 3 watts.
B. Time-Delay Relays: Time delay relays shall be 2PDT with 8-pin connectors, dust cover, and a matching
rail-mounted socket. Adjustable timing range shall be 0 to 5 minutes. Power consumption shall not be
greater than 3 watts.
C. Regulated Power Supplies: Each power supply shall provide a 24-Vdc linear supply at not less than 2
amperes, with regulation to 0.05 percent of output voltage. Each power supply shall have a fused input,
and shall be protected from voltage surges and power-line transients. The power supply output shall be
protected against overvoltage and short circuits. Power supply loading shall not be greater than 1.2
amperes.
2.12
PILOT LIGHTS AND MANUAL SWITCHES
A. Pilot Lights, Illuminated Switches, and Non-illuminated Switches: Pilot lights, illuminated switches, and
non-illuminated switches shall be rectangular devices arranged in a horizontal matrix as shown. Switch
action shall be as shown. Device illumination shall be by light-emitting diode lamp or by neon lamp.
23 09 23 – 9
MS0612
B. Manual Timed Override Switches: Manual timed override switches shall be spring-wound mechanical
type, with timer range as specified on the drawings. Switches shall be furnished with a faceplate with time
intervals permanently etched or engraved in the faceplate at the time of manufacture. Timer knob shall
have a pointer to indicate setting position. Switches shall be suitable for mounting in a standard 2" x 4"
outlet box. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amp resistive load at 125 volts. Switches shall be UL listed.
2.13
HVAC SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS
A. Panel Assembly: The panel shall be fabricated as shown, and the devices shall be mounted as shown.
Each panel shall be fabricated as a bottom-entry connection point for control-system electric power,
control-system main air source, control-system wiring, pneumatic tubing, interconnection of control
systems, interconnection of starters and external shutdown devices, and energy monitoring and control
systems (EMCS) interface. Each panel shall have an operating temperature rise of not greater than 20
degrees F above an ambient temperature of 100 degrees F.
B. Panel Electrical Requirements: Each control panel shall be powered by nominal 120 volts ac terminating
at the panel on terminal blocks. Instrument cases shall be grounded. Interior panel, interior door, and
exterior panel enclosure shall be grounded.
C. Enclosure: The enclosure for each panel shall be a NEMA 12 single-door wall-mounted box conforming
to NEMA 250, with continuous hinged and gasketed exterior door with print pocket and key lock,
continuous hinged interior door, interior back panel, and ventilation louvers in back surface as shown.
Inside finish shall be white enamel, and outside finish shall be gray primer over phosphatized surfaces.
D. Mounting and Labeling: Controllers, pilot lights and switches, shall be mounted on the interior door as
shown. Power conditioner, fuses and duplex outlet shall be mounted on the interior of the cabinet as
shown. All other components housed in the panel shall be mounted on the interior back panel surface of
the enclosure, behind the door on rails as shown. Controllers and gauges shall be identified by a plastic
or metal nameplate that is mechanically attached to the panel. The nameplate shall have the inscription
as shown. Lettering shall be cut or stamped into the nameplate to a depth of not less than 1/64 inch, and
shall show a contrasting color, produced by filling with enamel or lacquer or by the use of a laminated
material. Painting of lettering directly on the surface of the interior door or panel is not permitted.
E. Wiring and Tubing
1. Wiring Interconnections: Wiring shall be installed in wiring ducts in such a way that devices can be
added or replaced without disturbing wiring that is not affected by the change. Wiring to single-loop
controllers shall have a 4-inch wiring loop in the horizontal wiring duct at each wiring connection.
There shall be no wiring splices within the control panel. All interconnections required for power or
signals shall be made on device terminals or panel terminal blocks, with not more than 2 wires
connected to a terminal.
2. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be arranged in groups as shown. Instrument signal grounds
at the same ground reference level shall end at a grounding terminal for connection to a common
ground point. Wiring-shield grounds at the same reference level shall end at a grounding terminal for
connection to a common ground point. Grounding terminal blocks shall be identified by reference
level.
3. Wiring Identification: All wiring connected to controller shall be identified by function and polarity, i.e.,
process variable, input, remote setpoint input and output.
F. EMCS Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be provided for connections to EMCS as shown. Analog
signals shall require only the removal of jumpers to interface to EMCS.
2.14
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLS
A. VAV Terminal Units:
B. Terminal-Unit Controls
1. Vav Box Controller: Controls for pressure-independent boxes shall consist of a velocity- sensing
device in the primary air entering the box, a room temperature sensing element, a damper actuator, a
duct temperature sensor, and an adjustable microprocessor-based VAV box controller. Each
controller shall operate a damper for cooling and, if required, a duct coil valve for heating. Actuators
shall open and close the device to which it is applied within 6 minutes. The controller shall be
compatible with the existing Schneider Electric I/A Network 8000 EMCS system. The controller shall
be capable of reading cfm, duct temperature, room temperature, cooling setpoint, and damper
position. Terminal unit controls shall have the requirements of UL 916 and FCC Part 15.
23 09 23 – 10
MS0612
2. Communication-and-Programming Device: One hand-held communication-and-programming device
with instruction manuals shall be provided. The communication-and-programming device shall
connect to the VAV box controller directly or to a jack at the room temperature sensing element
location. The communication-and-programming device shall be used to read and set minimum
velocity, maximum velocity, cooling setpoint, and space temperature.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION CRITERIA: The HVAC control system shall be completely installed and
ready for operation, as specified and shown. Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals
are used for connection and support. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exterior
shall be made watertight. The HVAC control-system installation shall provide clearance for control-system
maintenance by maintaining access space between coils, access space to mixed-air plenums, and other
access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace control-system devices. The control-system
installation shall not interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system
maintenance.
A. Device-Mounting Criteria: Devices mounted in or on piping or ductwork, on building surfaces, in
mechanical/electrical spaces, or in occupied space ceilings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and as shown. Control devices to be installed in piping and ductwork
shall be provided with all required gaskets, flanges, thermal compounds, insulation, piping, fittings, and
manual valves for shutoff, equalization, purging, and calibration. Strap-on temperature sensing elements
shall not be used except as specified.
B. Wiring Criteria: Wiring external to control panels, including low-voltage wiring, shall be installed in metallic
raceways. Wiring shall be installed without splices between control devices and HVAC control panels.
Instrumentation grounding shall be installed as necessary to prevent ground loops, noise, and surges from
adversely affecting operation of the system. Cables and conductors wires shall be tagged at both ends,
with the identifier shown on the shop drawings, in accordance with the requirements shown in the
electrical division of this specification. Other electrical work shall be as specified in applicable sections of
the electrical division of this specification
C. Controller Output Loop Impedance Limitation: Controller output loops shall be constructed so that total
circuit impedance connected to the analog output of a single-loop controller shall not exceed 600 ohms.
3.02
CONTROL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Damper Actuators
1. Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream.
2. Multiple actuators operating a common damper shall be connected to a common drive shaft.
3. Actuators shall be installed so that their action shall seal the damper to the extent required to maintain
leakage at or below the specified rate and shall move the blades smoothly.
B. Room-Instrument Mounting: Room instruments shall be mounted so that their sensing elements are 5
feet above the finished floor unless otherwise shown.
C. Low-Temperature-Protection Thermostats: For each 20 square feet of coil-face area, or fraction thereof,
a thermostat shall be provided to sense the temperature at the location shown. The thermostat sensing
element shall be installed in a serpentine pattern.
D. Averaging-Temperature Sensing Elements: Sensing elements shall have a total-element minimum length
equal to one linear foot per square foot of duct cross-sectional area.
E. Duct Static-Pressure Sensing Elements and Transmitters: The duct static-pressure sensing element and
transmitter sensing point shall be located approximately two-thirds of the distance from the supply fan to
the end of the duct with the greatest pressure drop.
F. Indication Devices Installed in Piping and Liquid Systems: Gauges in piping systems subject to pulsation
shall have snubbers. Thermometers and temperature sensing elements installed in liquid systems shall
be installed in thermowells.
G. Tubing
1. Control System Installation: The control system shall be installed so that pneumatic lines are not
23 09 23 – 11
MS0612
2.
3.
4.
5.
exposed to outside-air temperatures. All tubes and tube bundles exposed to view shall be installed
neatly in lines parallel to the lines of the building. Tubing in mechanical/electrical spaces shall be
routed so that the lines are easily traceable.
Pneumatic Lines: In mechanical/electrical spaces, pneumatic lines shall be plastic tubing or copper
tubing. Horizontal and vertical runs of plastic tubes or soft copper tubes shall be installed in raceways
dedicated to tubing. The dedicated raceways shall be supported every 6 feet for horizontal runs and
every 8 feet for vertical runs. Tubing not installed in raceways shall be hard-drawn copper tubing with
sweat fittings and valves, supported every 6 feet for horizontal runs and every 8 feet for vertical runs.
Connection to Liquid Lines: Tubing for connection of sensing elements and transmitters to liquid lines
shall be copper with brass compression fittings.
Connection to Ductwork: Tubing for connection of sensing elements and transmitters to ductwork
shall be plastic tubing.
External Tubing: Tubing external to mechanical/electrical spaces, when run in plenum ceilings, shall
be soft copper with sweat fittings, supported every 8 feet. Tubing not in plenum spaces shall be soft
copper with sweat fittings supported every 8 feet or shall be plastic tubing in raceways dedicated to
tubing.
3.03
CONTROL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. General Requirements: These requirements shall apply to all primary HVAC systems unless modified
herein. The sequences describe the actions of the control system for one direction of change in the
HVAC process analog variable, such as temperature, humidity or pressure. The reverse sequence shall
occur when the direction of change is reversed.
1. HVAC System Sequences of Operation: HVAC system sequences of operation shall be as shown on
the drawings and as specified herein.
3.04
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
A. General Procedure
1. Evaluations: The Contractor shall make the observations, adjustments, calibrations, measurements,
and tests of the control systems, tune the controllers, set the clock schedule, and make any necessary
control-system corrections to ensure that the systems function as described in the Sequence of
Operation. The Contractor shall permanently record, on system equipment schedule, the final setting
of controller proportional, integral and derivative constant settings, setpoint, manual reset setting,
maximum and minimum controller output, and ratio and bias settings, in units and terminology specific
to the controller.
2. Item Check: An item-by-item check of the Sequence of Operation requirement shall be performed
using Steps 1 through 4 in the specified Control System Commissioning Procedures. Steps 1, 2, and
3 shall be performed with the HVAC system shut down; Step 4 shall be performed after the HVAC
systems have been started. Signals used to change the mode of operation shall originate from the
actual HVAC control device intended for the purpose, such as the time clock. External input signals to
the HVAC control panel (such as EMCS, starter auxiliary contacts, and external systems) may be
simulated in Steps 1, 2, and 3. With each operational-mode change signal, observe that the proper
pilot lights and HVAC-panel output-relay contacts function. Check all terminals assigned to EMCS
and observe that the proper signals are available.
3. Weather-Dependent Test Procedures: Weather-dependent test procedures that cannot be performed
by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate climatic season. When simulation is used, the
Contractor shall verify the actual results in the appropriate season.
4. Configuration: The Contractor shall configure each controller for its specified service.
5. Two-Point Accuracy Check: A two-point accuracy check of the calibration of each HVAC controlsystem sensing element and transmitter shall be performed by comparing the HVAC control-panel
readout to the actual value of the variable measured at the sensing element and transmitter or air-flow
measurement station location. Digital indicating test instruments shall be used, such as digital
thermometers, motor-driven psychrometers, and tachometers. The test instruments shall be at least
twice as accurate as the specified sensing element-to-controller readout accuracy. The calibration of
the test instruments shall be traceable to NBS standards. The first check point shall be with the
HVAC system in the shutdown condition, and the second check point shall be with the HVAC system
in an operational condition. Calibration checks shall verify that the sensing element-to-controller
readout accuracies at two points are within the specified product accuracy tolerances. If not,
recalibrate or replace the inaccurate device and repeat the calibration check.
6. Insertion, Immersion Temperature Sensing Element: Insertion-temperature and immersiontemperature sensing element and transmitter-to-controller readout calibration accuracy shall be
checked at one physical location along the axis of the sensing element.
7. Averaging-Temperature: Averaging-temperature-sensing element and transmitter-to-controller
readout calibration accuracy shall be checked every 2 feet along the axis of the sensing element in
23 09 23 – 12
MS0612
the proximity of the sensing element, for a maximum of 10 readings. These readings shall then be
averaged.
3.05
TESTING, COMMISSIONING, AND COORDINATION WITH HVAC BALANCING
A. Site Testing: The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies
necessary to perform all site testing, calibration, adjusting and commissioning. Wiring shall be tested for
continuity and for ground, open, and short circuits. Tubing systems shall be tested for leaks. HVAC
control panels shall be pretested off-site as a functioning assembly ready for field connections, calibration,
adjustment, and commissioning of the operational HVAC control system. The Contractor shall obtain
written Government approval of the specific site-testing procedures prior to any test. Written notification of
any planned site-testing, commissioning or tuning shall be given to the Government at least 14 calendar
days prior to any test.
B. Control System Calibration, Adjustments, and Commissioning:
1. Calibrate all instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using test equipment with
calibration traceable to NIST standards.
2. Mechanical control devices shall be adjusted to operate as specified.
3. Control system commissioning shall be performed for each HVAC system.
C. Performance Verification Test: The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance of the HVAC control system
with the contract documents. Using test plans and procedures previously approved by the Government,
the Contractor shall demonstrate all physical and functional requirements of the project. The performance
verification test procedures shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results that will
demonstrate that the control systems perform in accordance with the sequences of operation. The
performance verification test shall not be started until after receipt by the Contractor of written permission
by the Government, based on the Contractor's written certification of successful completion of Contractor
site testing as specified.
D. Coordination with HVAC System Balancing: The Contractor shall tune the controllers after all air-system
and hydronic-system balancing has been completed, minimum damper positions set and a report has
been issued. Commissioning, except for tuning of controllers, shall be performed simultaneous with
HVAC system balancing. The control subcontractor shall be responsible for placing all systems and
subsystems in the correct mode during the performance of HVAC testing and balancing.
E. Posted Instructions: Instructions on 8-1/2 by 11 inch sheets and half-size plastic laminated drawings for
each system showing the final installed conditions shall be placed in each HVAC control panel. The
posted instructions shall include the control sequence, control schematic, ladder diagram, wiring diagram,
valve schedules, damper schedules, panel arrangement drawings, commissioning procedures, controller
configuration check sheet with final configuration record, preventive maintenance instructions and singleloop controller operators manual. Additionally, half-size drawings showing the mechanical floor plan duct
distribution and VAV box location shall be posted in each mechanical room.
3.06
TRAINING
A. Training-Course Requirements: A training course shall be conducted for 6 operating staff members
designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period, for a total of 32 hours of normal working time,
shall be conducted within 30 days after successful completion of the performance verification test. The
Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all audiovisual equipment and 6 sets of all other training
materials and supplies. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction, including two 15minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the
training facility. The Contractor shall submit an outline for the course, with a proposed time schedule.
Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 30 days prior to
the start of the training.
B. Training-Course Content: For guidance in planning the required instruction, the Contractor should
assume that attendees will have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar with HVAC
systems. The training course shall cover all of the material contained in the Operating and Maintenance
Instructions, the layout and location of each HVAC control panel, the layout of one of each type of unitary
equipment and the locations of each, the location of each system-control device external to the panels,
preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, calibration, adjustment, commissioning, tuning, and
repair procedures. Typical systems and similar systems may be treated as a group, with instruction on the
physical layout of one such system. The results of the performance verification test and the calibration,
adjustment and commissioning report shall be presented as benchmarks of HVAC control-system
performance by which to measure operation and maintenance effectiveness.
23 09 23 – 13
MS0612
3.07
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under this section to assure
compliance with contract requirements and maintain records of his quality control for materials,
equipment, and construction operations.
END OF SECTION
23 09 23 – 14
MS0612
SECTION 23 31 00:
PART 1
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork.
B. Casings.
C. Kitchen hood ductwork.
D. Duct cleaning.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook Fundamentals; Chapter 34 - Duct Design.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook HVAC Systems and Equipment; Chapter 16 - Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A90/A90M – Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc
or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
D. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
E. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Allow-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
G. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
I.
NFPA 96 - Standard for the Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooling Operations.
J.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
K. SMACNA – HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
L. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit results of duct leakage testing.
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards.
1.06
QUALTIY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.
B. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, G90 zinc coating
in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.
23 31 00 – 1
MS0612
C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock:
Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Polyester film supported by helical-wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation;
aluminized vapor barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1 inches wg negative.
2.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: 0 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
4.
Thermal Resistance: 6.0 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
E. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone
or with tape, or heavy mastic.
H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.02
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and
sealing for operating pressures indicated. If not indicated otherwise, supply and return duct and ductwork
downstream of VAV boxes shall be constructed to 1” pressure classification with a seal class C and a
leakage classification of 24 for rectangular ducts and 12 for round ducts. Ductwork upstream of VAV
boxes shall be constructed to 2” pressure classification, unless otherwise noted, with a seal class C and a
leakage classification of 24 for rectangular ducts and 12 for round ducts. Ductwork indicated to be
constructed to a pressure class of 3” shall be constructed with a seal class B and a leakage classification
of 12 for rectangular ducts and 6 for round ducts. Ductwork indicated to be constructed to a pressure
class of 4”, 6” or 10” shall be constructed with a seal class A and a leakage classification of 6 for
rectangular ducts and 3 for round ducts.
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written
permission.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical
lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence
upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45
degrees.
E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements
exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus draw bands.
G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in
SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inches cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded
joints.
I.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye
takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
2.03
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel.
23 31 00 – 2
MS0612
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 60 inches
62 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
2.04
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct constructed of galvanized steel;
rated for 10 inches wg pressure.
B. Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 24 inches
25 inches to 48 inches
50 inches to 70 inches
72 inches to 82 inches
84 inches and larger
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
D. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
Gauge
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
2.05
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations,
galvanized steel outer wall, 1 inch thick glass fiber insulation (0.27 Btu/hr/ft2/°F), perforated galvanized
steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
15 inches to 26 inches
28 inches to 36 inches
38 inches to 50 inches
52 inches to 60 inches
62 inches to 84 inches
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
23 31 00 – 3
MS0612
2.06
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct with light reinforcing corrugations,
galvanized steel outer wall, 1 inch thick glass fiber insulation (0.27 Btu/hr/ft2/°F), perforated galvanized
steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
B. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
7 inches to 24 inches
25 inches to 48 inches
50 inches to 70 inches
72 inches to 82 inches
84 inches and larger
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
C. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
Gauge
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
2.07
DOUBLE WALL DUCT, EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS
A. All ductwork located outside the building shall be factory doublewall ductwork and it shall be sealed
watertight.
B. The double wall duct shall be 2” thick and internally insulated with a minimum of 2” thick, 1.75 pounds per
cubic foot glass fiber insulation.
C. The ductwork shall be round, flat oval or rectangular as indicated on the drawings.
D. Ductwork interior and exterior wall shall be factory fabricated from aluminum in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC duct construction standards. Ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA standards.
2.08
CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and construct for
operating pressures indicated.
B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to
angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal
mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install
hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection.
D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing and 22 gage
perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick
packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.
2.09
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and NFPA 96.
B. Exposed Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Construct of stainless steel ASTM A167, type 304 using
continuous external welded joints.
C. Concealed Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Construct of 16 gage carbon steel or 18 gage stainless steel
ASTM A167, type 304 using continuous external welded joints.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide
pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or
23 31 00 – 4
MS0612
screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation
material inside a metal ring.
B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
C. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door
in closed position.
D. Connect terminal units directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct
to change direction.
E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or
clamp.
F. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for cleanout.
Use stainless steel or painted galvanized steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or
galvanized steel for ducts where concealed.
G. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
H. All exposed spiral round or flat oval duct shall be double wall insulated duct.
I.
Exposed ductwork shall be painted to match ceiling, roof structure, or as otherwise specified.
J.
The ductwork shall have balance dampers where the branch ducts connect to main trunk.
3.02
DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply Air
Steel, Aluminum
Return and Relief
Steel, Aluminum
General Exhaust
Steel, Aluminum
Kitchen Hood Exhaust
Steal, Stainless Steel
Dishwasher Exhaust
Stainless Steel
Fume Hood Exhaust
Stainless Steel
Outside Air Intake
Steel
Combustion Air
Steel
Exterior Ductwork
Aluminum
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain
sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt
with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
3.04
TESTING
A. A leakage test shall be made of ductwork in each pressure classification, to demonstrate adequacy of
construction tightness. Each section shall incorporate at least: 5 transverse joints, typical seams, one
elbow, one fire damper, one access door, and 2 typical branch connections. Leakage testing shall be
performed in accordance with sections 3 and 5 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
Leakage in each type ductwork shall not exceed leakage classes identified in paragraphs 2.02A and
2.03A above. Test shall be witnessed by the contract inspector and test results submitted for approval.
23 31 00 – 5
MS0612
END OF SECTION
23 31 00 – 6
MS0612
SECTION 23 33 00:
PART 1
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Volume control dampers.
B. Fire dampers.
C. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
D. Backdraft dampers.
E. Air turning devices.
F. Flexible duct connections.
G. Duct access doors.
H. Duct test holes.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 – Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. NFPA 92A – Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
F. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
G. UL 555C – Safety for Ceiling Dampers.
H. UL 555S – Safety for Smoke Dampers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two
gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.
C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with
continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint
action flanged bushing with set screw.
D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches.
E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inches.
Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable
hardware.
23 33 00 – 1
MS0612
F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers,
provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
I.
Outside air damper leakage shall be a maximum of 3 CFM per square foot. Damper leakage shall be
tested in accordance with AMCA 500.
2.02
FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 92A, UL 555, UL555S, UL555C and as indicated.
B. Fabricate ceiling firestop flaps of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch
ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.
C. Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and light
weight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket closure.
D. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel
closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for
low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in height.
E. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated
bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed
linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
F. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination
fire/balancing dampers.
2.03
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18/x/18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be
air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage galvanized steel, or
extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked
together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;
adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.04
AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually
adjustable blades, and mounting straps.
B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum
construction, with push-pull operator strap.
2.05
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per
sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.
2.06
DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.
B. Duct access doors shall be provided at all fire dampers and duct mounted mechanical equipment.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking
devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
23 33 00 – 2
MS0612
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional
hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.07
DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded
plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide
extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide balancing dampers where indicated and at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust
systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Contractor shall
provide and install as many balancing dampers as required for proper balancing of the air system
regardless of whether they are shown on the drawings. All dampers shown on the drawings shall be
provided. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
C. Provide balancing dampers on medium and high pressure systems where indicated.
D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components.
Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant
springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.
F. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment.
H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access,
18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, or as indicated.
I.
Provide duct test holes where indicated or required for testing and balancing purposes.
END OF SECTION
23 33 00 – 3
MS0612
SECTION 23 34 00:
PART 1
HVAC FANS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Roof exhausters.
B. Wall exhausters.
C. Cabinet exhaust fans.
D. Ceiling exhaust fans.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
D. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
E. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
F. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.
G. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
D. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705.
E. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data.
B. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
C. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
ROOF EXHAUSTERS
23 34 00 – 1
MS0612
A. Centrifugal or Axial Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with galvanized steel prefinished in baked-on enamel
housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screen; square base to suit roof
curb with continuous curb gaskets; secured with cadmium plated bolts and screws.
B. Roof Curb: 12 - 16 inch high with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strip, one inch insulation and
curb bottom, and factory installed door nailer strip.
C. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor.
D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity activated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon
bearings.
E. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable
pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with
self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
2.02
WALL EXHAUSTERS
A. Centrifugal or Axial Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with spun aluminum housing; resiliently mounted
motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screen; secured with cadmium plated bolts and screws.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor.
C. Backdraft Damper: Gravity activated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon
bearings.
D. Sheaves: For V-belt drives, provide cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed;
variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at
mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
2.03
CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS
A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic
insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor.
C. Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel finish.
D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable
pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with
self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure roof exhausters with lag screws to roof curb.
C. All exterior roof mounted or wall mounted supply or exhaust fan including any curbs or flashing shall be
painted to match the adjacent surfaces.
D. When an exhaust fan is mounted in a ceiling tile or in a suspended ceiling system the fan shall be
supported independently from the ceiling tile or ceiling grid.
END OF SECTION
23 34 00 – 2
MS0612
SECTION 23 37 00:
PART 1
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Diffusers.
B. Diffuser boots.
C. Registers/grilles.
D. Door grilles.
E. Louvers.
F. Roof hoods.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
C. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 90A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data.
B. Provide product data for items required for this project.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular, stamped, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern.
B. Provide surface mount or inverted T-bar type frame. Face is to be 24"x24" when mounted in suspended
ceilings.
C. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from
diffuser face.
2.02
CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, 4-way
deflection. To be install only where indicated.
23 37 00 – 1
MS0612
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
2.03
CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade
dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
2.04
WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch maximum spacing with
spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, double deflection.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
E. In gymnasiums, blades shall be front pivoted, welded in place or securely fastened to be immobile.
2.05
WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing, with spring or other device to set blades,
horizontal face.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with
20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade
dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.
E. In gymnasiums, blades shall be front pivoted, welded in place, or securely fastened to be immobile.
2.06
DOOR GRILLES
A. V-shaped louvers of 20 gage steel, one inch deep on 1/2 inch centers.
B. Provide 20 gage steel frame with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both sides of door, with
factory finish. Color to be selected by government from standard manufacturer’s colors (minimum 9
colors).
2.07
LOUVERS
A. Provide 6 inch deep, storm type louvers with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame, bird screen
with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake. Provide insect screens on intake louvers.
B. Fabricate of 12 gage extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish to facilitate field
painting. Louvers are to be factory painted standard color to match adjacent surfaces as closely as
possible, unless otherwise directed.
2.08
ROOF HOODS
A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage base and 20 gage hood, or aluminum, minimum 16 gage
23 37 00 – 2
MS0612
base and 18 gage hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; bird screen with 1/2 inch square mesh
for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake, and factory coated to match color of roof panels, unless otherwise
directed. Provide insect screens on intake louvers.
C. Mount unit on minimum 12 inch high curb base with insulation between duct and curb.
D. Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and as indicated on drawings.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
F. Where louvers and grilles are to be installed in existing openings, contractor shall verify dimensions prior
to ordering.
G. Install louvers and grilles plumb and level.
H. Grilles installed in exterior soffits shall be painted to match the color of soffit.
I.
When diffusers or grilles are cut into a ceiling tile, the diffuser or grille shall be supported independently of
the ceiling tile.
END OF SECTION
23 37 00 – 3
MS0612
SECTION 23 81 26:
PART 1
SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Split-system heat pumps.
B. Controls.
C. Refrigerant piping.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ARI DCUAC - Directory of Certified Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment
B. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment
C. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
D. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment
E. ASHRAE 15&34 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
F. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General
Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter
G. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by
Particle Size
H. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
I.
ASME/ANSI B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
J.
ASME/ANSI B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
K. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
L. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
M. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
N. ASTM B 280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service
O. ASTM D 1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
P. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
Q. FS OO-A-374 - Air Conditioners with Remote Condensing Units or Remote Air-Cooled, and Water-Cooled
Condenser Units, Unitary
R. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture
S. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
T. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements
U. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
V. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators
W. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
23 81 26 – 1
MS0612
X. UL 109 - Tube Fittings for Flammable and Combustible Fluids, Refrigeration Service, and Marine Use
Y. UL 900 - Air Filter Units
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data on air conditioners, filters, and refrigerant piping and
accessories.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating refrigerant piping, including pipe sizes, and control system wiring
diagrams.
C. Manufacturer’s installation instructions on air conditioners, filters, and refrigerant piping and accessories.
D. Factory salt-spray test reports.
E. P-413 Baked Phenolic Coating (Heresite Coating) reports.
F. Field test reports on start-up and initial operation.
G. Submit posted operating instructions for each packaged air conditioning unit.
H. Submittals shall be made under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.04
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance
and repair data, and parts listing.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accomplish work in accordance with the referenced publications, except as modified by this section.
Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been
substituted for the words "should" or "could" or "may," wherever they appear. Interpret reference to "the
Authority having jurisdiction," "the Administrative Authority," "the Owner," or "the Design Engineer" to
mean the Contracting Officer.
B. Design, manufacture, and installation of unitary air conditioning equipment shall conform to ASHRAE
15&34.
C. Test and rate heat pumps in accordance with ARI 210/240 or ARI 340/360 as appropriate.
D. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum cooling mode efficiency prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 or
as indicated on the drawings, whichever is more stringent, when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240 or
ARI 340/360 as appropriate.
E. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum heating mode efficiency prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 or
as indicated on the drawings, whichever is more stringent, when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240 or
ARI 340/360 as appropriate.
F. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
HEAT PUMPS
A. Split-System Type: FS OO-A-374, except as modified herein; Type II, Class 2. Additional requirements
for various system components are specified in this paragraph; however, basic requirements for the
system and system components are contained in FS OO-A-374. Provide separate assemblies designed
to be used together. Base ratings on the use of matched assemblies. Provide performance diagrams for
units with capacities not certified by ARI to verify that components of the air conditioning system furnished
will satisfy the capacity requirement specified or indicated. Minimum energy efficiency shall be in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 or as indicated on the drawings, whichever is more stringent. List units
23 81 26 – 2
MS0612
with capacities smaller than 135,000 Btu/hr in the ARI DCUAC; in lieu of listing in the ARI Directory, a
letter of certification from ARI that units have been certified and will be listed in the next Directory will be
acceptable. Provide capacity, electrical characteristics and operating conditions as indicated.
Condensers shall provide not less than 10 degrees F liquid subcooling at standard ratings. Phase loss
and low voltage safety monitor shall automatically stop the unit whenever a phase is lost, phases are outof-sequence, or when voltage level drops too low. Restart is automatic, with time delay when proper
power supply conditions are restored. Indoor Unit shall be provided with condensate overflow switch.
B. Single Zone Units: Provide single zone type units arranged to draw or blow through coil sections. Air may
be blown or drawn through heating section.
C. Heaters: Provide as an integral part of the evaporator-blower unit. Provide electric heating coils as
scheduled.
D. Compressors: For compressors over 20 tons, compressor speed shall not exceed 3450 rpm. For
systems over 10 tons provide automatic capacity reduction of at least 50 percent of rated capacity.
Capacity reduction may be accomplished by cylinder unloading, use of multi- or variable speed
compressors, use of multiple, but not more than four compressors, or a combination of the two methods.
Units with cylinder unloading shall start with capacity reduction devices in the unloaded position. Units
with multiple compressors shall have means to sequence starting of compressors. Provide compressors
with devices to prevent short cycling when shut down by safety controls. Device shall delay operation of
compressor motor for at least 3 minutes but not more than 6 minutes. Provide a pumpdown cycle for
units 20 tons and over. Provide scroll compressors using R-410a refrigerant or refrigerant as indicated on
the drawings, whichever has the lowest Global Warming Potential (GWP), with crankcase heaters in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If compressors are paralleled, provide not less
than two independent circuits.
E. Coils: Provide copper tube, aluminum finned outdoor coils. Provide a separate air cooled condenser
circuit for each compressor or parallel compressor installation. Provide plate type fins. Provide P-413
Baked phenolic coating or equivalent on condenser coil.
F. Condenser Controls: Provide start-up and head pressure controls to allow for system operation at
ambient temperatures down to 15 degrees F.
G. Fans: Provide belt-driven evaporator fans with adjustable pitch pulleys; except for units less than 5-ton
capacity, direct drive with at least two speed taps may be used. Select pulleys at approximately midpoint
of the adjustable range.
H. Filters: Provide filters of the type specified in this section.
I.
Filter Boxes: Provide when filters are not included integral with air conditioning units. Construct of not less
than No. 20 US gage steel with track, hinged access doors with latches, and gaskets between frame and
filters. Arrange filters to filter outside and return air. Provide removable filter assemblies, replaceable
without the use of tools.
J.
Mixing Boxes: Provide of the physical size to match the basic unit and include equal sized flanged
openings, sized to individually handle full air flow. Arrange openings as indicated.
2.02
SINGLE ZONE DUCTLESS MINI-SPLIT HEAT PUMPS
A. The Ductless Mini-Split Heat Pump system shall be a split system with Variable Speed Inverter
Compressor technology. The system shall consist of a wall mounted or ceiling cassette indoor section
as indicated on drawings with wired, wall mounted controller and a horizontal discharge, single phase
outdoor unit.
B, Indoor Unit
1. Indoor Unit Cabinet: The indoor unit cabinet shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied
mounting plate or ceiling cassette mounted type as indicated on the drawings. The cabinet shall have
front panel access for filter. Ceiling cassette units shall be provided with factory trim kit including the
mounting kit, condensate pump with alarm, and outside air duct accessory. The indoor unit shall be
factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal
piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted
controller shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart
23 81 26 – 3
MS0612
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen
before shipment from the factory. Indoor Unit shall be provided with condensate overflow switch.
Indoor Fan: The evaporator fan(s) shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive
fan with a single motor. The fan(s) shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor
with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of a minimum of (3) three speeds.
Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and
downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease
downward air resistance for lower noise levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is
stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement
selected by remote control.
Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter.
Coil: The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum strake fins on
copper tubing. The multi-angled heat exchanger shall have a modified fin shape that reduces air
resistance for a smoother, quieter airflow. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver
alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided
under the coil.
Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The
system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The
power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit.
Control: The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored and after power
interruption. The system shall have self-diagnostics ability. Diagnostic codes for indoor and outdoor
units shall be displayed on the wired controller panel.
C. Outdoor Unit: The outdoor unit shall be compatible with the indoor unit. The connected indoor unit must be
of the same capacity as the outdoor unit. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with a control board that
interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation functions. The outdoor unit shall be
capable of operating at 0°F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. The outdoor unit
shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet between indoor and outdoor units.
The outdoor unit shall be pre-charged for a maximum of 70 feet of refrigerant tubing. The outdoor unit
shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory.
1. Outdoor Unit Casing: The outdoor unit casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, coated
with a finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for
corrosion protection finish.
2. Fan: Outdoor unit shall be furnished with an AC fan motor. The fan motor shall be of aerodynamic
design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. The outdoor
unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air
across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised
guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
3. Condenser Coil: The L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to
reduce debris build up. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. Refrigerant flow from
the condenser shall be controlled by means of linear expansion valve (LEV) metering orifice. The
LEV shall be control by a microprocessor controlled step motor. Provide plate type fins. Provide P-413
Baked phenolic coating or equivalent on condenser coil.
4. Compressor: The compressor shall be equipped with Variable Compressor Speed Inverter
Technology. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The
compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the
efficiency of the system which results in vast energy savings. To prevent liquid from accumulating in
the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be intermittently applied to the
compressor motor to maintain enough heat. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high
pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
5. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The unit
shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The power to
the indoor unit shall be supplied by the outdoor unit.
2.03
FILTERS
A. Provide filters to filter outside air and return air and locate inside combination air filter mixing box. Provide
replaceable (throw-away) type. Filters shall conform to UL 900, Class 1. Polyurethane filters shall not be
used.
B. Filters: Filters shall have a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) 8 or as indicated on the drawings,
whichever is more stringent, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. Filter assembly shall include;
holding frame and fastener assembly, filter cartridge, mounting frame, and retainer assembly. Reinforce
23 81 26 – 4
MS0612
filter media with glass fiber mat. Pressure drop across clean filter shall not exceed 0.08 inches of water
gage.
C. Manometers: Provide inclined-type manometers for filter stations of 2,000 cfm capacity or larger including
filters furnished as integral parts of air-handling units and filters installed separately. Provide sufficient
length to read at least one inch of water column with major graduations in 1/10-inch, and equipped with
spirit level. Equip manometers with overpressure safety traps to prevent loss of fluid, and two three-way
vent valves for checking zero setting.
2.04
THERMOSTAT
A. Provide 24-hour, 7-day programmable thermostat to control all heating and cooling stages as specified
and scheduled. If sequence of operations on drawings requires more control, the more stringent control
sequence shall prevail. Thermostat shall have a minimum of two setpoints and two setback settings per
day.
2.05
MOTORS AND STARTERS
A. NEMA MG 1, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure
provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters. Provide motors to operate at full capacity with a
voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating. Motor size shall be sufficient for
the duty to be performed and shall not exceed its full load nameplate current rating when driven
equipment is operated at specified capacity under the most severe conditions likely to be encountered.
When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, the Contractor shall make the
necessary adjustments to the wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate
equipment actually provided. Provide phase loss protection on all 3 phase motors. Provide
general-purpose type starter enclosures in accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
2.06
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories as specified in FS OO-A-374 and this section. Provide suction line accumulators as
recommended by equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide a filter-drier in the liquid line.
B. Field-Assembled Refrigerant Piping: Material and dimensional requirements for field-assembled
refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall conform to ASHRAE 15&34 and ASME/ANSI
B31.5, except as herein specified. Factory clean, dehydrate, and seal piping before delivery to the project
location. Provide seamless copper tubing, hard drawn, Type K or L, conforming to ASTM B 88, except
that tubing with outside diameters of 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch shall have nominal wall thickness of not less
than 0.030-inch and 0.032-inch, respectively. Soft annealed copper tubing conforming to ASTM B 280
may be used where flare connections to equipment are required only in nominal sizes less than one inch
outside diameter.
C. Fittings: ASME/ANSI B16.22 for solder-joint fittings. UL 109 for flared tube fittings.
D. Brazing Filler Material: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E. Pipe Hangers and Supports: MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58.
F. Pipe Sleeves: Provide sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Secure
sleeves in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass
through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Provide not less than 0.25-inch space
between exterior of piping or pipe insulation and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and
caulk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or
provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
1. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide Schedule 40 or Standard Weight
zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 3 inches above finished floor.
2. Sleeves in Partitions and Non-Masonry Structures: Provide zinc-coated steel sheet sleeves having a
nominal weight of not less than 0.90 pound per square foot, in partitions and other than masonry and
concrete walls, floors, and roofs.
2.07
FINISHES
A. Provide steel surfaces of equipment including packaged terminal units, heat pumps, and air conditioners,
that do not have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 123/A 123M, or a duplex coating of zinc and paint,
with a factory applied coating or paint system. Provide a coating or paint system on actual equipment
23 81 26 – 5
MS0612
identical to that on salt-spray test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and
dry-film thickness.
2.08
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Salt-Spray Tests: Salt-spray test the factory-applied coating or paint system of equipment including
packaged terminal units, heat pumps, and air conditioners in accordance with ASTM B 117. Conduct test
for 500 hours for equipment installed outdoors, or 125 hours for equipment installed indoors. Test
specimens shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D 1654. Upon completion of exposure,
evaluate and rate the coating or paint system in accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D 1654.
Rating of failure at the scribe mark shall not be less than six, average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch.
Rating of the unscribed area shall not be less than 10, no failure.
PART 3
3.01
A.
EXECUTION
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Install equipment and components in a manner to ensure proper and sequential operation of equipment
and equipment controls. Units shall be designed for vertical or horizontal mounting as shown on the
plans. Install equipment not covered in this section, or in manufacturer's instructions, as recommended
by manufacturer's representative. Provide proper foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories,
appurtenances, piping and controls including, but not limited to, supports, vibration isolators, stands,
guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Foundations for equipment shall conform to equipment
manufacturer's recommendation, unless otherwise indicated. Set anchor bolts and sleeves using
templates. Provide anchor bolts of adequate length, and provide with welded-on plates on the head end
embedded in the concrete. Level equipment bases, using jacks or steel wedges, and neatly grout-in
with a non-shrinking type of grouting mortar. Locate equipment to allow working space for servicing
including shaft removal, disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons, replacing or adjusting drives,
motors, or shaft seals, access to water heads and valves of shell and tube equipment, tube cleaning or
replacement, access to automatic controls, refrigerant charging, lubrication, oil draining and working
clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric isolation between dissimilar metals for the purpose of
minimizing galvanic corrosion.
3.02
PIPING
A. Brazing, bending, forming and assembly of refrigerant piping shall conform to ASME/ANSI B31.5.
B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design and fabrication of pipe hangers, supports, and welding attachments
shall conform to MSS SP-58. Installation of hanger types and supports for bare and covered pipes shall
conform to MSS SP-69 for the system temperature range. Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal and
vertical piping attachments shall conform to MSS SP-58.
C. Refrigerant Piping: Cut pipe to measurements established at the site and work into place without
springing or forcing. Install piping with sufficient flexibility to provide for expansion and contraction due to
temperature fluctuation. Where pipe passes through building structure pipe joints shall not be concealed,
but shall be located where they may be readily inspected. Install piping to be insulated with sufficient
clearance to permit application of insulation. Install piping as indicated and detailed, to avoid interference
with other piping, conduit, or equipment. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, run piping plumb
and straight and parallel to walls and ceilings. Trapping of lines will not be permitted except where
indicated. Provide sleeves of suitable size for lines passing through building structure. Braze refrigerant
piping with silver solder complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Inside of tubing and fittings shall be free of flux.
Clean parts to be jointed with emery cloth and keep hot until solder has penetrated full depth of fitting and
extra flux has been expelled. Cool joints in air and remove flame marks and traces of flux. During brazing
operation, prevent oxide film from forming on inside of tubing by slowly flowing dry nitrogen through tubing
to expel air. Make provisions to automatically return oil on halocarbon systems. Installation of piping shall
comply with ASME/ANSI B31.5.
D. Returning Oil From Refrigerant System: Install refrigerant lines so that gas velocity in the evaporator
suction line is sufficient to move oil along with gas to the compressor. Where equipment location requires
vertical risers, line shall be sized to maintain sufficient velocity to lift oil at minimum system loading and
corresponding reduction of gas volume. Install a double riser when excess velocity and pressure drop
would result from full system loading. Larger riser shall have a trap, of minimum volume, obtained by use
of 90- and 45-degree ells. Arrange small riser with inlet close to bottom of horizontal line, and connect to
top of upper horizontal line. Do not install valves in risers.
23 81 26 – 6
MS0612
E. Refrigerant Driers, Sight Glass Indicators, and Strainers: Provide refrigerant driers, sight glass liquid
indicators, and strainers in refrigerant piping in accordance with FS OO-A-374 when not furnished by the
manufacturer as part of the equipment. Install driers in liquid line with service valves and valved bypass
line the same size as liquid line in which dryer is installed. Size of driers shall be determined by piping and
installation of the unit on location. Install dryers of 50 cubic inches and larger vertically with the cover for
removing cartridge at the bottom. Install moisture indicators in the liquid line downstream of the drier.
Indicator connections shall be the same size as the liquid line in which it is installed.
F. Strainer Locations and Installation: Locate strainers close to equipment they are to protect. Provide a
strainer in common refrigerant liquid supply to two or more thermal valves in parallel when each thermal
valve has a built-in strainer. Install strainers with screen down and in direction of flow as indicated on
strainer's body.
G. Solenoid Valve Installation: Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with stem vertical and with flow in
direction indicated on valve. If not incorporated as integral part of the valve, provide a strainer upstream
of the solenoid valve. Provide service valves upstream of the solenoid valve, upstream of the strainer,
and downstream of the solenoid valve. Remove the internal parts of the solenoid valve when brazing the
valve.
3.03
ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for concealed valves, controls, dampers, and other fittings requiring inspection and
maintenance.
3.04
AIR FILTERS
A. Allow access space for servicing filters. Install filters with suitable sealing to prevent bypassing of air.
3.05
FLASHING AND PITCH POCKETS
A. Provide flashing and pitch pockets for equipment supports and roof penetrations and flashing where
piping or ductwork passes through exterior walls in accordance with Section 07 62 00, "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
3.06
IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES
A. Provide equipment, gages, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags numbered and stamped for
their use. Provide plates and tags of brass or suitable nonferrous material, securely mounted or attached.
Provide minimum letter and numeral size of 1/8 inch high.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Leak Testing: Upon completion of installation of air conditioning equipment, test factory- and
field-installed refrigerant piping with an electronic-type leak detector. Use same type of refrigerant to be
provided in the system for leak testing. When nitrogen is used to boost system pressure for testing,
ensure that it is eliminated from the system before charging. Minimum refrigerant leak field test pressure
shall be as specified in ASHRAE 15&34, except that test pressure shall not exceed 150 psig on hermetic
compressors unless otherwise specified as a low side test pressure on the equipment nameplate. If leaks
are detected at time of installation or during warranty period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the
system, correct leaks, and retest system.
B. Evacuation, Dehydration, and Charging: After field charged refrigerant system is found to be without leaks
or after leaks have been repaired on field-charged and factory-charged systems, evacuate the system
using a reliable gage and a vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of at least one mm Hg absolute.
Evacuate system in accordance with the triple-evacuation and blotter method or in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's printed instructions and recharge system.
C. Start-Up and Initial Operational Tests: Test the air conditioning systems and systems components for
proper operation. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to ensure proper
operation and sequence. Conduct operational tests for not less than 8 hours.
D. Performance Tests: Upon completion of evacuation, charging, startup, final leak testing, and proper
adjustment of controls, test the systems to demonstrate compliance with performance and capacity
requirements. Test systems for not less than 8 hours, record readings hourly. At the end of the test
period, average the readings, and the average shall be considered to be the system performance.
23 81 26 – 7
MS0612
END OF SECTION
23 81 26 – 8
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 00:
PART 1
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES:
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (Current edition and updates)
B. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering (Current edition and updates)
C. UFC 3-520-01, Interior Electrical Systems (Current edition and updates)
D. UFC 3-530-01 Design: Interior, Exterior Lighting and Controls (Current edition and updates)
E. UFC 3-550-01, Exterior Electrical Power Distribution (Current edition and updates)
F. UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O & M (Current edition and updates)
G. UFC 3-535-01 Visual Air Navigation Facilities (Current edition and updates)
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,
products, and accessories in a single submittal.
C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70.
B. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Project Engineer before proceeding.
C. Within 30 days of receipt of notice to proceed and prior to starting installation, the Contractor shall submit
to the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include all material and
equipment proposed for installation Sealed by a registered electrical engineer or by a registered
professional engineer having at least four years of current experience in the design of electrical systems.
The individual’s name, signature, and professional engineer number shall be included on all final design
documents. All electrical system designs must be reviewed and stamped by an electrical engineer.
PART 2
(NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. New Underground Systems in Project shall conform to the following:
1. Riser Pole (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Shall have as a minimum; 15 kv Fused cutouts rated for the system, 9 kv arresters, and
applicable rated mounting and support hardware.
2. Conduit (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Shall be 5 inch, PVC, schedule 40 or 5 inch red-colored High Density Polyethylene (HDPE. duct
for underground installations.
b. Primary Feeders shall be encased in 3 in concrete minimum or 5 to 6 feet below finished grade if
not encased in concrete.
26 05 00 - 1
MS0612
3. Old / Replaced overhead system shall be removed in total and disposed of by the contractor. (unless
otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
4. New transformers, primary sectionalizing enclosures, bypass switches, and associated hardware shall
be mounted on a concrete base pad. (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Concrete pad shall be 6-inch minimum free concrete surface area at all sides of transformer.
b. 6 inches minimum pad thickness, 4 inches may below grade
c. Concrete to be 3500 psi rated minimum strength
d. Provide opening in concrete slab for primary and secondary in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
5. All areas disturbed by trenching / digging for system installation shall be returned to the original (or
better) condition prior to beginning of project.
a. Under NO circumstances are RUNWAY, AIRCRAFT PARKING APRONS, and TAXIWAYS to be
removed for installation of an underground system.
1. These areas are to be DIRECTIONAL BORED UNDER and nonmetallic flexible raceway
(HDPE) shall be installed for system installation.
b. The Contract Officer may approve otherwise and written authorization must be obtained prior to
beginning project.
6. Handholds or Pull boxes shall be placed at "ALL" underground circuit connections where a device is
used for the connection.
a. Minimum of 18-inch square accessible, covered, opening.
b. Strength of handholes and their frames shall be vehicle load rated at all locations and conform to
the requirements of IEEE C2.
c. Precast concrete handholes shall have the required strength established by ASTM C 478.
d. Frames covers shall be made of grey cast iron and a machine-finished seat shall be provided to
ensure a matching joint between frame and cover. Cast iron shall comply with ASTM A 48, Class
30B, minimum.
e. Handhole shall be provided with sump hole.
f. Provide slack wrap of cable in handhole.
7. Cable fault indicators shall be installed on all cables in primary junction cabinets and 3 and 4 way
switches.
a. Cable fault indicators shall be automatically reset type which will return the indicator to “no fault” or
non-tripped position with inrush current restraint – delayed trip..
b. Unit shall be either single phase or three phase with remote indicator mounting option to provide
convenient mounting on the panel enclosure. Single phase unit shall be provided with a single
current sensing core assembly and a single indicator. Three phase unit shall have three
independent sensing cores and one indicator assembly that contains three flags.
c. Unit shall be voltage powered unit and completely sealed and submersible.
d. Trip Level: set (ampere) to as specified by contracting officer.
8. Finish: All pad-mounted equipment shall be painted to meet ANSI standards for corrosion resistant
coatings. Color of all equipment shall match Federal Standard 595B, color 20095. This coating shall
be a factory finish. All pad-mounted equipment located South of U.S Highway 98 (Soundside) shall be
Stainless Steel.
B. Above Ground Systems in Project
1. New installed utility, light, and/or communication poles shall conform to the following: (unless
otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
a. Pole and Foundation must be certified to withstand a 120 mph wind load with a 1.3 gust factor as
a complete assembly. Calculations shall be provided and certified by a registered Professional
Engineer.
b. Poles will be placed no closer then 125 feet to an aircraft parking apron, runway, or taxiway.
c. The Contract Officer may approve otherwise and written authorization must be obtained prior to
beginning project.
2. All electrical devices shall be rated for outdoor/weather use NEMA-3.
3. All primary connections to the system shall have fused cutouts, arresters, and applicable hardware
rated for the system connection.
4. All external mounted electrical cutout/switch boxes shall be rated NEMA-3, fused, total phase
disconnects.
C. Conductor and conductor sizes shall conform to the following:(unless otherwise specified in drawings or
specs.)
1. Conductors shall be of copper or copper strand
2. Rated for an ambient temperature of no less then 75 degrees C.
3. Maintain the circuit loads with no more then a 2 percent voltage drop.
26 05 00 - 2
MS0612
4. Rated to maintain a 1.5 designed circuit load as a minimum.
5. Conductor and insulation rated for the circuit voltage, with 600 VAC as the minimum standard.
6. Conductor used on load circuits of voltage 110 VAC or higher shall be of a minimum size no smaller
then #12 AWG, copper.
7. Conductor used on Service Drops, transformer to building, of voltage 110 VAC or higher shall be of a
minimum size no smaller then #000 AWG, copper.
8. Conductor used on all primary circuits, 12.4 KV and higher, shall be of a minimum size no smaller
then #2 AWG, copper.
D. General Standards, minimums (unless otherwise specified in drawings or specs.)
1. Control Voltage: 120 VAC
2. Conduit: PVC (schedule 40), EMT, or HDPE.
3. Secondary system voltage: 208/120 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire
4. Primary system voltage: 12470 VAC, 3 phase
5. Transformers: liquid cooled, DELTA - WYE connected
6. Building interior junction ("J") boxes: 4" metal utility with blank cover.
3.02
A
TRAINING
All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within
90 days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting
and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Room and
board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training shall occur within 3 months
of system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 05 00 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 19
PART 1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building wire and cable.
B. Underground feeder and branch circuit cable.
C. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
B.
National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
Air-Handling Spaces.
C.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional OpticalFiber Members.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as
required to meet Project Conditions.
C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and
lengths required.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN rated at 75 degrees C.
26 05 19 - 1
MS0612
E. Minimum size: no less then Size #12 AWG on any load bearing circuit
2.02
UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE:
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type UF.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.03
WIRING METHODS
A. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN in conduit.
B. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.
B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
C. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
F. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
G. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
H. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape un-insulated
conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
I.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG
and smaller.
J.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG
and smaller.
3.05
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's
recommended values.
C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
26 05 19 - 2
MS0612
END OF SECTION
26 05 19 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 26:
PART 1
GROUNDING AND BONDING
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B. Equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bonding.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.03
GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Rod electrode.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms except as noted on the drawings.
B. All grounding and bonding shall comply with NFPA 70, section 250.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation
and installation of exothermic connectors.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION 32-1065 (Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
ROD ELECTRODE
A. Material: Copper.
B. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
C. Length: 20 feet.
2.02
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
26 05 26 - 1
MS0612
A. Material: Bronze.
2.03
WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 2 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve
specified resistance to ground.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, ground rod shall be driven into ground until top of rod is approximately 1foot
below finished grade.
D. Install 2 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.
E. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch
circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
G. Bond all separately derived systems (SDS) including foundation reinforcement steel and building steel to
main electrical ground. Communication, fire, video, etc., systems are considered SDS.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance
with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Provide full fall
of potential graph and submit as test result. Resistance shall not exceed 25 Ohms.
END OF SECTION
26 05 26 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 27:
PART 1
SECONDARY GROUNDING
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Power system grounding.
B. Communication system grounding.
C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes.
B. Provide communications system ground rod at point of service entrance and connect to the building
ground at the service entrance with 1/0 bare copper conductor.
C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts
of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle
ground connectors, and plumbing systems.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Indicate the layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of
grounding electrode conductor.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4-inch (19 mm) diameter, minimum length 20 feet.
B. Ground Conductor: 1/0 bare copper.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Provide a separate insulated equipment-grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate
each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing.
B. Provide grounding and bonding at the pad-mounted transformer.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance
with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Provide full-fall
of-potential graph and submit as test result. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION
26 05 27 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 29:
PART 1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. FM Global:
1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual
Research For Property Conservation.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment
and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
26 05 29 - 1
MS0612
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head
bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all
nuts.
G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch (25
mm) off wall.
END OF SECTION
26 05 29 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 33:
PART 1
CONDUIT
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal conduit.
B. Flexible metal conduit.
C. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
D. Electrical metallic tubing.
E. Nonmetal conduit.
F. High Density Polyethylene Nonmetallic Flexible Raceway (HDPE)
G. Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
F. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
G. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit.
I.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
J.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
K. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
1.03
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal conduit,
metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, fittings, and conduit bodies, HDPE (Red
Colored).
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
C. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
26 05 33 - 1
MS0612
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to
complete wiring system. Conceal all conduits within the construction unless noted otherwise.
D. Underground conduit installations under existing aircraft aprons, ramps, taxiways, and runways will be
installed by boring, unless written authorization is received from the contracting officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations:
1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall and in or Under Slab on Grade: Use thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel.
D. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Use thick wall nonmetallic conduit.
E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid galvanized steel, electrical metallic tubing, thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
F. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.
2.02
METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, aluminum fittings may be used with steel conduit.
2.03
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.04
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
26 05 33 - 2
MS0612
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, steel setscrew type.
2.05
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
2.06
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) RACEWAY
A. Description: Red Colored, NEMA TC 7; SDR 13.5.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 6 and TC 8.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and
split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel provide space on
each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J.
Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab.
N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
O. Maintain 12-inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F (40 degrees C).
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry
and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to
cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.
26 05 33 - 3
MS0612
T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make
sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than
2-inch (50 mm) size.
U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and
expansion joints.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
AA. HDPE: Install HDPE by Directional boring, plowing, or open trench.
3.02
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
END OF SECTION
26 05 33 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 34:
PART 1
BOXES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pull and junction boxes.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and
shown.
1.05
SUMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on all boxes to be used.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location
required for box to serve intended purpose.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
2.02
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Support boxes independently of conduit that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12
inches (300 mm) of box.
D. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
26 05 34 - 1
MS0612
END OF SECTION
26 05 34 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 05 53:
PART 1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit markers.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
C. All Labeling shall comply with UFC 3-560-01 Electrical Safety, O&M(Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.
B. Locations: Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
Example: PANEL A.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/4-inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/2-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2.02
WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Tape type wire markers.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load
connection.
C. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams and
equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
2.03
CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Description: Tape.
B. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
C. Spacing: 20 feet on center.
D. Color:
1. 208 Volt System: Gray.
2. Telephone System: Blue.
3. Low Voltage System: Black.
2.04
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 6-inch wide plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical
lines; Style No. 210 ELE as manufactured by Seton.
26 05 53 - 1
MS0612
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and labels parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches
below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
26 05 53 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 24 16:
PART 1
PANELBOARDS
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated
Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
6. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes
2. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
3. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
4. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
5. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
6. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
F. United Facilities Criteria:
1. UFC 3-520-01 Interior Electrical Systems (Current Addition)
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere
rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
1.04
SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish 2 each to Owner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS:
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 3R.
C. Provide surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike.
Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
D. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus in
all panelboards.
26 24 16 - 1
MS0612
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-volt panelboards.
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with
common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits.
Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
G. All panels to be provided with Main Breakers.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb, in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Height: 4 ft.
C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting
changes required to balance phase loads.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard
between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads
within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches,
and fuses.
END OF SECTION
26 24 16 - 2
MS0612
SECTION 26 27 26:
PART 1
WIRING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Wall dimmers.
C. Receptacles.
D. Device plates.
E. Occupancy Sensors
1.02
REFERENCES
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
C. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Bryant, Hubbell, and Leviton.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: NEMA WD 1, specification grade, general-duty, AC only general-use snap switch.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
E. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC.
F. Current Rating: 20 ampere.
2.02
WALL DIMMERS
A. Manufacturers: Lutron, Prescolite, Hunt.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: NEMA WD 1, Type II semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic with linear slide.
E. Voltage: 120 volts.
26 27 26 - 1
MS0612
F. Power Rating: 1000 Watts.
2.03
RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers: Bryant, Hubbell, Leviton,
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: NEMA WD 1; specification grade, general-duty general-use receptacle.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
E. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; type as specified and indicated.
F. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
G. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory
requirements.
H. AFCI Outlets: Arc Flash Circuit Interrupter. All 20 amp receptacles that are not GFCI protected or stated
otherwise.
2.04 WALL PLATES
A. Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel.
B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover.
2.05 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Leviton or equivalent.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
C. Description: Passive Infrared (PIR) sensor ceiling mounted or wall mounted. Auto On/Off, 15 seconds to
15 minutes delay Off time setting.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
E. Voltage Rating: Low voltage, 120V, or 277 volts AC.
F. Current Rating: 20 ampere.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install devices plumb and level.
C. Install switches with OFF position down.
26 27 26 - 2
MS0612
D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after de-rating for ganging as instructed
by manufacturer.
E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
G. Connect wiring device-grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle and blank outlets in finished areas.
I.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
J.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.04
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting heights specified
and indicated on Drawings.
B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter.
E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor.
F. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
G. Install telephone jack for wall telephone 48 inches above finished floor.
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational.
3.06
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
END OF SECTION
26 27 26 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 26 28 19:
PART 1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and
short circuit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, and load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
B. Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, and load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosures: Type as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
END OF SECTION
26 28 19 - 1
MS0612
SECTION 26 35 33
PART 1
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surge Protection Device
1.02
STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1.
IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
2.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
3.
IEEE C62.45 - Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
NEMA LS 1 - Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.
C.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2.
NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1.
UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
2.
UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Surge Protection Device shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules of metal
oxide varistors (MOV) with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall be designed and constructed
in a manner that ensures MOV surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or
selenium cells are unacceptable unless documentation from a nationally recognized laboratory
demonstrates current sharing of all dissimilar components at all surge current levels.
2.02
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Nominal system operating voltage shall be:
120/240 VAC, 1 Phase, 3Wire Plus Ground
120/208 VAC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground, Wye.
277/480 VAC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Plus Ground, Wye or as shown on drawings
B. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV):
The surge suppressor and all components in the suppression path (including all current diversion
components) maximum continuous operating voltage shall be greater than 115% of the nominal system
operating voltage to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary RMS overvoltage (swell
conditions).
C. Operating Frequency: The operating frequency range of the system shall be at least 47 - 63 Hertz.
2.03
FUSE AND THERMAL DISCONNECT
1. Surge Protection Device shall be internally fused to safely disconnect itself from the electrical system
without damaging itself and rated to allow maximum specified surge current capacity. Surge
Protection Device that utilize a single fuse to protect two or more suppression paths are not
acceptable.
2. Fuse shall be capable of interrupting the AC power line short circuit fault current (KAIC). Short circuit
rms current shall be at least 200KAIC or as shown on drawings.
26 35 33 - 1
MS0612
3. Thermal disconnect device shall be installed on or near each MOV element that responds to
excessive MOV heating by mechanically disconnecting the MOV from the power line.
2.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Protection Modes: The SPD shall provide protection as follows: All modes, L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G
(Where applicable)
Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral.
B. UL 1449 Ratings: The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified
protection modes shall not exceed the following in any mode of protection:
Nominal System Voltage
120/240 or 120/208 volt
277/480 volt
Surge Voltage Rating
400 volts
800 volts
C. Noise Attenuation: The units shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter. The filter
shall provide insertion loss with a maximum of 60 dB from 100 KHz to 100 MHz per 50-Ohm Insertion
Loss Methodology from MIL 220A.
2.05
PERFORMANCE RATINSG
A. Surge Current Capacity:
Location
Main Distribution Panel
Branch Panels
Surge Rating per Mode
150 kA
80 kA
Surge Rating Per Phase (L-N plus L-G)
300 kA
160 kA
2.06
BASIS OF DESIGN
A. Main panel unit Liebert Interceptor Series.
B. Branch Panel units Liebert Accuvar ACV Series.
2.07
ACCESSORIES
A. Surge suppressor at main distribution panel shall have red and green status indicators, audible alarm,
and transient counter.
B. Surge suppressor at branch panels shall have red and green status indicators.
2.08
TESTING
A. Component Testing and Monitoring: Unit shall include an on-line circuit which tests and redundantly
monitors individual components in all protection modes including neutral to ground (where applicable).
Units that require external test sets or equipment are unacceptable.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. The installing contractor shall install the parallel surge suppressor with short and straight conductors as
practically possible. The contractor shall twist the surge suppressor input conductors together to reduce
input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the surge suppressor manufacturer's
recommended installation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and
comply with all applicable codes.
3.02
TRAINING
A. All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within
90 days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting
and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Room
and board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training shall occur within 3
26 35 33 - 2
MS0612
months of system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 35 33 - 3
MS0612
SECTION 26 51 00:
PART 1
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Emergency lighting units.
C. Exit signs.P
D. Ballasts.
E. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply.
F. Lamps.
G. Luminaire accessories.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp
Ballast.
2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure
Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
B. National Fire Protection Association
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
2. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminary that is not a standard product of
the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product
testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
1.04
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire.
1.05
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum
three years experience.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
26 51 00 - 1
MS0612
D. Conform to the requirement of National Energy Policy Act (EPACT), 1992.
E. ASHREA/IESNA Standard 90.1.
F. UFC 3-530-01 Design: Interior and Exterior Lighting and Controls (Current Addition)
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory.
2.02
EXIT SIGNS
A. Manufacturers: As specified in schedule on Drawings or equal.
B. Description: Universal LED exit unit with self testing.
C. Housing: Extruded aluminum.
D. Face: Open face white on red. Anodized satin aluminum stencil and color permanent fiberglass panels.
E. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment.
F. Mounting: Ceiling.
G. Lamps: Manufacturers standard.
H. Input Voltage: Per design.
2.03
BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballast:
1. Description: High power factor type electronic ballast with total line current harmonic distortion no
greater than 20%.
2. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified.
3. Voltage: 120 volts.
4. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.
2.04
FLUORESCENT LAMP
A. Lamp Ratings: as specified on drawings
B. Fluorescent lamps shall meet and pass EPA Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TLCP)
requirements, (without additive). (40 Code of Federal Regulations Appendix II to Part 261)
2.05
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of
fluorescent luminaire.
B. Battery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated for 10-year life.
C. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an
assembled luminaire.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires.
26 51 00 - 2
MS0612
B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length
required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaire as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with
each other. Secure to prohibit movement.
E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements
for fire rating.
G. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
H. Install wall mounted luminaire at height as indicated on Drawings as scheduled.
I.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J.
Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible
conduit.
K. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within luminaire.
L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
M. Install specified lamps in each luminaire and exit signs.
N. Install occupancy sensor lighting switches in all restrooms, small offices, and conference rooms.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05
DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration.
3.06
SCHEDULE
A. See light fixture schedule on drawings.
3.07
TRAINING
A. All training will be accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment installed not by the Installing
Company. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times. All training will be done within
90 days of final acceptance of the project. Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 day on site training for
maintenance personnel and 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility.
Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting
and diagnostics exercises. The contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Room and
26 51 00 - 3
MS0612
board costs shall be included for two government personnel. Factory training shall occur within 3 months
of system acceptance. The training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1500.
END OF SECTION
26 51 00 - 4
MS0612
SECTION 27 00 00:
PART 1
TELEPHONE AND LAN SYSTEM
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. TELEPHONE WIRING SYSTEMS AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDES:
1. Building Service Entrance Ducts; Telephone Backboard Entrance Conduits; Grounding;
Telephone Backboards; Telephone Cables; Telephone Outlets; Cross-connect Blocks;
Auxiliary Devices; Systems Furniture; Testing Requirements.
2. Shall comply with the Electronic Industry and Telecommunication Industry Association Standards and
all test results provided to 1 SOCS/SCX.
B. LAN WIRING SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDES:
1. Wiring Closets; Patch Panels; Conduits (Cable Distribution); LAN Outlets; Distribution Cabling;
Distance Limitations; LAN Cable Specifications; LAN Cable Testing; Systems Furniture
C. SIPRNet SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDES:
1. General; SIPRNet Wiring Closets; SIPRNet Patch Panels; SIPRNet Conduits; SIPRNet LAN;
Outlets; SIPRNet Distribution Cabling; NIPRNet To SIPRNet LAN Connection; SIPRNet LAN
Cable Specifications; SIPRNet LAN Testing; Systems Furniture; SIPRNet – Qualifications for
System Installer; SIPRNet Floor Plans; SIPRNet Conduit Pictures
D. MISCELLANEOUS:
1. Nameplates; Labels, Wire markers; Conduit markers; Stencils; Underground Warning Tape;
2. Lockout Devices.
1.02
RELATED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS:
A. Section 01000 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.03
REFERENCES:
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems.
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for
Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
C. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance:
1. TIA-568-C.0-1 GENERIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING FOR CUSTOMER PREMISES
2. TIA-568-C.1 COMMERCIAL BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD
3. TIA-568-C.2 BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING AND
COMPONENTS STANDARDS
4. TIA-568-C.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLING COMPONENTS STANDARD
5. TIA TIA-569 COMMERCIAL BUILDING STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS
AND SPACES
6. TIA-607 GENERIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING AND GROUNDING (EARTHING) FOR
CUSTOMER PREMISES
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and their
Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.
E. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.
1. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling
2. NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
F. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
27 00 00 - 1
MS0612
2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
8. NEMA FG 1 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems.
9. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems.
10. NEMA VE 2 - Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
H. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
2. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
I. AIR FORCE INSTRUCTION
1. AFSSI 7703 - COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY: PROTECTED DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (PDS)
2. AFSSI 7700 - Communications and Information: EMISSION SECURITY
3. AFSSI 7702 - EMISSION SECURITY COUNTERMEASURES REVIEWS
4. AFMAN 33-214 – Emission Security Assessments
5. AFSOCI 33-105 1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Section 01 33 00: Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: See drawings for requirements.
C. Product Data: Submit for all products to be installed in the construction, including but not limited to;
Flexible metal conduit, Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, Nonmetallic conduit, Flexible non-metallic
conduit, Non-metallic tubing, Raceway fittings, Conduit bodies, Surface raceway, Wire way, Pull and
junction boxes, Manholes, Handholes, Grounding Electrodes, JB Weld Grey, patch panels, cabinets,
racks, termination blocks, copper wire, fiber optic cabling, building entrance terminals, cable connectors.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
E. As-built Drawings:
1. NIPRNet/data and Telephone Provide as-built drawings showing the location of all outlets and cables
to 1 SOCS/SCX, 515 Cody Ave, Hurlburt Field FL 32544. All outlets should be identified in as built
drawings. Provide in VISIO format.
2. SIPRNET - Contractor must provide a floor plan showing the exact location of all PDS conduits, cable
trays, junction boxes, Crouse Hines FD-22 condulet Multi-Gang Cast Device boxes, lockable Single-Door
Type 12 EMC Enclosures, Krone 50-pair 89D termination blocks, cabling, MDF and IDFs. Floor plans
must show the size of the conduit, location of all mounting hardware (conduit hangers, straps, etc.) and
the location of all joints (couplings, box connectors, etc.). Floor plans must be marked to show where the
Open-Storage and Controlled Access Area boundaries. Floor plans will be labeled as “Protected
Distribution System plan”. Scale AutoCAD and/or Visio drawings shall be provided.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5,
average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m)
when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
B. Provide combustible electrical equipment exposed within plenums with peak rate of heat release
not greater than 100 kW, peak optical density not greater than 0.5, and average optical density
27 00 00 - 2
MS0612
not greater than 0.15 when tested in accordance with UL 2043.
C. Perform Work in accordance with 1SOCS/SCX.
1. Entrance Wiring: By Contractor.
2. Backbone Wiring: Complete from ITN identified by 1 SOCS to the Entrance facility using
optical fiber backbone cables. Complete from first usable manhole identified by 1 SOCS to
the entrance facility using copper cabling.
3. Horizontal Wiring: Complete from telecommunications closet to each outlet using copper or optical
fiber horizontal cables. All cables must be continuous from telecommunications room to customer
service outlet without any splices.
D. Provide grounding, surge protection and lightning protection of telecommunications system in
accordance with latest version of Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection chapter of the
NECA/BICSI 607-2011, TIA-607 , and NFPA 70.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience, and with service facilities within 50 miles of the project.
C. Testing Agency: Company [member of International Electrical Testing Association and
specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
D. Designer: Hold a BICSI RCDD credential
1.07
DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE & ENVIRONMENTAL:
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and
protecting products.
B. Accept materials & products on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
Identification. Inspect for damage.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
E. Install labels or nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive
are within range recommended by manufacturer.
F. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
G. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
A. TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS: Material: 3/4” Plywood with 2 coats fire resistant
insulating varnish.
B. TELEPHONE TERMINATION CABINETS:
1. Product Description: Surface type galvanized steel box with removable end walls & hinged front with
concealed lock, size as required, gray baked enamel finish. Provide plywood backboard inside cabinet
for mounting telephone termination devices.
C. Data Network Cabinets
1. Size and type determined by requirement. Lockable 7 ' tall metal cabinets with fully adjustable 19"
metal rails, front and back doors (back door for free standing application), side panels, top panels,
cooling equipment, cable management, power strips, grounding, shelves, and other accessories
27 00 00 - 3
MS0612
required for the particular application. Must be mounted to floor or wall as required. Wall mounted
units must have front and rear access to cables with piano hinges.
D. Voice CROSS-CONNECT
1. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, wall-mounted 66M1-50-5C block assembly terminals mounted on
89B brackets adequate capacity for active and spare circuits
E. PATCH PANEL
1. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568,
a. rack-mounted 110 block assembly of terminals and accessory patch cords, with adequate capacity
for active and spare circuits.
b. rack-mounted fiber optic patch panel with LC inserts for premise wiring and SC for backbone cables
F. OUTLET JACKS:
1. Conform to TIA/EIA 568 requirements for cable connectors for specific cable types.
2. The 2-inch x 4-inch wall plate cover will consist of four (4) ports, with Category 6, 8 conductor, RJ-45
jacks. Terminate in 568A configuration.
G. UNSHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 100-ohm, unshielded twisted pair plenum rated noncombustible cable with 100, 50,
or 25 pairs as required, 24 AWG copper conductor.
2. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
3. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
H. SHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 150-ohm shielded, twisted-pair plenum rated non-combustible cable with 2 pairs, 22
AWG copper conductor.
2. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
3. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
I.
OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLE: TIA/EIA 568, 8-125 um single mode optical fiber plenum rated
noncombustible cable.
J.
UNSHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 100-ohm, unshielded twisted pair plenum rated Non-combustible cable with 4 pairs, 24
AWG copper conductor.
2. The 2-inch x 4-inch wall plate cover will consist of four (4) ports, with Category 6, rated, 8
conductor, RJ-45 jacks.
3. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
4. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
K. SHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE:
1. TIA/EIA 568, 150-ohm shielded, twisted-pair plenum rated noncombustible cable with 2 pairs, 24
AWG copper conductor.
2. Terminate cable on 66M150-C5 blocks with standoff brackets.
3. Terminate LAN cable in 7-foot lockable cabinet on a 110-patch panel with vertical and horizontal wire
management between patch panels.
L. OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLE: Product Description
1. 4 strand 62.5/125 um optical fiber plenum rated noncombustible cable.
2. Cable must not contain a metal carrier of any sort (i.e. shielding, copper carrier, etc.)
3. Terminated with LC connectors at customer premise and Comm room.
27 00 00 - 4
MS0612
M. NAMEPLATES: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting
background color. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads; 1/4 inch high
letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
N. LABELS: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch black letters on white background.
O. WIRE MARKERS: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
P. CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS: Labels fastened with adhesive.
1. Color:
a. Telephone System: Green lettering on white background.
b. NIPR System: Blue lettering on white background.
c. SIPR System: No Markings.
Q. UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE: Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored
yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
R. WIRE:
1. Material: Stranded copper.
2. Grounding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.
3. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
S. MECHANICAL CONNECTORS: Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding
applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
T. EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS: Must be manufactured by a company specializing in exothermic
welding.
U.
METAL CONDUIT:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
3. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
4. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit
V.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, FITTINGS: Interlocked steel construction with PVC
jacket. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. Rick
W.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT), FITTINGS & CONDUIT BODIES: ANSI C80.3;
galvanized tubing. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression type.
X.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, FITTINGS & CONDUIT BODIES: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 80 PVC.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies, NEMA TC 3.
Y.
NONMETALLIC TUBING, FITTINGS & CONDUIT BODIES: NEMA TC 2. Fittings and Conduit
Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
Z.
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY:
1. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal
raceway. Size as shown on the drawings.
2. Finish: Gray enamel.
3. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on
raceway.
AA.
SURFACE NONMETAL RACEWAY, FITTINGS, & ACCESSORIES: Plastic or Fiberglass channel
with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface raceway. Size as shown on drawings or as required.
Gray Finish. Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories, finish to match raceway.
27 00 00 - 5
MS0612
BB.
WIREWAY: General purpose type wireway. Manufacturers standard knockouts. Size & length as
indicated on Drawings. Hinged cover with full gaskets. Slip-in or flanged connectors. Lay-in type
fittings with removable top; Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.
CC. PULL, JUNCTION & OUTLET BOXES: (Follow AFSSI 7703 for SIPRNet applications.)
1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
2. Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male
fixture studs where required.
3. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
4. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
5. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy]. Furnish gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
6. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type [4] [4X] [6]; flat-flanged, surface mounted
junction box:
a. Material: Galvanized cast iron] [Cast aluminum].
b. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
7. Concrete composite] Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber [concrete composite] hand holes:
a. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 inch x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side.
b. Concrete composite, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.
DD. CABLE TRAYS
1. NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray.
a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Inside Width: 24 inches.
c. Inside Depth: 4 inches.
d. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches.
e. Inside Radius of Fittings: 12 inches.
f. Furnish manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates,
blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
g. Covers, as indicated on the drawings; flush, flanged, solid or ventilated.
EE.
WARNING SIGNS:
1. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved
with: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE
ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
FF.
Inner duct
1. 4" 3-Cell cloth inner duct for use in 4" or larger conduits. Place 3 packs in one 4” conduit run.
GG.
1.
2.
3.
Lock Boxes
Have tamperproof hinges and hasps
Constructed of 16 gauge or better metal
Ability to secure wall plate within
HH. JB Weld
1. opaque (not clear) colored epoxy
II. Auxiliary Voice Backboard Devices
1. D-rings
2. A-rings
3. Mushroom spindles
JJ. Cable organization
1. Tie wraps
2. Cable Velcro Straps
KK. Nylon pull ropes
1. ¼ inch thick strong waterproof polyester
27 00 00 - 6
MS0612
PART 3
EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION:
1. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements {01300 - Administrative Requirements}:
Coordination and project conditions.
2. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
B. EXISTING WORK:
1. Remove exposed abandoned raceway[, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes].
Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
2. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
3. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is
abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
4. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify
installation or provide access panel.
5. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods [compatible with existing
electrical installations, or] as specified.
6. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
7. Install identification on existing [equipment to remain in accordance with this section.
8. Install identification on unmarked existing [equipment.
9. Replace lost nameplates, labels, markers.
10. Re-stencil existing equipment.
C. D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Visually inspect from each bus bar to main grounding electrode service location.
Test in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct. Perform retest.
Ground and bond raceway and boxes.
Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes except in the case of SIPRNet.
Follow AFSSI 7703 when fastening conduit and boxes used for SIPRNet.
6. Identify raceway and boxes.
7. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
D. GENERAL INSTALLATION - Grounding:
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
3. Install grounding for each rack and equipment using #6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, no
smaller than 6 AWG copper stranded conductor to copper communication grounding bus bar located in
COMM room. Install proper grounding lug on cable where connecting to racks and grounding bar.
4. Bond COMM room grounding system to building grounding electrode system at main electrical service
entrance location with #6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor.
5. Install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical.
6. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends and splices. Use sweeping bends.
7. Install bonding connections with listed bolts, crimp pressure connectors, clamps, or lugs.
8. Position busbars near associated equipment and insulate from supports.
9. Construct busbars of copper, 4 inches x 8 inches by 1/4 inch thick with pilot holes for ground lug.
10. Bond backbone cabling at each sheath opening.
11. Ground data cabinets, racks, cable trays, safes and mounting hardware located COMM room.
12. Label grounding conductors and grounding bus bars in accordance with references found in section 1.03
of this document..
13. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
14. When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct. Perform retest.
15. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
16. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch
pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified in Section 07410.
17. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment.
E. General Installation – Fiber Optic Cable Horizontal
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. A minimum of 10 foot maintenance loop will remain at the equipment rack and at the last junction box, at a
minimum. Neatly wire tie maintenance loops.
3. Installed and terminated using LC connectors
27 00 00 - 7
MS0612
4. Hot Splicing of cables will NOT BE ACCEPTED
F. General installation – Fiber Optic Cable Backbone
1. Installed using SC connectors and terminated in a patch panel uniformed to existing Fiber Optic Cable
terminations.
2. Installations shall have a 10 meter/30 foot maintenance loop in each manhole and at the termination end.
3. Hot Splicing of cables will NOT BE ACCEPTED
G. General Installation – Copper Cable Horizontal
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. A minimum of 10 foot maintenance loop will remain at the Telecommunications room and 3 feet loop at the
last junction box. Neatly wire tie maintenance loops.
3. Install and terminate in RJ45 IAW 568A
4. Hot Splicing of cables will NOT BE ACCEPTED
H. General Installation – Copper Cable Backbone
1. Install in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
2. Installations shall have a 10 meter/30 foot maintenance loop in each manhole and at the termination end,
when possible. Neatly wire tie maintenance loops.
3. Install and terminate in RJ45 IAW 568A
4. If splicing is required the contractor will make all cold splices and SCOW will make finale hot splice into
existing cable.
I.
General Installation – Boxes (Follow AFSSI 7703 for SIPRNet applications.)
1. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings
2. Adjust box location up to 4 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
3. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices.
4. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
5. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
6. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate
masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
7. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 12 inches separation. Install
with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
8. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish
thickness.
9. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
10. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
11. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
12. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
13. Support boxes independently of conduit.
14. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
15. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
16. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
J.
General Installation- testing
1. Inspect and test optical fiber cables in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.,
except Section 4. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.25.
2. Inspect and test copper cables and terminations in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of
this document.
3. Install pathways in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
4. Install wire and cable in accordance with references found in section 1.03 of this document.
5. Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall or floor at each
corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.
6. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 1” empty conduits to accessible location
above ceiling at each location.
7. Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone/data conduit over 10 feet in length or containing
bends.
K. IDENTIFICATION – INSTALLATION
1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
27 00 00 - 8
MS0612
3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with
corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, or adhesive.
5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panels in finished locations.
6. Install label parallel to equipment lines.
7. Install label for identification of individual control device stations.
8. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
9. Install wire marker for each conductor at pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes.
10. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run.
11. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel alpha and numerical port designation and indicated on
as-built Drawings.
12. Install conduit & raceway marker for each conduit & raceway longer than 6 feet.
13. Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.
14. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8
inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
L. INSTALLATION – RACEWAY (Follow AFSSI 7703 for SIPRNet Applications)
1. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete
wiring system.
2. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
3. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
4. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel Uni-Strut channel
Sections. Provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
5. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
Supports
6. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires, ceiling grids, or other piping systems.
7. Construct Wireway supports from steel Uni-Strut channel sections.
8. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
9. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
10. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
11. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
12. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
13. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
14. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
15. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
16. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal and cast boxes in damp
And wet locations.
17. Install no more than two 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate
bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch.
18. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
19. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses control and
expansion joints.
20. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
21. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
22. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount
plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
23. Close ends and unused openings in Wire way.
M. Installation of Conduits for use in NIPRNet and Telephone Applications
1. Install conduits and stub out at cable rack in ceiling.
2. Utilize one 1" conduit for 2 telephone and 2 NIPRNet data cables. (If conduit will only contain 2 cables a 3/4"
conduit may be used)
3. Conduit run will contain no more than two 90 degree bends
N. Installation of SIPRNet Conduits
1. Run in EMT conduit of at least ¾” size. (Conduit fill rates must be considered)
2. Conduit will terminate in a GSA approved lock-box in accordance with AFMAN 33-221.
27 00 00 - 9
MS0612
3. All conduit fittings and joints will be covered in opaque (not clear) colored epoxy (i.e. J.B. weld) to a
distance of ½" away from the joint. Epoxy will be neatly applied over the entire joint.
4. Junction boxes with pre-punched knockouts will not be used.
5. Condulets (i.e. LBs, etc.) will not be used.
6. Junction boxes must be large enough to allow a 1” bend radius for the fiber optics.
7. Junction box covers will have epoxy applied around the entire perimeter of the cover.
8. Apply epoxy to all screws, conduit fittings, and covers. Ensure screw slot is filled.
9. Conduits will be mounted in plain view, a minimum of 1” from all other structures (non-SIPRNet conduits,
Drop ceilings, Modular furniture, walls, etc.).
10. If the carrier penetrates a wall, ceiling, or floor ensure the carrier is securely fastened to the wall, ceiling, or
floor (no movement or “play” in the conduit). To ensure the carrier is securely fastened, permanent filler
may be used to seal completely around the carrier. If the carrier is not securely fastened, then there needs
to be a minimum of 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) clearance completely surrounding the PDS at the point of
penetration. A filler (bat insulation for instance) that is easily removed and reinstalled without tools to
facilitate lines route inspections may be used.
11. Conduit will remain bare metal with no paint, wallpaper or any other markings.
O. Installation of SIPRNet Conduits Within certified, approved, classified open secure storage areas (OSSA)
1. Conduits will be marked with 1-inch red tape at least every 1 ½ meters.
2. Red tape will wrap completely around the conduit.
3. Within these rooms, conduit may be installed above drop ceilings or below raised floors.
4. Epoxy is not required on conduit installed within an OSSA.
5. Conduits may not be installed within walls.
P. Installation of Cable Trays intended for SIPRNet Within certified, approved, classified open secure storage
areas (OSSA) and Controlled Access Areas (CAA)
1. Enclosed cable trays may be used.
2. Cable trays must be constructed to allow 1-inch red tape marking at least every 1 ½ meters.
3. Boxes where fiber optic cable terminate at the subscriber end must be permanently mounted to the facility
structure
a. Boxes in OSSA do not need to be lockable
b. Boxes in CAA must be able to be locked with approved lock, have tamperproof hinges and hasps, and
be constructed of 16 gauge or better metal.
Q. Conduit between floors, within certified, approved, classified open-storage areas
1. The contractor must provide a scale floor plan showing the exact location of the conduit, size of the conduit,
material the conduit is made from (i.e. EMT, rigid pipe)
2. Conduit must be a minimum of 2-inches in diameter.
3. must be marked with 1-inch wide red tape at least once every 1 ½ meters. Tape must go completely around
the pipe.
4. Conduit must be located in an area which is inspect able; building occupants must be able to inspect the
entire surface of the conduit without need for special tools.
5. Plexiglas maybe used when transitioning from one secure area to another.
R. DRSN PDS
1. Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) boxes require the use of
lockable Single-Door Type 12 EMC Enclosures having minimum dimension greater than 24 x 24 x 8
inches.
2. Grounding lugs are to be installed in each IDF box and terminated to a local building ground lug.
S. INSTALLATION - METAL CABLE TRAY
1. Install metal cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
2. Support trays and fasten to structure using steel Uni-Strut channel Sections. Install supports at
each connection point, at end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between
supports as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Install expansion connectors where recommended by manufacturer.
4. Install firestopping in accordance with Section 07 84 00 to sustain ratings when passing cable
tray through fire-rated elements.
5. Ground and bond metal cable tray in accordance with this section.
6. Provide continuity between tray components.
7. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly.
8. Install 2 #6 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond
to each component.
27 00 00 - 10
MS0612
9. Make connections to tray using mechanical, compression or exothermic connectors.
10. Install warning signs at 20 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible.
T. Comm Installation for System Furniture
1. All systems furniture shall include punch out panels or open bottom panels for maintenance of wall jacks.
2. Provide two (3) 100-OHM Cat 6 UTP type premise cables for 2 for data and 1 for telephone to each
person’s workstation.
3. Provide Fiber optic cables as needed to complete customer requirements. Terminate cables at customer
service area with LC connectors in appropriate outlet fixture.
U. ADJUSTING
1. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
2. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
3. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
V. CLEANING
1. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Final cleaning.
2. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
3. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
27 00 00 - 11
MS0612
SECTION 28 31 00:
PART 1
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.01
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. Factory Mutual System (FM) Publication
a) Approval Guide (Equipment, Materials, Services for Conservation of Property) 1989 with
Quarterly Supplements.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
a) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
b) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.
c) NFPA90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating System.
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
a) Fire Protection Equipment Directory (Jan 1989 with Quarterly Supplements).
b) UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems
c) UL 228 Door Closers-Holders, with or without Integral Smoke Detector.
d) UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
(1) e) UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
e) UL 464 Audible Signal Appliances.
f) UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective, Signaling Systems.
g) UL 864 Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
4. Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 3-600-01, Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities
5. Unified Facility Criteria (UFC) 4-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass Notification Systems (dated 9 April
08, change 1, January 2010)
B. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in
Air-Handling Spaces.
SUBMITTALS
1.02
A. Submit shop drawings showing all system components under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Plans and
calculations must be prepared by a registered professional fire protection engineer or individual that has
obtained National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, Fire Alarm Systems Level IV. All
fire alarm system designs must be reviewed and stamped by a registered professional fire protection
engineer. If the MNS portion is used to notify occupants of fire condition than it to must adhere to this
provision.
B. Submit manufacturer’s data on all components used in the system under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
C. The authority having jurisdiction and the alarm shop 1 SOCES/CEOFA shall be notified prior to
installation or alteration of equipment or wiring. Complete information regarding the system or system
alterations, including specifications, type of system or service, shop drawings, input/output matrix, battery
calculations, and notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations shall be submitted for approval.
D. Under no circumstances will installation begin prior to approval of SUBMITTALS.
E. Submit Qualification of Installer per PART 2, Paragraph 2.05.
1.03
SCOPE
A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed
in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. Only an addressable fire alarm
system shall be accepted.
B. Basic Performance:
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on
NFPA Style 6 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A as part of an addressable device
connected by the SLC Circuit.
28 31 00 - 1
MS0612
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A as part of an addressable
device connected by the SLC Circuit.
4. On Style 6 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system
Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the
ability to report an alarm.
5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
C. Basic System Functional Operation
1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the
following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The system alarm LED on the system display shall flash.
b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
c. A backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition,
including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
d. The fire alarm strobe horns shall sound or if MNS, the clear strobe shall flash and the fire
message shall be announced through the fire/MNS speakers.
e. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new fire alarm
control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
f.
All system output programs assigned via control by event interlock programming to be activated
by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification
appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
g. An associated signal is sent VIA Monaco transceiver to the fire department.
1.04
Operation
A. Activation of any automatic fire detection device or manual station shall result in the continuous operation
of all fire audio/visual devices in the building, shutdown of air-handling units below 2000CFM, and
activation of the radio transceiver for transmission of a radio signal to central monitor location. The fire
alarm system shall be wired and all associated conduits shall be Class A in accordance with NFPA 72
ch.6.4.2.2.2. All suppression system shall activate a separate zone for each water flow device on the
transceiver for off normal conditions and water flow. Flow, tamper switches and Duct detectors shall not
be on the same zone in the BTXM transceiver. Any alarm or trouble condition silenced at the panel shall
not remove that condition from the radio transceiver inputs.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
General Requirements
A. Materials and equipment shall be new standard products of the manufacturer's latest design, and suitable
to perform the function intended. Components of two or more models will not be combined to form a
single control unit. This equipment shall be in service and supported by the manufacture for five years
after the install date. Where two or more pieces of equipment must perform the same functions, the same
manufacturer shall produce this equipment. The name of the manufacturer shall appear on all major
components. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed the same as the Monaco Radio Transceiver. (CORE
NUMBER C415A). Fire alarm points shall be labeled by device type and location. There shall only be
one central fire alarm panel located in any facility. Heat detectors and all associated conduit and wiring
shall be removed from the facility when a fire sprinkler system is installed.
2.02
Quality Requirements
A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the UL, or the FMS for fire-alarm
systems of the type indicated. The Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this
specification conform to these requirements. The UL label or seal, or listing in the UL Fire Protection
Equipment Directory will be accepted as evidence that the items conform to UL requirements. The FMS
label or seal, or listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide will be accepted as sufficient evidence that
the items conform to the FMS requirements.
2.03
Shop Drawing and System Designer Qualifications
A. Within 30 days after receipt of notice to proceed and prior to starting installation, the Contractor shall
submit to the Contracting Officer for approval a complete set of shop drawings to include all material and
equipment proposed for installation Sealed by a registered fire protection engineer, by a registered
professional engineer having at least four years of current experience in the design of fire protection and
detection systems, or by an engineering technologist qualified at NICET Level IV in fire systems. The
28 31 00 - 2
MS0612
individual’s name, signature, and professional engineer number or NICET certification number shall be
included on all final design documents. All fire alarm system designs must be reviewed and
stamped by a registered professional fire protection engineer. Include manufacturer's
name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement,
device addresses, candela ratings, speaker wattage taps settings, complete wiring point to point
diagrams, and conduit layouts. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
2.04
Spare-Parts Data
A. After submittal of the list of equipment, and no later than 2 months prior to contract scheduled completion,
the Contractor shall furnish two copies of spare parts data for each different item of equipment listed. The
data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment or specified below to be furnished as part of
the contract and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient operation
for a period of 120 days at the particular installation.
2.05
Qualifications of Installer
A. System Installer: Installation personnel shall be qualified or shall be supervised by persons who are
qualified in the installation, inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems and shall be on-site at all times
during system installation, modification or upgrade. Evidence of qualifications or certification shall be
provided when requested by the authority having jurisdiction. Qualified personnel shall include, but not be
limited to, one or more of the following:
1. Personnel who are factory trained and certified for fire alarm system installation of the specific type
and brand of system being installed
2. Personnel who are certified by a nationally recognized fire alarm certification organization acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction
3. Personnel who are registered, licensed, or certified by a state or local authority.
The Contracting Officer shall reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such
qualifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Pre-Construction Test
A. Prior to starting any work on existing systems the contractor shall schedule through the contracting office
a fire alarm system pre-test to establish the baseline for the alarm system. Any discrepancies identified
shall be signed off by the contractor, 1 SOCES/CEOFA Alarm Shop, and contracting officer or his/her
representative. Failure to conduct this test will hold the contractor solely responsible for all discrepancies
during final inspection.
3.02
Installation and Wiring
A.
1. The FACP and control units shall be installed in a room directly accessible from the building exterior
and shall be condition as office space.
2. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, red
in color and parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of wiring shall conform to
NFPA 70.
NOTE: 300.11
3. Wiring located within the cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An independent
means of secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly.
4. All wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum ¾” EMT). The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
Individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the conduit.
5. All wiring for the system shall be solid wires. The fire alarm system wiring shall not share the same
conduit as other low voltage wiring, such as cameras, access control, etc.
6. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall be color-coded red for positive and black for negative.
7. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be
placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
8. Conduits shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
9. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
28 31 00 - 3
MS0612
10. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but
not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for
Notification Appliance circuits.
11. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as Fire Alarm; circuit
breaker shall be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. Fire
Alarm Control Panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be
grounded. Label all wire termination with shrink wrap labels, clearly marked with the circuit information.
12. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.
13. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring.
14. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused and must be removed.
B.
Twist-on connectors (wire nuts) shall not be used. Connections shall be permitted to be made using a
set-screw, pressure-type conductor connector, provided a means is used to prevent the set screw from
bearing directly on the conductor.
C.
Mount the BTXM radio transceiver panels at a height of 60 inches, measured from the
Floor to the top of the panel.
D.
All circuits shall be installed CLASS A, wiring and conduit shall comply with NFPA 72 CH. 6.4.2.2.2.
E.
All modules shall have their address clearly and permanently labeled on the outside of the devices.
F.
All address modules shall be integrated with the device.
G.
Fire circuits shall not be run in the same raceway, cable or conduit as high voltage circuits (120vac).
H.
Fire alarm circuits derived from the fire alarm panel shall not be terminated on the same device with
120VAC power unless it is a relay designed for the use.
3.03
Audible and Visual Alarm Devices
A. Audible and Visual devices shall be furnished to indicate an alarm throughout the building. Devices shall
be ceiling mounted unless waived in writing by the AHJ. All devices shall be supervised and operate on
low voltage D.C. furnished by the control panel. All audible devices shall meet U 464.
B. Where audible appliances are installed to provide signals for sleeping areas, they shall have a sound
level of at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level
having a duration of at least 60 seconds or a sound level of at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater,
measured at the pillow level in the area required to be served by the system using the A-weighted scale
(dBA).
C. If any barrier, such as a door, curtain, or retractable partition, is located between the notification appliance
and the pillow, the sound pressure level shall be measured with the barrier placed between the appliance
and the pillow.
D. Where permitted and if ceiling heights allows, and unless otherwise permitted all wall mounted appliances
shall comply with7.5.4 thru 7.5.4.4.8
E. Install clear/white strobes for the building fire alarm system with a factory applied and none removable
word “FIRE” RED in color to alert the occupants for complete evacuation.
F. Signal for occupants to seek information or instructions shall be amber. Provide amber colored strobes
with a factory applied and none removable word “ALERT” RED in color to alert the hearing impaired.
G. Recessed appliances shall not be permitted.
H. Monitoring Integrity of Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Systems.
28 31 00 - 4
MS0612
1. Speaker Amplifier and Tone-Generating Equipment. If speakers are used to produce audible fire
alarm signals, the required trouble signal for NFPA 72, Ch 4.4.7.2.1.1 through 4.4.7.2.1.3 shall be in
accordance with 4.4.3.5. When primary power is available, failure of any audio amplifier shall result
in a trouble signal. When an alarm is present and primary power is not available (i.e., system is
operating from the secondary power source), failure of any audio amplifier shall result in a trouble
signal.
I.
All ceiling mounted devices shall be securely mounted in an approved box attached to the ceiling grid
using a T bar and the ceiling tile shall have clips installed to prevent movement of tiles.
J.
Any system installed where the audible devices are used for fire evacuation shall comply with all the
requirements of 3.03 A-I and shall be tested for system integrity as a fire alarm system.
K. Devices shall not be mixed.
L. Strobe and speakers shall be mounted in the manufacturers back box. If the manufacturer does not
make a box then use the manufacturers recommended box.
3.04 Mass Notification Systems
A. Mass Notification System Functions
1. Notification Appliance Network: The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers
located to provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated on the drawings.
2. Strobes: Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants. Provide amber colored
strobes with a factory applied and none removable word “ALERT” RED in color to alert the hearing
impaired. Install clear/white strobes for the building fire alarm system with a factory applied and none
removable word FIRE” RED in color to alert the user.
3. Voice Notification: An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the
notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in
the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe notification appliances.
4. Mass notification systems that are integrated with the building fire alarm system shall be consider a
component of the fire alarm system and therefore shall meet all requirements of “Installed Fire Alarm
Systems” subject to the AHJ and inspected as life safety equipment.
5. All power extenders, amplifiers, and control cabinets shall be protected in accordance with NFPA 72
Ch 4.4.5 (2007 Edition)
6. All audio circuits shall be installed in accordance with UFC 4-021-01 chapter 4 (9 April 2008)
Clear/white strobes activated by the fire alarm system shall not operate during those periods when
the amber strobes are in operation, but otherwise shall operate continuously until the fire alarm
system is reset. Switching off the fire alarm strobes shall not cause a trouble at the fire alarm panel.
7. Interface with the FACP to override fire alarm audible and visual notification appliances. The FACP
shall provide supervised circuit integrity of interconnecting wiring between the MNS and FACP.
8. MNS shall temporarily override fire alarm audible messages and visual signals, and provide
intelligible voice commands during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. All other features of the fire
system, including the transmission of signals to the fire department, shall function properly. MNS
messages shall take priority and continue to override fire alarm audible messages until the MNS
message is either manually or automatically ended. If not manually ended, the MNS message will
automatically end after 10 minutes.
9. Provide a supervisory signal if the MNS is used to override fire alarm audible messages and visible
signals during simultaneous fire and terrorist events. The supervisory signal shall be at the FACP and
any remote fire alarm annunciators, and be transmitted to the fire department. The visual
annunciation of the separate supervisory signal shall be distinctly labeled or otherwise clearly
identified.
10. Make general paging or other non-emergency messages available without the activation of strobes.
A separate microphone must be provided for this purpose.
11. Disable use of any microphones intended solely for general paging or other non-emergency
messages upon loss of normal AC power.
12. a. A Local Operating Console (LOC) shall be provided so that the travel distance to the nearest LOC
will not be in excess of 61 m (200 ft) measured horizontally on the same floor. Have a single
switch capable of shutting down all HVAC equipment in the facility in accordance with the
requirements of UFC 4-010-01. The HVAC shutdown switch shall be supervised by the FACP
28 31 00 - 5
MS0612
and have a unique address for each LOC shutdown switch. The LOC shall be clearly marked on
the cabinet with the address information. Label shall be engraved
b. Where MNS is not installed the “AIR HANDLER SHUTDOWN” is still required and shall be placed
next to any Fire Alarm Anunciator.
13. AC fail on the MNS system (any component) shall generate a separate trouble to the BTX-M and
transmit to the fire department.
14. No penetration will be made at the top of any control cabinet except as designed by the manufacture
and cannot be altered.
15. The Monaco BTX-M radio shall be capable of receiving Live voice commands and activating the 8
pre-recorded messages from the Monaco D-21 located at Fire Department control room.
3.05
Mass Notification Control Panel
A. Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein.
Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed
from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete
control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Control unit shall provide power, supervision,
control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and
arranged for easy access. Control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and
displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least eight pre-recorded
messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure
microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to initiate/synchronize
strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local
diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file. Provide all
necessary components to interface with fire alarm and detection system.
B. Cabinet: Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and
also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. No external wires to
pass through cabinet. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin
nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less
than one inch high. The cabinet shall be provided in sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged
steel door with cylinder lock keyed to C415A ,and surface mounting provisions. Mount the fire/MNS
panels at a height of no higher than 72 inches, measured from the floor to the TOP of the cabinet.
C. Voice Notification System: The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72
for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements IEC 60849, IEC 60268, Part 16,
except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system
incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of
a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow
whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset
or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floor, but not in
stairs or elevator cabs. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a
microphone input at the control panel or live voice transmitted from the fire department. When using the
microphone, live messages shall be broadcast through speakers throughout the building. The system
shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The live voice from the ACU shall be
priority 1; live voice from the fire department is priority 2; and the live voice from the LOC shall be
priority 3. The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor based
input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital
coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the
appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that
could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to
take over all functions assigned to the failed unit. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be
provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the
operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600 ohms), 25, 70.7
or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The
strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the
ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall
take priority over any tone signal, recorded message while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits
activation. All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and
trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions.
Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass
28 31 00 - 6
MS0612
Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble signals to be generated at the Fire
Alarm system but shall transmit a supervisory signal via the BTX-M transceiver to the fire department.
Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice
Notification System. PA systems and Background music are not authorized. Messages shall be as
follows:
Priority
Type
*Pre-tone
**Voice
1
Bomb
Threat
Continuous
Male
2
Intruder
Continuous
Male
3
Alternate
Exit
Fire
Continuous
Male
Code 3
Male
Continuous
Male
6
Shelter In
Place
Weather
none
Male
7
All Clear
none
Male
8
Test
none
Male
4
5
Message Script (tones and messages repeat a
minimum of three times)
May I have your attention please! A bomb threat has
been reported in or around the building. Please follow the
pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! An intruder/hostile
person has been sighted within or around the building.
Please follow the pre-plan and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! Please evacuate the
building – using the designated alternate exits.
May I have your attention please! A fire emergency has
been reported in the building. While this is being verified,
please leave by the nearest exit and report to your
designated assembly area.
May I have your attention please! Please shelter in place,
and await further instructions.
May I have your attention please! The National Weather
Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area.
May I have your attention please! The building emergency
has ended. An all clear has been given. Please resume
normal activities
May I have your attention please! This is a test of the
mass notification system, this is only a test.
D.
Memory: Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use
of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal
to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
E.
Field Programmability: Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable
for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The
system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password
protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
3.06
Notification Appliances
A. Mass Notification Speakers: Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.
Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Audible appliances shall generate a
unique audible sound from other devices provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface
mounted audible appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a
grill that is painted white with a factory finish to match the surface to which it is mounted.
1. Provide appliances capable of satisfying all Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and
Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) Speakers shall conform to the
applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and
operate with audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac, and 25 Vac, by means of selectable
tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a
high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 400Hz to
4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on
standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard
reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the Voice Notification System.
2. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16
gauges and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation.
Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance
for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.
3. Provide speakers and installation methods compliant with Director of Central Intelligence Directive
(DCID) 6/9 for areas classified as sensitive, compartmented information facilities (SCIF).
28 31 00 - 7
MS0612
4. Verify intelligibility by measurement after installation. Ensure that a Common Intelligibility Scale (CIS)
score greater than .8 is provided in each area where building occupants normally could be found.
Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces (such as metal or concrete) that
are found to cause excessive sound reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than .8 if
approved by the DOD installation, and if building occupants in these areas can determine that a voice
signal is being broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 ft to find a location with a CIS score of
at least .8. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally present are
permitted to have a CIS score less than .8 if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 ft to a location with a CIS score of at least .8.
Measurements should be taken near the head level applicable for most personnel in the space under
normal conditions ( e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping, as appropriate). Commercially available test
instruments shall be used to measure intelligibility as specified by IEC 60849 and IEC 60268-16. The
mean value of at least three readings shall be used to compute the intelligibility score at each test
location. The installer is required to demonstrate these test result at commissioning.
5. Strobe and speakers shall be mounted in the manufacturers back box. If the manufacturer does not
make a box, then the user shall use a manufacturers recommended box, speakers shall be totally
enclose so as not to allow dust or flyings to enter.
6. Ensure speakers in the vicinity of the control panel and LOC will not create acoustical feedback or
otherwise interfere with the ability to deliver live voice messages.
B. Visual Notification Appliances: Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements
of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Mass Notification Appliances shall
have clear high intensity optic lens and xenon flash tubes. The clear optic lens shall have the special
wording “FIRE”, the amber lens shall have the special wording “Alert” factory embossed on the device.
The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree
angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 75
candelas based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be ceiling-flush mounted only. Where more than two
appliances are located in the same room or corridor, provide synchronized operation.
3.07
Wiring.
A. 1. The MNS control units shall be installed in a room directly accessible from the building exterior.
2. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, painted
red and parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Installation of wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.
NOTE: 300.11
3. Wiring located within the cavity of a non–fire-rated floor–ceiling or roof–ceiling assembly shall not be
secured to, or supported by, the ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An independent
means of secure support shall be provided and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly.
4. All wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum ¾” EMT). The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
Individual conductors shall not exceed 40 percent of the interior cross-sectional area of the conduit.
5. All wiring for the system shall be solid wires. The fire alarm system wiring shall not share the same
conduit as other low voltage wiring, such as cameras, access control, etc.
6. Wiring for audible visual circuits shall be color-coded red for positive and black for negative.
7. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be
placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
8. Conduits shall not enter the MNS Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the manufacturer.
9. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the MNS system.
10. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but
not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for
Notification Appliance circuits.
11. The MNS Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as MNS, circuit breaker
shall be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. MNS
Control Panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded.
Label all wire termination with shrink wrap labels, clearly marked with the circuit information.
12. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet.
13. System components shall be securely fastened to their supports independently of the wiring.
14. Existing wiring in facilities being renovated shall not be reused and must be removed.
B. Twist-on connectors (wire nuts) shall not be used. Connections shall be permitted to be made using set
28 31 00 - 8
MS0612
screw, pressure-type conductor connector, provided a means is used to prevent the set screw
from bearing directly on the conductor.
C
Mount the MNS panels at a MAX height of 72 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the cabinet.
D. All circuits shall be installed CLASS A, wiring and conduit shall comply with NFPA 72 CH. 6.4.2.2.2.
E. All modules shall have their address, loop and power supply number clearly and permanently labeled on
the outside of the devices.
F. All address modules shall be integrated with the device.
G. MNS circuits shall not be run in the same raceway, cable or conduit as high voltage circuits (120vac).
H. MNS circuits derived from the MNS panel shall not be terminated on the same device with
120VAC power unless it is a relay designed for the use.
3.08
LCD Alphanumeric Display
A. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator: A minimum of at least one annunciator shall be installed.
1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display containing a
minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble (Note: must be able to disable trouble
pizo of the annunciator) conditions in the system.
3. Up to 32 LCD annunciators may be connected to a EIA 485 interface. LCD annunciators shall not
reduce the annunciation or point capacity of the system. Each LCD shall include vital system wide
functions such as, System Acknowledge, Silence and Reset.
4. LCD display annunciators shall mimic the main control panel 80 character displays and shall not
require special programming.
5. The LCD annunciator shall have switches which may be programmed for System control such as,
Global Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence and Global System Reset. These switch inputs shall be
capable of being disabled permanently. Mount LCD annunciator at the main entrance to the facility.
3.09
Future Use
3.10
Drawings and Manuals
A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings. Drawings shall show equipment configuration, control panel equipment and
subassembly locations, and the location of all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color
codes and terminal numbers and termination points for all wires. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish
two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The drawings shall include a detailed wiring layout
showing all junction boxes and all system wiring, including number of wires, with speaker and strobe
circuits identified with speaker taps and candela ratings. Show module location and address. The layout
shall be done on the building floor plans and combined with fire detection and alarm system. See section
01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT.
3.11
Manual and Fire alarm Stations
A. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.
B. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
C. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided
on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear in the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm)
or larger.
D. The operable part of each manual fire alarm box shall be not less than 1.1 m (3 ft) and not more than
1.37 m (4 ft) above floor level.
E. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be installed so that they are conspicuous, unobstructed, and accessible.
F. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be located within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the exit doorway opening at each exit on
28 31 00 - 9
MS0612
each floor and located on the side of the opening.
G.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be mounted on both sides of grouped openings over 12.2m (40 ft) in width,
and within 1.5 m (5 ft) of each side of the opening.
H.
Additional manual fire alarm boxes shall be provided so that the travel distance to the nearest fire alarm
box will not be in excess of 61 m (200 ft) measured horizontally on the same floor.
3.12
Fire-Detecting Equipment
A. Fire detecting equipment shall conform to NFPA 72 and shall be of the following types, as indicated on
the drawings and as approved by the AHJ. All devices shall be addressable, no conventional devices
allowed. Detector circuit design shall be suitable for the types and numbers of detectors, as approved,
and shall limit detector circuit current not to exceed ratings of the detectors and associated relays.
Smoke detectors shall not be installed or have protective cover removed until after the construction
cleanup of all trades is complete and final. Furthermore, during renovation projects, existing detectors
shall be removed and reinstalled or covered during construction.
B. Location: Detecting equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Should a conflict occur
between the drawings and the NFPA codes, the NFPA codes shall take precedence. Fire alarm
components will not be installed on building exteriors unless expressly required by NFPA codes and then
must be weather proof. Pull stations shall have removable plastic covers without sounders and be sealed
around their mounting surface. Heat detectors shall be placed to provide total (complete) coverage as
required in NFPA 72.
C. Photoelectric Type Smoke Detectors: Ceiling smoke detectors, which operate on the light scattering or
the light obstruction principle, shall be furnished. In sleeping rooms, ceiling mounted smoke detectors
shall be powered by DC circuits from the FACP, sound an audible alarm within the room only, does not
activate or transmit signal to fire department and if removed from mount or disconnected, send a trouble
signal with room location to the fire alarm panel to be transmitted to the fire department. AC powered
detectors shall not be installed. Where combination heat smoke detectors are installed in sleeping areas,
the smoke detector will operate as indicated above and the heat detector side shall announce a general
alarm throughout the facility and transmit and alarm signal to the fire department. Smoke detectors shall
not be located in a direct airflow or closer than 3 feet from an air supply diffuser or return air opening.
1. The area of protection for smoke detection devices permitted by NFPA 72 must be reduced by 50%
where destratification (ceiling) fans are used. UFC 3-600-01 5-43.1
D. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and
installed in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Sampling tubes of sufficient length shall be
provided so that the sampling tube can extend out of the opposite side of the duct for inspection. The
sampling tubes must be secured to the duct on both sides of the duct regardless of size. A remote
key/reset/test switch shall be furnished for duct detectors that are at a location that is not easily
accessible for testing the installed duct detector. The detector housing shall be equipped with a
transparent viewing port which shall permit viewing of detector head Alarm/Power-On indicator -at viewing
angles up to 80 degrees off normal and inspection of cleanliness conditions inside the detector head
mounting chamber. The detector shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals
for making all wiring connections. The detector indicator shall blink intermittently during standby
conditions and shall glow red during alarm conditions. All LED's to indicate the operating and alarm
condition and test and reset buttons or test part shall be visible, and accessible, with the unit installed and
the cover in place. Detector operating voltage will be supplied from the DC circuits of the fire alarm panel.
1. Air Handler Units (AHU) with a capacity below 2000CFM shall not have duct smoke detectors
installed but shall be shut down from the fire alarm panel during an alarm activation. AHU’s with
a capacity between 2000 - 15,000 CFM shall have one duct detector installed in the supply air
duct. AHU’s with a capacity greater than 15,000 CFM will have two duct detectors installed, one
in the supply air duct and one in the return air duct. Duct smoke detectors (2000 and larger) will
shut down their respective AHU’s upon activation will initiate a supervisory signal at the fire alarm
panel. The fire alarm panel shall activate a separate zone for duct detectors on the Monaco Radio to
send a supervisory signal to the fire department.
2. A key switch shall be installed to bypass AIR Handler shutdown, for system testing, all other function
shall not be impaired, the switch shall be supervised and send a signal via the Monaco transceiver to
the fire department on a separate and distinct zone.
E. Fixed-Temperature Heat Detectors: Only Addressable Fixed temperature heat detectors shall be
28 31 00 - 10
MS0612
installed. The UL 521 test rating shall be 135 degrees F. or as shown. Heat detectors installed in attics
and mechanical rooms shall be rated at 194 degrees F only. Heat detectors installed in exterior
applications such as open storage units shall be all weather detectors.
3.13
System Components Addressable Devices
A. Addressable Devices General
1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address switches.
Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.
2. Addressable devices, which use a binary coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch,
are not an allowable substitute.
3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire
alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.
4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both
LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in
regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady red
illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the
LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall
also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
5. The fire alarm control panel shall provide detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of
the system. The panel on a time of day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity.
6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and
other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by
UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.
7. The detectors shall be ceiling mount and shall include a separate twist lock base with tamper proof
feature. Bases shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum,
a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 6 applications. (Applies only to sleeping
quarters)
8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report
that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a
magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed
environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured
values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing
the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to
view the current analog value of each detector.
11. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify
the type of device.
12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an
indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.
13. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4inch square (101.6 mm square), 21/ 8 inch (54 mm) deep
electrical box.
14. All manual pull stations shall be mounted in the manufactures back box. If the manufacture does not
make a box then use the manufactures recommended box.
B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)
1. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the
panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status.
They shall use a key operated test reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency
operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.
2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
3. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75
inches (44 mm) or larger.
4. All manual pull stations shall be mounted in the manufactures back box. If the manufacture does not
make a box then use the manufactures recommended box.
C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light scattering) principal to send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density.
28 31 00 - 11
MS0612
D. Intelligent Laser Photo Smoke Detector
1. The intelligent laser photo smoke detector shall be a spot type detector that incorporates an
extremely bright laser diode and an integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small
volume near a receiving photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the
photo sensor.
2. The laser detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust accumulation is reduced
significantly.
3. The intelligent laser photo detector shall have nine sensitivity levels and be sensitive to a
minimum obscuration of 0.03 percent per foot.
4. The laser detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings or PVC pipe.
5. The intelligent laser photo detector shall support standard, relay, isolator and sounder
detector bases.
6. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in
NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not
be required.
7. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normal operation
and turn on steady red in alarm.
E. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the dual chamber ionization principal to measure products of
combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of products of combustion.
F. Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector
1. The intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that is
designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single
sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a
built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate sensing
settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per
foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow
smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing device.
2. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels
based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then have the
ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls are moved
or as the occupancy changes).
3. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of
the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastily in
the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a
fire condition and false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and
smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive
phenomena.
G. Intelligent Thermal Detectors
1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit
(58 degrees Celsius) fix temp.
H. Future Use
I. Hostile Area Smoke Detector
1. The detector shall be designed to provide early warning smoke detection in environments
where traditional smoke detectors are not practical.
2. The detector shall have a filter system to remove particles down to 25 microns.
3. This filter system shall remove unwanted airborne particles and water mist. This shall allow
the detector to operate in environments where traditional smoke detectors would have
nuisance alarms.
4. The filter system shall consist of 2 filters one of which is field replaceable.
5. The filter system shall have an intake fan to draw air and smoke through the filters into the
sensing chamber.
6. The filter system shall be supervised so that if the filter is clogged or the fan fails the control
panel reports trouble.
7. The filter system shall be powered from 24 VDC separate from the SLC communications.
8. The detector shall utilize a photoelectric sensing chamber.
28 31 00 - 12
MS0612
J. Water-flow Indicator:
1. Water-flow Switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard type.
2. Water-flow Switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conveniently adjustable from
0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30 to 45 seconds.
3. All water-flow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series.
4. Water-flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but installed by the mechanical
contractor.
5. Where possible, locate water-flow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting which changes the
direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve.
6. Water flow switches shall be wired to an addressable monitoring module, shall activate a non
silenceable alarm at the FACP and transmit a signal from the BTXM on a dedicated Zone.
K. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser
control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain
valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.
2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be secured with a chain and lock.
3. Each valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected as separate addressable points to the
fire alarm system and shall report a separate and distinct supervisory alarm to the fire department
(SPRINKLER TAMPER). Rope type tamper switches are not permitted.
L. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module Note: If approved by AHJ
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm
control panel SLCs.
2. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Class A operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel.
3. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be
no larger than 2 3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1 1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not
include Style D or an LED.
M. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional
2wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device).
2. The IDC zone shall be wired for Class A operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel.
N. Addressable Control Module
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one
conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered polarized audio/visual notification appliances.
2. The control module NAC may be wired for Class A signal operation.
3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm
control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply.
4. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
O. Addressable Relay Module
1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The
relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay
coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to same time on the
same pair of wires.
3.14
Suppression Systems
A. Control Valve Supervisory Signal-Initiating Device.
1. Two separate and distinct signals shall be initiated: one indicating movement of the valve from
its normal position (off-normal) and the other indicating restoration of the valve to its normal position.
The off-normal signal shall be initiated during the first two revolutions of the wheel or during onefifth of the travel distance of the valve control apparatus from its normal position.
The off-normal signal shall not be restored at any valve position except normal.
28 31 00 - 13
MS0612
Initiating device for supervising the position of a control valve shall not interfere with the
operations of the valve, obstruct the view of its indicator, or prevent access for valve maintenance.
2. Control valve supervisor signals shall be sent to the fire station as a separate supervisor signal via the
Monaco BTX-M radio transceiver.
3. Fire pumps are required to be monitored. Individual supervisory signals shall be provided for the
following conditions:
a. Fire pump running signals are ALARMS
b. Fire pump loss of power of a phase
c. Fire pump phase reversal
d. Activation of a fire pump supervisory signal shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control
panel and at the remote annunciators. Each set of contacts in the fire pump controller shall have
address. All fire pump supervisory signals shall be transmitted to Fire Department VIA the BTX-M
radio as a separate supervisory signal.
B. RELEASING SYSTEMS: Testing personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the specific
arrangement and operation of a suppression system(s) and a releasing function(s) and shall be cognizant
of the hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge. Testing shall include verification that the
releasing circuits and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically
supervised and operate as intended on alarm.
C.
A complete system discharge test including releasing of suppression agent activated from the overhead
riser shall be required on all new systems and any system that is modified.
Suppression systems and releasing components shall be returned to their functional operating condition
upon completion of system testing.
D. Outside water/Electric gongs shall not be required.
3.15 Kitchen Hood Suppression System
A. Kitchen hood suppression system shall not be installed in a manner that a loss of power would generate
an alarm however; a trouble single would be required. A system test shall be required use air to simulate
agent.
B. All system regardless of size shall be connected to the fire alarm system.
3.16
Access Control
A. Access control shall comply with Life Safety Code 101 para 7.2.1.5.2. Any device or system intended to
actuate the locking or unlocking of exits shall be connected to the fire alarm system serving the protected
premises. All exits connected in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 shall unlock upon receipt of any
fire alarm signal by means of the fire alarm system serving the protected premises. Exception: Where
otherwise required or permitted by the authority having jurisdiction or other codes. For all exits connected
in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 and where batteries are used in accordance with NFPA 72 ch
4.4.1.5.1(1) as the secondary power supply, the batteries shall not be utilized to maintain these doors in
the locked condition unless the fire alarm control unit is arranged with circuitry and sufficient secondary
power to ensure the exits will unlock within 10 minutes of loss of primary power. If exit doors are unlocked
by the fire alarm system, the unlocking function shall occur prior to or concurrent with activation of any
public-mode notification appliances in the area(s) served by the normally locked exits. All doors that are
required to be unlocked by the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 ch 6.16.7.1 through
6.16.7.5 shall remain unlocked until the fire alarm condition is manually reset.
3.17
CONTROL UNIT
A. Control unit (Fire alarm panel) shall be addressable and be fully field programmable from the internal
keyboard unless waived by the AHJ in writing. This shall include the addition of points, modification of
points, and deletions. ALL system software required to perform uploads/downloads by base
maintenance personnel shall be supplied. This includes the program for the facility system as well as the
software and computer key that the laptop computer must use to perform these functions. Any
connecting cables required to interface the laptop with the FACP shall be supplied. Installed as part of the
system in each protected building and shall be approved for use with the fire detecting equipment,
manual fire-alarm stations, and alarm-sounding devices. The unit shall operate with 24 volts DC derived
from its internal AC rectifier/power supply. The control unit circuits shall be exclusively solid state. The
control unit shall be housed in a substantial steel cabinet with lock and key C415A. The cabinet shall be
painted inside and out. The control unit shall include light emitting diodes (LED's)(Lamps or neon tubes
28 31 00 - 14
MS0612
not acceptable) to visually indicate the system condition, e.g., alarm and trouble by zone, system trouble
conditions, primary and backup power supply status, etc. The control unit shall include a means to test all
control unit functions. This includes a system test switch, zone disable, system reset, auxiliary disconnect
and audible trouble silence switch, etc. The silence switch shall be provided with an audible resound
feature. The unit shall supervise all alarm initiating circuits and all alarm sounding circuits. It shall also
provide regulated and unregulated DC power for smoke detectors, which do not operate on zone voltage.
With a point disabled the control unit shall repeat the alarm sequence when a second, third, etc., alarm is
initiated on other zones. All LED's shall be plainly visible when the door on the control unit is closed. The
control unit shall operate separate audible and visual signals when a ground fault is detected in any
supervised circuit or device. It shall sound a distinct audible alarm and activate the notification appliance
circuit throughout the building when any manual or automatic device on the system is activated. The fire
alarm panel shall be equipped with at least one alarm, one supervisory and one trouble relay as integral
components of the panel. Add on relays are not acceptable. Alarm relay and the trouble relay dry
contacts shall be used solely to activate a radio transceiver, Monaco BTXM. Only low voltage (24) will be
brought into the panel for auxiliary functions. The use of plug-on units and special devices not supplied by
the manufacturer in conjunction with this feature is unacceptable. The control unit shall meet the
requirements of UL 864 and shall be listed for NFPA 72.
B.
A separate supervisory module will be provided for sprinkler tampers and supervisory circuits.
C.
Main FACP or network node shall be a NOTIFIER Model NFS2640 or equal and shall contain a
microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an economical space saving
single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used
to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable
modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.
D.
Water-flow Operation
An alarm from a water-flow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on
the main panel display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be
affected by the signal silence switch.
E. Operator Control
1.
Acknowledge Switch:
a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles
shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from
flashing mode to steady ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this
switch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.
b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo
sounders.
2. Alarm Silence Switch:
a. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances
and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification
circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the
confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto
silence timers.
F. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch:
1. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch
until the panel is silenced or reset.
G. System Reset Switch:
1. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating devices,
appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their
normal condition.
H. Future Use.
I.
System Capacity and General Operation
1. The control panel or each network node shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 636
intelligent/addressable devices.
28 31 00 - 15
MS0612
2. The control panel or each network node shall include Form C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and
security relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC.
3. It shall also include two Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits.
4. The Notification Appliance Circuits shall be programmable to Synchronize with System Sensor,
Gentex and Wheelock Notification Appliances.
5. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall
include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an
alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire
alarm system.
6. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for
special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of
memory ICs to facilitate programming changes.
7. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. The
system shall provide a minimum of 8 programmable form C contacts for triggering zones on the
Monaco transceiver. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have
complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not
considered suitable substitutes. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and,"
"or," and "not," or time delay equations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall
require the use of a PC with a software utility designed for programming. The system shall provide a
minimum of 8 programmable form C contacts triggering zones on the Monaco Transceiver.
8. The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features:
a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a
smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out.
b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 5.
c. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive
smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation.
d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be .5 to 2.35
percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors.
The system shall also support sensitive advanced detection laser detectors with an alarm level
range of .03 percent per foot to 1.0 percent per foot. The system shall also include up to nine
levels of Pre-alarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenance personnel.
e. The ability to display or print system reports.
f. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a
detector enters verification 20 times.
g. PAS pre-signal, meeting NFPA 72 6.8.1.3 requirements.
h. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software.
i. Self optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each detector to learn its
particular environment and set its pre-alarm level to just above normal peaks.
j. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm,
or one smoke detector and one thermal detector.
k. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.
l. Control by time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules.
m. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.
n. Device blink control for sleeping areas.
9. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March Time (120 PPM),
Temporal, and California Code. The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize
specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse." Notification Appliances shall meet
the requirements specified in chapter 7 of NFPA 72.
J.
Remote LCD annunciator’s will be required. Exact numbers and location will be determined by design and
approved by the AHJ at least one annunciator will be installed. The location of an operated initiating
device shall be annunciated by visible mean and at location accessible to first responders. Visible
annunciation shall be by an alphanumeric display. The visible annunciation of the location of operated
initiating devices shall not be canceled by the means used to deactivate alarm notification appliances.
K. Protection of Fire Alarm System. Automatic smoke detection shall be provided at the location of each fire
alarm control unit(s), notification appliance circuit power extenders, and supervising station transmitting
equipment to provide notification of fire at that location.
L.
Audible Trouble Signal Silencing Means. The panel shall not utilize a key function to control unauthorized
access to the panel.
28 31 00 - 16
MS0612
M.
No penetration will be made at the top of any control cabinet except where provided by manufacture and
shall not be altered.
3.18
TRANSCEIVERS
A. Radio transceiver shall be provided for interface of the building fire alarm system and the existing Base
central monitor receiver.
B. The transceiver required is a Building Transceiver BTX-M with a minimum of one transceiver, one relay
board and one audio board manufactured by Monaco Enterprises, Inc.
C. Wiring used to interface the transceiver alarm and trouble Inputs with the fire alarm control panel shall be
no greater in size than 18 AWG. Mount the radio at a height of 54 inches, measured from the floor.
D. The frequency of operation for the transceiver shall be 163.5375 MHz.
E. The minimum zone shall be as follows:
1, Fire Alarm/trouble
2, Sprinkler Flow
3. Sprinkler Tamper
4. MNS override of a fire alarm signal
5. Duct Detector supervisory
F. No penetration will be made at the top transceiver cabinet.
G. 1SOCES\CEOFA alarm shop will program the BTXM radio.
3.19
ANTENNA
A. Antenna: Antenna Monaco Assembly Part No. 190-400-00. Antenna shall be installed in accordance with
Hurlburt Field Specification 28 31 00 Part 3, section 3.19. Lightning arrestor kit shall be Monaco
Assembly Part No. 190-007-01.
B. Contractor shall provide a radio frequency (RF) power meter to test and verify that the standing wave
ratio (SWR) is within the manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Future Use.
D.
Frequency: Antennas shall be designed to operate on the specified radio frequency of 163.5375 MHZ.
E. Environmental Requirements: All antenna assemblies shall be of corrosion-resistant materials and
designed for reliable operation under adverse conditions including 100-mph winds, ice, snow, and rain.
Antenna mast shall be ¾ inch rigid aluminum and use a ¾ coupling at the top for the pl 259 connector.
Antenna structure to include brackets, lightning arrestor box and all conduits shall be painted in
accordance with Hurlburt Field regulation to match the structure were attached.
F. Antenna Cables: Coaxial cables shall be 50 ohm RG-8x with minimum 95% shield and shall include PL
259 and BNC type fittings or connectors as appropriate. Antenna cable for transmitter shall be RG-8x
coaxial cable if length is under 200 feet, 9913 if over 200 feet. Utilize proper fittings PL259 and BNC.
Cables is excess of 2 feet of the required length are not acceptable with a minimum 10 inches in the
panel. The antenna cable shall be installed in ¾ rigid aluminum conduit from radio to base of antenna
with no cables exposed use a ¾ coupling at the top of mast for the PL259.
G. Grounding of Antenna Systems: Antenna masts and static discharge unit ground terminals shall be
grounded in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, Article 810-21, AFI 32-1065 and the
manufacturer's instructions, bonded to the facility lighting grid. Static discharge units and their enclosures
shall be located inside the buildings as close as practical to the antenna lead-in point of entry. Ground
rods shall be of copper-clad steel conforming to UL 4561 not less than 5/8 inch in diameter by ten feet in
length. Ground rods shall not protrude above grade, ground wire from rod to equipment shall be protected
in ½ EMT conduit. Ground rod shall be bonded to the building grounding system. Non-current-carrying
metallic parts associated with mass notification equipment shall have maximum resistance to solid earth
ground not to exceed the following values: Antennas/static discharge units 10 ohms; Radio alarm
transceivers 10 ohms.
28 31 00 - 17
MS0612
3.20
Power Supply
A. Primary Power Supply: Primary power supply for ALL control units (this includes but not limited to FACP,
MNS, BTXM transceiver and power supplies. Shall be on a dedicated 20-amp branch circuit and
individually protected by surge protection devices part number EDCO Hsp121bt1r2 the circuit breaker shall
be protected from operation by unauthorized personnel by a circuit breaker guard. At locations where the
circuit breaker is out of sight of the fire alarm control panel, a disconnect switch shall be installed adjacent
to the control panel and clearly marked “FIRE ALARM”. The conductors feeding the control panel shall
be #12 AWG. Stake-on terminal lugs are not acceptable for wire terminations. Id tag will be rigid plastic.
Primary power supply wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing in accordance with the
applicable requirements of the NEC 70.
B. Standby Power Supply: Standby power to insure operation of the fire alarm system in the event of primary
power failure shall be provided by no more than two each maintenance free storage batteries.
C. Power supply shall be provided with an automatic battery charger capable of a high/low charge rate.
D. Battery shall have the capacity to operate the fire system for 24 hours and then be capable of sounding
all general alarms for fifteen minutes for all fire alarm systems.
E. Space for Future Use.
F. The charging circuit for all systems shall be supervised to indicate a low battery condition and be rated to
recharge fully discharged batteries in 24 hours.
3.21
Fire Department Equipment
A. The Contractor shall furnish transceiver that will interface, and be fully compatible with the Government
system installed at fire department. The existing system is a Monaco D21-M Radio Fire ALARM System.
B. Contractor shall supply and install signage displaying the building number meeting base specification.
3.22
A.
Drawing and Manuals
Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish two copies of
"as-built" drawings on CD or DVD and shall be in CAD format. Drawings shall show equipment
configuration, control panel equipment and subassembly locations, and the location of the transceiver and
all connecting Wiring. Drawings shall include all wiring color codes and terminal numbers and termination
points for all wires. They shall include a detailed wiring layout showing all junction boxes, all system
wiring, including number of wires, with zones and alarm sounding circuits, initiating and alarm sounding
devices identified by module number and strobes with candela rating. In addition, the Contractor shall
furnish two copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. The layout shall be done on the building floor
plans. The final inspection cannot take place without the drawings.
3.23
A.
Special Tools
All special tools or equipment necessary for the operation and maintenance of the equipment including
testing shall be furnished this includes but not limited to a laptop, software, cables and hardware keys
(dongle) if required. The items furnished will be new/unused items with packaging and manuals.
3.24
Repair of Existing Work
A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls,
partitions, ceilings or other surfaces as necessary for the proper installation, support, or anchorage of the
conduit or other work shall be carefully done. Damage to buildings, piping or equipment shall be repaired
and refinished by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
3.25 Tests
A. After all equipment for this system has been installed and made operational, and at a time directed by the
Contracting Office, the contractor shall conduct tests to demonstrate that the installation and the system
operation is in accordance with the plans and specifications. Testing of the system shall include remote
annunciation of alarms and trouble conditions to the fire department. In addition to the request letter, the
Contractor shall submit a test plan/procedure to the Contracting Officer to indicate his proposed method
to demonstrate compliance with the plans and specifications. The contractor will also certify in writing that
the work accomplished meets all contractual requirements. The government will provide one retest.
28 31 00 - 18
MS0612
Subsequent testing will result in reimbursement of expenses to the Government. Satisfactory operation
of each of the following devices shall be demonstrated during the test:
1. Each automatic detector.
2. Each manual fire alarm station.
3. Each transceiver, all functions.
4. Each audible alarm device.
5. Each visual alarm device.
6. Supervision of each device such as; heat detectors, pull stations, smoke detectors, etc; and alarm
zone circuits to include ground faults.
7. Satisfactory operation after loss of primary power supply.
8. Satisfactory operation of each device shut down circuit with correct zone correspondence. This shall
not be simulated but shall actually be demonstrated by actual device/equipment shutdown.
9. All control panel functions, alarm and trouble, audible and visual indicators, silence switches and their
resound function and alarm resound features of the control unit.
10. In each zone containing automatic smoke detectors, each detector will be put into the alarm mode
and stay in that mode for 10 minutes after the last detector goes into alarm, to verify satisfactory
operation of the detectors and the detector power supply module under alarm load. Smoke is
expressly forbidden for this test.
11. Supervision of DC power on each automatic detector circuit.
B. Documentation Required. Every system shall include the following documentation, which shall be
delivered to the contracting officer two weeks prior to any initial inspections the system:
1. An owner’s manual and manufacturer's published instructions covering all system equipment. Provide
all manuals, drawings, technical/programming manual on a DVD disk.
2. Record drawings
3. For software-based systems, provide programming software, database, dongle key and computer
cable to connect to fire panel.
3.26
TRAINING
A. Equipment installer shall provide 1 day on site training for maintenance personnel.
B. 5 days of technical training to the government at the manufacturing facility. Training shall be
accomplished by the manufacturer of the equipment within 90 days. Training shall allow for classroom
instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. The
contractor shall furnish all literature, materials and training aids. Travel, Per Diem and hotel cost will be at
the government’s expense. Factory training shall occur within 3 months of system acceptance. The
training days will be Monday through Friday between 0700 and 1600.
C. Provide 2 days of training onsite for Hurlburt Fire Department.
D. The Contracting Officer will approve all training dates and times.
3.27
Quality Control
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under the section to assure
compliance with contract requirements, and maintain records of his quality control for all materials,
equipment, and construction operations, including but not limited to the following:
1. Preparatory Inspection: (To be conducted prior to commencing work.)
2. Submittal of all materials and shop drawings necessary for accomplishment.
3. Have in hand equipment and wiring layout-showing sequence of wiring.
4. Qualifications of installing firm.
B. Initial inspection: (To be conducted after a representative sample of the work is complete.)
1. Check mounting heights, supports, accessibility of all items.
2. Check temperature ratings of detection against ceiling temperatures anticipated at detector locations.
3. Check size of conduit, boxes, and wires for proper sizing in accordance with National Electrical Code
and Contracts.
C. Follow-Up Inspection: (to be conducted daily to assure compliance with results of initial inspection.)
1. Determine that noted deficiencies are corrected.
2. Make corrections for "as-built" fire alarm system drawings.
3. Determine that all installed equipment is functional and in accordance with the contract requirement.
28 31 00 - 19
MS0612
4. Operational test performed.
5. Damages or defects corrected.
A copy of these records and Contractor tests as well as records of corrective action taken, shall be
furnished the government as directed by the contracting officer.
3.28
Final Inspection
A. At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the
major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
END OF SECTION
28 31 00 - 20
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement